Yaskawa G5 GPD515 Drive Manual
जाहिरात
जाहिरात
GPD 515/G5 Drive
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
Drives Division 16555 W. Ryerson Rd., New Berlin, WI 53151, U.S.A.
Phone: (800) YASKAWA (800-927-5292) Fax: (262) 782-3418
Internet: http://www.drives.com
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
Chicago-Corporate Headquarters
2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone: (800) YASKAWA (800-927-5292) Fax: (847) 887-7310
Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com
MOTOMAN INC.
805 Liberty Lane, West Carrollton, OH 45449, U.S.A.
Phone: (937) 847-6200 Fax: (937) 847-6277
Internet: http://www.motoman.com
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
New Pier Takeshiba South Tower, 1-16-1, Kaigan, Minatoku, Tokyo, 105-0022, Japan
Phone: 81-3-5402-4511 Fax: 81-3-5402-4580
Internet: http://www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL COMERCIO LTDA.
Avenida Fagundes Filho, 620 Bairro Saude Sao Paolo-SP, Brasil CEP: 04304-000
Phone: 55-11-5071-2552 Fax: 55-11-5581-8795
Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com.br
YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH
Am Kronberger Hang 2, 65824 Schwalbach, Germany
Phone: 49-6196-569-300 Fax: 49-6196-888-301
MOTOMAN ROBOTICS AB
Box 504 S38525, Torsas, Sweden
Phone: 46-486-48800 Fax: 46-486-41410
MOTOMAN ROBOTEC GmbH
Kammerfeldstrabe 1, 85391 Allershausen, Germany
Phone: 49-8166-900 Fax: 49-8166-9039
YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD.
1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld, G68 9LF, Scotland, United Kingdom
Phone: 44-12-3673-5000 Fax: 44-12-3645-8182
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION
Paik Nam Bldg. 901 188-3, 1-Ga Euljiro, Joong-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Phone: 82-2-776-7844 Fax: 82-2-753-2639
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.
Head Office: 151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park Singapore 556741, Singapore
Phone: 65-282-3003 Fax: 65-289-3003
TAIPEI OFFICE (AND YATEC ENGINEERING CORPORATION)
10F 146 Sung Chiang Road, Taipei, Taiwan
Phone: 886-2-2563-0010 Fax: 886-2-2567-4677
YASKAWA JASON (HK) COMPANY LIMITED
Rm. 2909-10, Hong Kong Plaza, 186-191 Connaught Road West, Hong Kong
Phone: 852-2803-2385 Fax: 852-2547-5773
BEIJING OFFICE
Room No. 301 Office Building of Beijing International Club,
21 Jianguomanwai Avenue, Beijing 100020, China
Phone: 86-10-6532-1850 Fax: 86-10-6532-1851
SHANGHAI OFFICE
27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China
Phone: 86-21-6553-6600 Fax: 86-21-6531-4242
SHANGHAI YASKAWA-TONJI M & E CO., LTD.
27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China
Phone: 86-21-6533-2828 Fax: 86-21-6553-6677
BEIJING YASKAWA BEIKE AUTOMATION ENGINEERING CO., LTD.
30 Xue Yuan Road, Haidian, Beijing 100083 China
Phone: 86-10-6232-9943 Fax: 86-10-6234-5002
SHOUGANG MOTOMAN ROBOT CO., LTD.
7, Yongchang-North Street, Beijing Economic & Technological Development Area,
Beijing 100076 China
Phone: 86-10-6788-0551 Fax: 86-10-6788-2878
YEA, TAICHUNG OFFICE IN TAIWAIN
B1, 6F, No.51, Section 2, Kung-Yi Road, Taichung City, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Phone: 886-4-2320-2227 Fax:886-4-2320-2239
Document Number: TM4515 (Supercedes: YEA-TOA-S616-10.11 and 10.12) 04/01/2002 Software Version: 01114
Data subject to change without notice.
Models: GPD515C- and CIMR-G5M Document Number: TM 4515
GPD 515/G5 Drive
Technical Manual
CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH SUBJECT PAGE
GPD 515/G5 SIMPLIFIED START-UP PROCEDURE ............. i
QUICK REFERENCE FOR GPD 515 PARAMETERS ............... xiv
CURRENT RATINGS & HORSEPOWER RANGE .................... xvii
WARNING/CAUTION STATEMENTS ..................................... xviii
WARRANTY REGISTRATION .................................................. xxi
INSTALLATION ....................................................................... 1 - 1
Receiving .................................................................................... 1 - 1
Physical Installation .................................................................... 1 - 1
Electrical Installation .................................................................. 1 - 2
Main Circuit Input/Output ..................................................... 1 - 2
Grounding ............................................................................. 1 - 1 1
Auxiliary Input and Output Power Option Devices ............... 1 - 1 1
Conformance to European EMC Directive ............................ 1 - 1 3
Control Circuit ...................................................................... 1 - 1 5
Interconnection - 2-Wire Control (Fig. 1-3) ........................ 1 - 2 0
Interconnection - 3-Wire Control (Fig. 1-4) ........................ 1 - 2 2
Encoder/PG-X2 Connections ................................................ 1 - 2 4
INITIAL START-UP (“LOCAL” CONTROL) ......................... 2 - 1
Pre-power Checks ...................................................................... 2 - 1
Control Method Selection ........................................................... 2 - 2
Power On and Preliminary Checks – Open Loop
Vector Control ............................................................. 2 - 3
Power On and Preliminary Checks – Flux Vector Control ...... 2 - 6
Power On and Preliminary Checks – V/f Control .................. 2 - 1 1
Power On and Preliminary Checks – V/f with PG
Feedback Control ....................................................... 2 - 1 4
Changing the Language on the Digital Operator ...................... 2 - 1 9
Calculating Motor Parameters ................................................... 2 - 2 0
Test Run Using Digital Operator ("Local" Control) ................... 2 - 2 4
Pre-operation Considerations .................................................... 2 - 2 7
Storage Function ...................................................................... 2 - 2 7
OPERATION AT LOAD ........................................................... 3 - 1
DIGITAL OPERATOR ............................................................... 4 - 1
Display and Keypad .................................................................... 4 - 1
Digital Operator Menu Trees ...................................................... 4 - 4
Basic Programming ..................................................................... 4 - 8
Modes of Operation ................................................................... 4 - 9
Release Date 4/01/2002
xi
CONTENTS - Continued
PARAGRAPH SUBJECT PAGE
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES ................................................ 5 - 1
Accel/Decel Time ....................................................................... 5 - 3
Accel/Decel: S-Curve Characteristics ........................................ 5 - 6
Access Level .............................................................................. 5 - 7
Auto-restart ............................................................................... 5 - 7
Automatic Frequency Regulator (AFR) Gain .............................. 5 - 8
Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) ............................................ 5 - 9
Carrier Frequency ...................................................................... 5 - 1 2
Critical Frequency Rejection ..................................................... 5 - 1 3
DC Injection Braking .................................................................. 5 - 1 4
Digital Operator Display Selection ............................................ 5 - 1 7
Display – Monitor (at Power-up) Selection ............................... 5 - 1 9
Encoder (PG) Parameters ......................................................... 5 - 2 1
Energy Saving Operation ........................................................... 5 - 2 6
External Fault Inputs ................................................................. 5 - 2 8
Frequency Reference Command Bias/Gain ............................... 5 - 2 9
Frequency Reference Input Signals (Auto/Manual) .................. 5 - 3 1
Frequency Reference Loss Detection ....................................... 5 - 3 3
Frequency Reference Retention ................................................ 5 - 3 3
Frequency Reference Upper & Lower Limits ............................ 5 - 3 4
Hunting Prevention ................................................................... 5 - 3 5
Jog Reference ........................................................................... 5 - 3 6
Local Remote and Reference Selection .................................... 5 - 3 9
Local Remote Selection ....................................................... 5 - 3 9
Multiple Speed Reference Configuration [Multi-step
Speed Operation] .......................................................... 5 - 4 0
Miscellaneous Parameters ......................................................... 5 - 4 4
Miscellaneous Protective Features ............................................ 5 - 4 6
MODBUS Control ....................................................................... 5 - 4 8
Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru ............................................. 5 - 5 0
Multi-function Analog Inputs (Term. 14 & 16 ) ....................... 5 - 5 3
Multi-function Analog Monitor Output (Term. 21-23) .............. 5 - 5 7
Multi-function Input Terminals (Term. 3-8) .............................. 5 - 5 8
• Local/Remote ................................................................... 5 - 6 2
• External Base Block .......................................................... 5 - 6 3
• Speed Search .................................................................... 5 - 6 4
• Timer Function .................................................................. 5 - 6 6
• Sample/Hold Command .................................................... 5 - 6 6
• Up/Down Frequency Setting ............................................ 5 - 6 7
• Trim Control ...................................................................... 5 - 6 9
xii
CONTENTS - Continued
PARAGRAPH
SUBJECT
PAGE
Multi-function Output Terminals (Term. 9 & 10; 25-27) ......... 5 - 7 0
• Frequency or Speed Detection Output Signals ................ 5 - 7 3
Phase Loss Detection – Input ................................................... 5 - 7 7
Phase Loss Detection – Output ................................................ 5 - 7 7
PID Control ................................................................................ 5 - 7 8
Reset Codes; 2-Wire, 3-Wire Initialization ................................ 5 - 8 3
Slip Compensation .................................................................... 5 - 8 4
Stall Prevention ......................................................................... 5 - 8 6
Stopping Method ....................................................................... 5 - 8 8
Thermal Overload Protection .................................................... 5 - 9 0
Torque Compensation ............................................................... 5 - 9 3
Torque Control (Command) ...................................................... 5 - 9 5
Torque Detection ...................................................................... 5 - 9 8
Torque Limit ............................................................................ 5 - 1 0 1
Two Motor Operation ............................................................... 5 - 1 0 4
User Parameters ...................................................................... 5 - 1 0 6
V/f Pattern - Standard ............................................................ 5 - 1 0 6
V/f Pattern - Custom .............................................................. 5 - 1 0 8
Zero-Servo Control ................................................................... 5 - 1 1 0
Zero Speed Control .................................................................. 5 - 1 1 2
FAULT INDICATION & TROUBLESHOOTING ....................... 6 - 1
Auto-Tuning Faults and Corrective Actions ............................... 6 - 6
Displaying Faults ........................................................................ 6 - 7
Troubleshooting Flowcharts ...................................................... 6 - 1 0
Diode and IGBT (Transistor) Module Resistance Test .............. 6 - 2 7
Checking Encoder Pulses .......................................................... 6 - 2 9
LISTING OF PARAMETERS .................................................... A 1 - 1
SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... A 2 - 1
RELATED PARAMETERS ....................................................... A 3 - 1
G P D 5 1 5 / G 5 S P A R E PARTS ............................................... A 4 - 1
GPD 5 1 5 / G 5 D I M E N S I O N S .................................................. A 5 - 1
DYNAMIC BRAKING CONNECTIONS ................................... A 6 - 1
xiii
QUICK REFERENCE FOR GPD 515/G5 PARAMETERS (FACTORY SET)
PARAMETER FACTORY
NUMBER
(7)
SETTING
USER
SETTING
PARA.
REF.
0 2.3
2 5.4
2 2.2
0000 p. A1-1
thru
(1) (1) (1)
1 5.25 A
1 5.25 A
0 5.40
0 p. A1-2
0 5.50
1 p. A1-2
0 p. A1-2
0 5.26
0.5 5.10
50 5.10
0.00 5.10
0.00 5.10
0 5.10B
0 (6) 5.32 D
100 5.32 D
2.0 5.32 D
0.0 5.32 E
0.0 5.32 E
0 5.36
1.00 5.36
1.0 5.36
100.0 5.36
0.00 5.36
0.00 5.36
0 5.36D
1.0 5.36D
0 5.36D
0 5.36E
0.0 5.14
0.0 5.14
0.0 5.14
0.0 5.14
0.0 5.13
80 5.16A
0.0 5.16A
0 5.16B
5 5.49
10 5.49
10.0 5.2
10.0 5.2
10.0 5.2
10.0 5.2
10.0 5.2
10.0 5.2
PARAMETER FACTORY
NUMBER
(7)
SETTING
USER
SETTING
PARA.
REF.
10.0 5.2
10.0 5.2
10.0 5.2
0.20 5.3
0.20 5.3
0.20 5.3
1.0 (6) 5.38
200 5.38
0 5.38
0 5.38
1.00 5.42
20 (6) 5.42
0.0 5.42
0.0 5.42
10 5.42
20.00 (6) 5.7
20.00 (6) 5.7
0.500 (6) 5.7
0.004 5.7
0.0 5.7
400 p. A1-8
10.0 (5) 5.8
10.0 (5) 5.8
0 (5) 5.8
1 5.23
1.00 5.23
1.00 5.6
50 5.6
2 p. A1-9
0.0 5.25 B
0.0 5.25 B
d1-03 0.0 5.25 B d1-04 0.0 5.25 B d1-05 0.0 5.25 B d1-06 0.0 5.25 B d1-07
0.0 5.25 B
d1-08 0.0 5.25 B d1-09 6.0 5.25 B
0.0 5.9
0 5.43
xiv
PARAMETER FACTORY
NUMBER
(7)
SETTING
USER
SETTING
PARA.
REF.
230V,
460V or 5.48
575V (5)
0 5.41
F 5.47
230.0V,
575.0V (5)
60.0 5.48
3.0 (6) 5.48
0.5 (6) 5.48
(2) (6) 5.48
0.0 5.48
0.0 5.48
(5) 5.41
(5) 2.4
(5) 2.4
4 2.4
(5) 2.4
(5) 2.4
0.50 (5) 2.4
0.75 (5) 2.4
0.0 (5) 2.4
(See Note 3)
p. A1-13
1024 5.15 A
1 5.15 B
1 5.15 C
3 5.15 D
0 5.15 E
1 (8)
0 5.15 F
115 5.15 C
0.0 (6) 5.15 C
10 5.15 D
0.5 5.15 D
0 5.15 G
0 5.15 G
2.0 5.15 B
0 (9)
0 (10)
QUICK REFERENCE FOR GPD 515/G5 PARAMETERS (FACTORY SET)
PARAMETER FACTORY
NUMBER
(7)
SETTING
USER
SETTING
PARA.
REF.
0 5.33
1 5.33
2 5.33
0 5.19
2 5.19
0.0 5.18
0.00 p. A1-19
PARAMETER FACTORY
NUMBER
(7)
SETTING
USER
SETTING
PARA.
REF.
1F 5.28
3 5.28
0 5.28
3 5.28
1 5.28
0 5.29
1 5.39
150 5.39
50 5.39
1 5.39
1 5.39
160 5.39
PARAMETER FACTORY
NUMBER
(7)
SETTING
USER
SETTING
PARA.
REF.
0 5.44
150 5.44
0.1 5.44
200 5.45
200 5.45
200 5.45
200 5.45
0 5.27
1 5.27
1 5.27
0 5.27
6 5.12
1 5.12
0 5.11
0 5.11
1 5.26
1 5.26
(5) p. A3-1
0 5.26
1 5.26
0 5.26
(4)
(4)
(4)
——
——
——
(4)
(4)
(4)
(1) To establish a custom User Access Level, refer to paragraph 5.4.
(2) Initial value is related to V/f curve selected by E1-03 setting.
(3) Settings in parentheses reflect 3-wire control initialization values.
(4) Monitor displays ( UX-XX ) are display or output selections, rather than parameter setup; therefore, user setting is not possible.
(5) Factory setting depends on drive rating. See Table A3-1.
(6) Factory setting depends on Control Method ( A1-02 ).
(7) Not all parameters are accessible in all Access Levels ( A1-01 ) and Control Methods ( A1-02 ); see Section 5.
(8) Only effective with PG-D2 or PG-B2 option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-396.
(9) Only effective with AI-14B or AI-14U option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-296 or -295.
(10) Only effective with DI-08 or DI-16H2 option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-294 or -400.
(11) Only effective with AO-08, AO-12 or AO-12B2 option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-297 or -438.
(12) Only effective with DO-02C option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-402.
(13) Only effective with DO-08 option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-350.
(14) Only effective with PO-36F option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-298.
xv
RATED
INPUT
2
3
0
V
6
0
0
V
4
6
0
V
CURRENT
RATING (AMPS)
160
224
300
27
34
41
52
65
80
96
128
1.8
3.4
4.8
8
11
14
21
165
224
302
340
450
605
32
41
52
62
77
99
130
172
200
3.5
4.1
6.3
9.8
12.5
17
22
27
33
49
64
80
96
130
3.2
6
8
11
17.5
25
NOMINAL HORSEPOWER
(150% OL)
60
75
100
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
0.75
1 & 2
3
5
7.5
10
15
125
150
200 & 250
300
350
400 & 500
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
10
15
20
25
2
3
5
7.5
0.75
1 & 1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25 & 30
30
40 & 50
Current Ratings & Horsepower Range
NEW DRIVE
MODEL NO.
CIMR-G5M
20370F
20550F
20750F
40P41F
40P71F
41P51F
43P71F
44P01F
45P51F
47P51F
40111F
40151F
40181F
40221F
40301F
40371F
40451F
40551F
40750F
41100F
41600F
41850F
42200F
43000F
51P51F
52P21F
53P71F
55P51F
57P51F
50111F
50151F
50181F
50221F
50301F
50371F
50451F
50551F
50751F
50900F
51100F
51600F
20P41F
20P71F
21P51F
22P21F
23P71F
25P51F
27P51F
20111F
20151F
20181F
20221F
20300F
xvii
OLD DRIVE
MODEL NO.
GPD515C-
A160
A224
A300
B027
B034
B041
B052
B065
B080
B096
B128
B001
B003
B004
B008
B011
B014
B021
B165
B224
B302
B340
B450
B605
C032
C041
C052
C062
C077
C099
C130
C172
C200
C003
C004
C006
C010
C012
C017
C022
C027
A003
A006
A008
A011
A017
A025
A033
A049
A064
A080
A096
A130
WARNING
Do not touch circuit components until main input power has been turned off and
“CHARGE” lamp is extinguished. The capacitors are still charged and can be quite dangerous.
Do not connect or disconnect wires and connectors while power is applied to the circuit.
CAUTION
Know your application before using either Initialization function of A1-03 . This parameter must be set to " 0 " for Drive mode operation.
" 1110 " = User Default Parameter Initialization
" 2220 " = Factory 2-Wire Control Initialization (Maintained RUN Contact)
" 3330 " = Factory 3-Wire Control Initialization (Momentary START/STOP
Contact)
Entering any Initialization code resets all parameters, and automatically returns
A1-03 setting to " 0 ". If the GPD 515 is connected for 3-Wire control and this parameter is set to " 2220 " (2-Wire Control Initialization), the motor may run in reverse direction WITHOUT A RUN COMMAND APPLIED. Equipment damage or personal injury may result.
CAUTION
When drive is programmed for auto-restart ( L5-02 = " 1 " thru " 10 "), the motor may restart unexpectedly — personal injury may result.
Data subject to change without notice.
xviii
IMPORTANT
Wiring should be performed only by qualified personnel.
Always ground the drive using ground terminal ( ). See paragraph 1.4.3, "Grounding".
Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power.
Never connect main circuit output terminals T1, T2, and T3 to AC main circuit power supply.
All parameters have been factory set. Do not change their settings unnecessarily.
Do not perform a “HIPOT” or withstand voltage test on any part of the drive. Equipment uses semi-conductors and is vulnerable to high voltage.
The Control PCB employs CMOS ICs which are easily damaged by static electricity. Use proper electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures when handling the Control PCB.
Any modification of the product by the user is not the responsibility of Yaskawa, and will void the warranty.
xix
Technical Training
It is important that users of our products have a totally satisfying ownership experience.
Training is one of the most effective ways to ensure that satisfaction. Because of this conviction,
Yaskawa Electric has operated a full-time professional training department since 1965.
Our trainers are full-time instructors, with a wealth of “real-life” product experience gained through field service at customer facilities. This experience, combined with backgrounds in engineering and education, has earned national recognition for our technical training programs.
Courses are conducted at the headquarters training facility, in selected cities, and at customer sites.
Courses are available to cover all the issues of concern to product users: application, theory of operation, troubleshooting and repair, adjustment and startup, operation, programming, network communication, and optimizing the functions of Yaskawa drives.
We work hard to make all of our products user-friendly, and our owner manuals easy to use.
In spite of that, the simple fact is that you will learn better and faster in a class environment combined with hands-on practice, than by self-teaching when under the stress of a maintenance or operations problem.
On-Site Training and Customized Courses
Training courses are also provided at the user’s site. Course content can be customized to the specific installation and application if requested. For further information about on-site training and courses specific to your installation and application, visit our website at www.drives.com.
Please send training information on:
Name ______________________________________________________________________________________________
Position/Title ________________________________________________________________________________________
Company ___________________________________________________________________________________________
Address ____________________________________________________________________________________________
City _______________________________________________State _______________Zip __________________________
Phone ______________________________________________________________________________________________
Fax ________________________________________________________________________________________________
Representative (if known): ______________________________________________________________________________
FAX this completed form to (847) 887-7185
TM 4515
Section 1. RECEIVING AND INSTALLATION
1 . 1 G E N E R A L
The GPD 515/G5, hereafter referred to as the drive, is a general purpose sine-coded pulse width modulated AC motor drive which generates an adjustable voltage/frequency three phase output for complete speed control of most conventional squirrel cage induction motors. Automatic stall prevention and voltage boost prevents nuisance tripping during load or line side transient conditions. The drive will not induce any voltage line notching distortion back to the utility line and maintains a displacement power factor of not less than 0.98
throughout its speed range.
When properly installed, operated and maintained, the drive will provide a lifetime of service. It is mandatory that the person who operates, inspects, or maintains this equipment thoroughly read and understand this manual before proceeding.
This manual primarily describes the GPD 515/G5, but contains basic information for the operator control station as well. This manual is equally applicable to drives labelled
GPD 515 or G5.
1.2 RECEIVING
The drive is thoroughly tested at the factory. After unpacking, verify the part numbers with the purchase order (invoice). Any damages or shortages evident when the equipment is received must be reported immediately to the commercial carrier who transported the equipment. Assistance, if required, is available from your sales representative.
If the drive will be stored after receiving, keep it in its original packaging and store according to storage temperature specifications in Appendix 2.
1 . 3 P H Y S I C A L INSTALLATION
Location of the drive is important to achieve proper performance and normal operating life.
The unit should be installed in an area where it will be protected from:
• Direct sunlight, rain or moisture.
• Corrosive gases or liquids.
• Vibration, airborne dust or metallic particles.
When preparing to mount the drive, lift it by its base, n e v e r by the front cover. For effective cooling as well as proper maintenance, the drive must be installed on a flat, nonflammable vertical surface (wall or panel) using four mounting screws. There MUST be a
MINIMUM 4.7 in. clearance above and below the drive to allow air flow over the heat sink fins. A minimum 1.2 in. clearance is required on each side on the drive.
A GPD 515/G5 in a free-standing floor-mount cabinet must be positioned with enough clear-ance for opening the door of the cabinet; this will ensure sufficient air space for cooling. Make sure air entering the drive is below 113°F (45°C) (for protected chassis drives), or below 104°F (40°C) (for NEMA 1 drives), by adding a fan or other cooling device, if needed. See environmental specifications in Appendix 2.
1-1
1.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
All basic interconnections (using the Digital Operator) are shown in Figures 1-3 and 1-4.
1 . 4 . 1 M a i n C i r c u i t I n p u t / O u t p u t
Complete wire interconnections according to Table 1-2, Figure 1-3 and Figure 1-4. Be sure to observe the following:
• Use 600V vinyl-sheathed wire or equivalent. Wire size and type should be determined by local electrical codes.
• Avoid routing power wiring near equipment sensitive to electrical noise.
• Avoid running input and output wiring in the same conduit.
• NEVER connect AC main power to output terminals T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W).
• NEVER allow wire leads to contact metal surfaces. Short-circuit may result.
• NEVER connect power factor correction capacitors to the drive output. Consult
Yaskawa when connecting noise filters to the drive output.
• WIRE SIZING MUST BE SUITABLE FOR CLASS I CIRCUITS.
• When connecting motor to drive’s output terminals, include a separate ground wire. Attach ground wire solidly to motor frame and to drive’s ground terminal.
• When using armored or shielded cable for connection between drive and motor, solidly connect armor or shield to motor frame, and to drive’s ground terminal.
• Motor lead length should NOT EXCEED 164 feet (50 meters), and motor wiring should be run in a separate conduit from other power wiring. If lead length must exceed this distance, reduce carrier frequency (see paragraph 5.8) and consult factory for proper installation procedures.
• Use UL listed closed loop connectors or CSA certified ring connectors sized for the selected wire gauge. Install connectors using the correct crimp tool recommended by the connector manufacturer.
WIRE SIZE
AWG mm
2
20
18
16
14
0.5
0.75
1.25
2
12
10
3.5
5.5
8
6
4
2
1/0
3/0
4/0 100
MCM300 150
MCM400 200
MCM650 325
8
14
22
38
60
80
TERMINAL
SCREW
M8
M8
M10
M10
M10
M4
M5
M5
M6
M6
M3.5
M4
M4
M4
M5
M4
M5
M10
M12
M12
M12
M12
M16
CLOSED-LOOP
CONNECTOR
1.25 - 3.5
1.25 - 4
1.25 - 4
2 - 4
2 - 5
3.5 - 4
3.5 - 5
5.5 - 4
5.5 - 5
8 - 5
8 - 6
14 - 6
22 - 8
38 - 8
38 - 10
60 - 10
80 - 10
100 - 10
100 - 12
150 - 12
200 - 12
325 - 12
325 - 16
1-2
CLAMPING TORQUE
100.0
100.0
182.6
182.6
182.6
182.6
313.0
313.0
313.0
313.0
313.0
lb-in
7.8
13.0
STEEL
N-m
0.9
1.5
13.0
13.0
26.1
13.0
26.1
13.0
26.1
26.1
40.9
40.9
1.5
1.5
20.9
1.5
20.9
1.5
20.9
20.9
34.8
34.8
82.6
82.6
156.5
156.5
156.5
156.5
191.3
191.3
191.3
191.3
191.3
11.7
11.7
21.4
21.4
21.4
21.4
36.7
36.7
36.7
36.7
36.7
COPPER lb-in
7.0
10.4
N-m
0.8
1.2
10.4
10.4
3.1
10.4
3.1
10.4
3.1
3.1
4.8
4.8
1.2
2.4
2.4
4.1
4.1
1.2
1.2
2.4
1.2
2.4
10.7
10.7
18.4
18.4
18.4
18.4
23.1
23.1
23.1
23.1
23.1
Table 1-1. Typical Wire Sizing For Main Circuit*
SECTION A. 230V
OLD DRIVE
TERMINAL WIRE SIZE
RATING TERMINAL SYMBOL
TERMINAL SYMBOL
CIMR-G5M GPD515C–
20P41F
20P71F
21P51F
22P21F
23P71F
25P51F
27P51F
20111F
20151F
20181F
20221F
20300F
20370F
20550F
20750F
A003,
A006
A008
A011
A017
A025,
A033
A049
A064
A080,
A096
A130
A160
A224
A300
TERMINAL
SCREW
SCREW
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2,
T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W),
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W)
M4
M4
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W),
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W),
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W)
M4
M4
M4
M5
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, ⊕3, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W)
M5
M6
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, ⊕3, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W)
M6
M8
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, ⊕3, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W)
M6
M8
M8 l1 (r), l2 (s) M4
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M10
,
⊕3, M8 l1 (r), l2 (s) M4
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M10
,
⊕3, M8 l1 (r), l2 (s) M4
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M10
,
⊕3, M8 l1 (r), l2 (s) M4
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M12
,
⊕3, M8 l1 (r), l2 (s) M4
AWG
AWG
WIRE SIZE
MM2 mm2
14 - 10 2 - 5.5
14 - 10
12 - 10
12 - 10
10
8
10 - 8
4
8
3
8
3
6
20 - 10
4/0
4
20 - 10
1/0 x 2P
4
20 - 10
1/0 x 2P
3
20 - 10
4/0 x 2P
1
20 - 10
2 - 5.5
3.5 - 5.5
3.5 - 5.5
5.5
8
5.5 - 8
22
8
30
8
30
14
0.5 - 5.5
100
22
0.5 - 5.5
60 x 2P
22
0.5 - 5.5
60 x 2P
30
0.5 - 5.5
100 x 2P
50
0.5 - 5.5
* Consult local electrical codes for wire sizing requirements.
1-3
Table 1-1. Typical Wire Sizing For Main Circuit - Continued*
CIMR-G5M
40P41F
40P71F
41P51F
43P71F
44P01F
45P51F
47P51F
40111F
40151F
40181F
40221F
40301F
40371F
40451F
40551F
40750F
41100F
41600F
41850F
42200F
43000F
OLD DRIVE
GPD515C–
B001
B003,
B004,
B008
B011,
B014
B021
B027,
B034
B041
B052
B065
B080
B096
B128
B165
B224
B302
B340,
B450,
B605
Section B. 460V
TERMINAL WIRE SIZE
TERMINAL
SCREW AWG
SCREW
AWG
WIRE SIZE mm2 mm2
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W),
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W)
M4
M4
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W),
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W),
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W)
M4
M4
M4
M5
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, ⊕3, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W)
M6
M6 l1 (r), l2 (s )
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, ⊕3, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W)
M8
M4
M6 l1 (r), l2 (s )
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, ⊕3, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W)
M8
M4
M8 l1 (r), l2 (s )
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, ⊕3, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W)
M8
M4
M8 l1 (r), l2 (s )
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, ⊕3, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W)
M8
M4
M8
M8 l1 (r), l2 (s ) M4
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M10
,
⊕3, M8 l1 (r), l2 200 (s 200), l2 400 (s 400) M4
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M10
,
⊕3, M8 l1 (r), l2 200 (s 200), l2 400 (s 400) M4
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M10
,
⊕3, M8 l1 (r), l2 200 (s 200), l2 400 (s 400)
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)
M4
M12
,
⊕3, M8
M4 l1 (r), l2 200 (s 200), l2 400 (s 400)
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕3, T1 (U), T2 (V),
T3 (W)
M16
M8 l1 (r), l2 200 (s 200), l2 400 (s 400) M4
14 - 10
14 - 10
12 - 10
12 - 10
8 - 6
8 - 6
8
6
8
20 - 10
4
8
20 - 10
4
8
20 - 10
3
6
20 - 10
1
6
20 - 10
4/0
4
20 - 10
1/0 x 2P
4
20 - 10
1/0 x 2P
3
20 - 10
4/0 x 2P
1
20 - 10
MCM650 x 2P
1/0
20 - 10
2 - 5.5
2 - 5.5
3.5 - 5.5
3.5 - 5.5
8 - 14
8 - 14
8
14
8
0.5 - 5.5
22
8
0.5 - 5.5
22
8
0.5 - 5.5
30
14
0.5 - 5.5
50
60
0.5 - 5.5
14
0.5 - 5.5
100
22
0.5 - 5.5
60 x 2P
22
0.5 - 5.5
60 x 2P
30
0.5 - 5.5
100 x 2P
50
0.5 - 5.5
325 x 2P
* Consult local electrical codes for wire sizing requirements.
1-4
Table 1-1. Typical Wire Sizing For Main Circuit - Continued*
Section C. 600V
OLD DRIVE
TERMINAL WIRE SIZE
MODEL NO.TERMINAL SYMBOL
TERMINAL SYMBOL
CIMR-G5M GPD515C–
51P51F
52P21F
C003,
C004
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W)
SCREW
M4
AWG
WIRE SIZE mm2
AWG mm2
14-10 2 - 5.5
53P71F
55P51F
57P51F
C006
C010
C012
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W)
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W)
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W)
M4
M4
M4
50111F
50151F
50181F
50221F
50301F
50371F
50451F
50551F
50751F
50900F
51100F
51600F
C017
C022
C027
C032
C041
C052
C062
C077
C099
C130
C172
C200
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W)
M5
M6
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W)
M5
M6
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
,
⊕1, B1, B2, T1 (U),
T2 (V), T3 (W)
M6
◆ l1 (r), l2(s ) M4
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
,
⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)
M8
◆ l1 (r), l2(s ) M4
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)
M8
◆ l1 (r), l2(s ) M4
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
,
⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)
M8
◆ l1 (r), l2(s ) M4
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
,
⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)
M8
◆ l1 (r), l2(s ) M4
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
,
⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)
M8
◆ l1 (r), l2(s ) M4
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), ,
⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)
M10
◆ l1 (r), l2(s ) M4
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
,
⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)
M12
◆ l1 (r), l2(s ) M4
L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),
,
⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W)
M12
◆ l1 (r), l2(s ) M4
* Consult local electrical codes for wire sizing requirements.
◆Indicates terminal uses a pressure lug.
1-5
14-10
12-10
12-10
10
12-10
10-6
8-6
10-6
8-6
2 - 5.5
3.5-5.5
3.5-5.5
5.5
3.5-5.5
5.5-14
8-14
5.5-14
8-14
10-6
14 - 10
6-1/0
8-2
14 - 10
4-1/0
8-2
14 - 10
3-1/0
8-2
14 - 10
2-1/0
6-2
14 - 10
2/0-1/0
4-2
14 - 10
3/0-300
4-2/0
14 - 10
300-400
4-2/0
14 - 10
350-400
3-2/0
14 - 10
2 - 5.5
30-50
22-30
2 - 5.5
50-60
22-30
2 - 5.5
80-150
5.5-14
2 - 5.5
14-50
8-30
2 - 5.5
22-50
8-30
2 - 5.5
30-50
8-30
22-60
2 - 5.5
150-200
22-60
2 - 5.5
180-200
30-60
2 - 5.5
L1 (R)
L2 (S)
L3 (T)
T1 (U)
T2 (V)
T3 (W)
B1
B2
⊕1
⊕2
⊕3 l
1
(r) l
2
(s )
Table 1-2. Terminal Functions and Voltages of Main Circuit
New Model No.
CIMR-G5M
20P41F -
27P51F
A003 - A033
GPD515C-
SECTION A. 230V
FUNCTION
SECTION A. 230V
20111F - 20151F
FUNCTION
3 TO 40 HP
A049 - A064
20181F
20221F
A080, -
A096
20300F - 20750F
A130 - A300
Three phase Main circuit input power supply
200 / 208 / 220V at 50 Hz; 200 / 208 / 220 / 230V at 60 Hz
Three phase AC output to motor
0V to max. input voltage level
DB Resistor terminals (B1 & B2) – – – – – –
L1 (R)
L2 (S)
L3 (T)
T1 (U)
T2 (V)
T3 (W)
B1
B2
⊕1
⊕2
⊕3 l
1
(r) l
2
(s ) l
2
200 (s 200) l
2
400 (s 400)
DC Reactor terminals (
⊕1 & ⊕2)
DC Bus terminals (
⊕1 & )
– – – – – –
– – – – – –
– – – – – –
DB Unit terminals (
⊕3 & )
Power for heat sink fan: l
1 to l
2
: 230 VAC
Ground terminal (100 ohms or less)
SECTION B. 460V
New Model No.
Old Model No.
GPD515C-
40P41F - 40151F
B001 - B034
40181F - 40451F
1 TO 60 HP
B041 - B096
40551F - 43000F
B128 - B605
Three phase Main circuit input power supply
380 / 400 / 415 / 460V at 50/60 Hz
Three phase AC output to motor
0V to max. input voltage level
DB Resistor terminals (B1 & B2) – – – – – –
DC Reactor terminals (
⊕1 & ⊕2)
DC Bus terminals (
⊕1 & )
– – – – – –
– – – – – –
– – – – – –
DB Unit terminals (
⊕3 & )
Power for heat sink fan: l
1 to l
2
: 230 VAC
– – – – – –
Power for heat sink fan: l
1 to l
2
200: 230 Vac l
1 to l
2
400: 460 Vac
Ground terminal
– – – – – indicates that terminals are not present.
1-6
TERMINAL
Table 1-2. Terminal Functions and Voltages of Main Circuit
New Model No.
CIMR-G5M
Old Model No.
GPD515C-
SECTION C. 600V
FUNCTION
51P51F - 50151F 50181F - 50221F
C003 - C022 C027 - C032
50301F - 51600F
C041 - C200
Three phase Main circuit input power supply
500 / 575 / 600V at 50 Hz / 60HZ
L1 (R)
L2 (S)
L3 (T)
T1 (U)
T2 (V)
T3 (W)
B1
B2
Three phase AC output to motor
0V to max. input voltage level
DB Resistor terminals (B1 & B2)
⊕1
⊕2 l
1
(r) l
2
(s )
DC Reactor terminals (
⊕1 & ⊕2)
DC Bus terminals (
⊕1 & )
DB Units terminals (
⊕1 & ) (C041 to C200 only)
DC Bus terminals (
⊕1 & )
Power for heat sink fan: l
1 to l
2
: 600 VAC
Ground terminal (100 ohms or less)
1-7
(DCL
Option)
+
1
+
2
L1 (R)
L2 (S)
L3 (T)
_
M a i n C i r c u i t C o n f i g u r a t i o n B l o c k D i a g r a m s 2 3 0 V
B1 B2
CIMR-G5M20P41F to 27P51F
GPD515C-A003 to -A033
(DCL
Option)
+
1
+
2
L1 (R)
L2 (S)
L3 (T)
_
+
Power
Supply
(RCC)
Cooling Fan
(A011 to A033 only)
Control
Circuit
+
3
+
U (T1)
V (T2)
W (T3)
CIMR-G5M20111F to 20151F
GPD515C-A049 to -A064
Power
Supply
(RCC)
Cooling Fan
Control
Circuit
+ 1
+
2
L1 (R)
L2 (S)
L3 (T)
_
CIMR-G5M20181F, 20221F
GPD515C-A080, -A096
When using DC input as main circuit power, connect 230Vac to control power
transformer terminals l (r) and l (s).
+ 3
+
U (T1)
V (T2)
W (T3)
Cooling Fan
Power
Supply
(RCC)
Internal
Cooling Fan
Control
Circuit
U (T1)
V (T2)
W (T3)
L1 (R)
L2 (S)
L3 (T)
_
+
3
+
Cooling Fan
Power
Supply
(RCC)
Internal
Cooling Fan
Control
Circuit
U (T1)
V (T2)
W (T3)
CIMR-G5M20300F to 20750F
GPD515C-A130 to -A300
When using DC input as main circuit power, connect 230Vac to control power
transformer terminals l (r) and l (s).
1-8
+ 1
+
2
L1 (R)
L2 (S)
L3 (T)
_
M a i n C i r c u i t C o n f i g u r a t i o n B l o c k D i a g r a m s 4 6 0 V
B1 B2
CIMR-G5M40P41F to 40151F
GPD515C- B001 to - B034
(DCL
Option)
+
1
+ 2
L1 (R)
L2 (S)
L3 (T)
_
+
Power
Supply
(RCC)
Cooling Fan
(B008 to B034 only)
Control
Circuit
+ 3
+
U (T1)
V (T2)
W (T3)
CIMR-G5M40181F to 40451F
GPD515C- B041 to - B096
When using DC input as main circuit power, connect 460Vac to control power
transformer terminals l
1
(r) and l
2
(s).
Cooling Fan
Power
Supply
(RCC)
Internal
Cooling Fan
Control
Circuit
+ 3
U (T1)
V (T2)
W (T3)
+
1
L1 (R)
L2 (S)
L3 (T)
_
CIMR-G5M40551F to 41600F
GPD515C- B128 to - B302
When using DC input as main circuit
l
power, connect 460Vac to control
power transformer terminals l
2
400 (s400).
1
(r) and
L1 (R)
L2 (S)
L3 (T)
_
+
Cooling Fan
Power
Supply
(RCC)
Internal
Cooling Fan
Control
Circuit
+
3
Power
Supply
(RCC)
+
Control
Circuit
U (T1)
V (T2)
W (T3)
CIMR-G5M41850F to 43000F
GPD515C- B340 to - B605
When using DC input as main circuit power, connect 460Vac to control power transformer
terminals l
1
(r) and l
2
400 (s400).
U (T1)
V (T2)
W (T3)
Cooling Fan
1-9
M a i n C i r c u i t C o n f i g u r a t i o n B l o c k D i a g r a m s 6 0 0 V
B1 B2
(DCL
Option)
+
1
+
2
L1 (R)
L2 (S)
L3 (T)
_
+
CIMR-G5M51P51F to 50151F
GPD515C- C003 to - C022
When using DC input as main circuit power, connect 600Vac to control power transformer terminals r and s.
Power
Supply
(RCC)
Cooling Fan
Control
Circuit
U (T1)
V (T2)
W (T3)
+
1
L1 (R)
L2 (S)
L3 (T)
_
B1 B2
+
Cooling Fan
Power
Supply
(RCC)
Control
Circuit
U (T1)
V (T2)
W (T3)
CIMR-G5M50181F to 50221F
GPD515C-C027 to -C032
When using DC input as main circuit power, connect 600Vac to control power transformer terminals r and s.
CIMR-G5M50301F to 51600F
GPD515C-C041 to -C200
When using DC input as main circuit power, connect 600Vac to control power transformer terminals r and s.
+
1
L1 (R)
L2 (S)
L3 (T)
_
+
U (T1)
V (T2)
W (T3)
Cooling Fan
Power
Supply
(RCC)
Control
Circuit
1-10
1 . 4 . 2 G r o u n d i n g
• The drive must be solidly grounded using the main circuit ground terminal.
• If Drive is installed in a cabinet with other equipment, ground leads for all equipment should be connected to a common low-impedance ground point within the cabinet.
• The supply neutral should be connected to the ground point within the cabinet.
• Select appropriate ground wire size from Table 1-1.
• Make all ground wires as short as practical.
• NEVER ground the drive in common with welding machines or other high power electrical equipment.
• Where several drives are used, ground each directly to the ground point (see Figure 1-1). DO
NOT FORM A LOOP WITH THE GROUND LEADS.
• When connecting a motor to the drive’s output terminals, include a separate ground wire. Attach ground wire solidly to motor frame and to drive’s ground terminal.
• When using armored or shielded cable for connection between drive and motor, solidly connect armor or shield to motor frame, and to the drive’s ground terminal.
PREFERRED NOT RECOMMENDED
A. Grounding of Three Drives
NOT
ACCEPTABLE
CORRECT NOT RECOMMENDED
B. Grounding of Drive & Vector Control Motor (VCM)
Figure 1-1. Grounding
1 . 4 . 3 A u x i l i a r y I n p u t a n d O u t p u t P o w e r O p t i o n D e v i c e s
A disconnect device (circuit breaker, contactor, disconnect switch, etc.) should NOT be used as a means of starting and stopping the drive or motor.
A disconnect device can be installed for emergency stop purposes, but when that disconnect device is opened, there may be loss of electrical braking.
1-11
Figure 1-2 is a factory guideline for proper wiring practices and relative locations within the electrical path from the line to the load. It does not imply what devices are needed for a particular application, nor does it show what devices were shipped with a particular order. Therefore, disregard those items in the diagram which are not being used in your installation. However, it is recommended that an input or DC reactor be used with models GPD515C-A003 thru -A064
(CIMR-G5M20P41F thru 20151F), -B001 thru -B034 (40P41F thru 40151F) , and -C003 thru -C062
(51P51F thru 51451F) when wired to a source of 600 kVA or greater. Mount all optional power devices close to the drive, and keep electrical connections as short as possible.
CUSTOMER'S
3Ø A.C. LINE
POWER
SUPPLY
L3
L2
L1
ISOLATION
TRANSFORMER
H3 X3
H2 X2
H1 X1
INPUT
RFI FILTER
C1(L3)
L
B1(L2)
I
N
A1(L1)
E
L
(L3)C2
O
(L2)B2
A
D
(L1)A2
(G)
PANEL GROUND
SEE NOTE 2
INPUT
REACTOR
C1
C2
B1
B2
A1
A2
RF NOISE
FILTER
SEE NOTE 5
NOTES
1.
Connect drive ground terminal or panel to earth ground. Always use low impedance paths and connections.
2.
Mount input and output RFI filters physically as close to the drive as possible (on the same panel, if possible). Filters should have a solid connection from filter ground terminal to the cabinet ground point. If multiple input or output RFI filters are used, they must be wired in parallel.
3.
Shield individual conductors with metallic conduit, or use armored or shielded cable.
4.
Connect output conduit armored cable or shielded cable in a manner that allows it to act as an unbroken shield from the drive panel to the motor casing.
5.
RF noise filter (different from RFI filter) part no. 05P00325-0023 is a delta wye capacitor network which is wired in parallel with the drive input terminals. On the smaller drives with die cast chassis, it must be mounted externally. On the larger drives with sheet metal chassis, it may be mounted inside the area where the input power wiring enters the drive. On units equipped with bypass, it may be wired to the primary side of the circuit breaker and mounted to the bypass panel or sidewall.
6.
Connection points:
Drive Terminals
Input Power L1, L2, L3
Output Power T1, T2, T3
PANEL GROUND
SEE NOTE 2
PANEL GROUND
SEE NOTE 1
OUTPUT
RFI FILTER
OUTPUT
REACTOR
A.C. MOTOR
SEE NOTE 3
L1 L2 L3
INPUT
DC
REACTOR
Drive
SEE NOTE 6
+ 1
+ 2
OUTPUT
T1 T2
1
IN
2
4
OUT
5
3
6
SEE NOTES 3, 4
PANEL
GROUND
SEE NOTE 2
A1 B1 C1
SEE NOTES 3, 4
A2 B2 C2
T1 T2 T3
Figure 1-2. Customer Connection Diagram For Isolation Transformers, Input
Reactors, Input RFI Filters, DC Reactors, Output Reactors and Output RFI FIlters
1-12
1 . 4 . 3 a C o n f o r m a n c e t o E u r o p e a n E M C D i r e c t i v e
In order to conform to EMC standards, the following methods are required for line filter application, cable shielding and drive installation. The following explains the outline of the methods.
The line filter and the drive must be mounted on the same metal plate. The filter should be mounted as close to the drive as practical. The cable must be kept as short as possible and the metal plate should be securely grounded. The ground of the line filter and the drive must be bonded to the metal plate with as much bare-metal contact as possible.
For main circuit input cables, a screened cable is recommended within the panel, and is also suggested for external connections. The screen of the cable should be connected to a solid ground. For the motor cables, a screened cable (max. 20 m) must be used and the screen of the motor cable should be connected to ground at both ends by a short connection, again using as much bare-metal contact as possible.
For more detailed explanation, refer to document
EZZ006543, “Installation Guidelines For EMC
Directive using Yaskawa AC Drive Products.”
Table 1-2.1 and Figure 1-2A show the line filter list for EMC standards and the installation/wiring of the drive and line filter.
T a b l e 1 - 2 . 1 . L i n e F i l t e r s f o r D r i v e
New Drive Model Old Drive Model
Number Number
CIMR-G5M GPD 515C-
40P41F,
40P71F
41P51F,
43P71F,
44P01F
45P51F,
47P51F
40111F,
40151F
40181F,
40221F
40301F
40371F
40451F
40551F
40750F,
41100F
41600F
41850F
42200F
43000F
B001,
B003
B004,
B008,
B011
B014,
B021
B027,
B034
B041,
B052
B065
B080
B096
B128
B165,
B224
B302
B340
B450
B605
Part Number
05P00325-
0106
0103
0104
0105
0107
0108
0109
0110
0111
0112
0113
0119
0120
0121
Rated
Current (A)
8
20
30
60
80
100
150
160
180
300
400
500
600
900
Line Filter
Mass
(kg)
1.8
1.8
3.0
5.3
7.5
13.8
13.8
25
25
(1)
(2)
1mm = 0.0394 inches
D is the distance the filter will extend outward from the surface of the metal plate.
25
45
Dimensions in mm
L x W x D
320 x 143 x 46
320 x 143 x 46
350 x 213 x 51
435 x 268 x 56
350 x 180 x 90
420 x 200 x 130
480 x 200 x 160
480 x 200 x 160
480 x 200 x 160
480 x 200 x 160
588 x 250 x 200
Consult Factory
(1)
(2)
1-13
L1 L2 L3 PE
Ground Bonds (remove any paint)
GPD
515/G5
LINE
FILTER
LOAD
PE L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3 PE
Cable Length max. 40cm
Metal Plate
Ground Bonds (remove any paint)
IM
3~
Figure 1-2A. Installation of Line Filter and GPD 515/G5
1-14
Motor Cable max. 20m
1 . 4 . 4 C o n t r o l C i r c u i t
All basic control circuit (signal) interconnections are shown in the appropriate diagram:
• Interconnections for external two-wire control in combination with the Digital Operator are shown in Figure 1-3.
• Interconnections for external three-wire control in combination with the Digital Operator are shown in Figure 1-4.
Make wire connections according to Figures 1-3, 1-4 and Table 1-3; observe the following:
• Signal Leads: Terminals 1-8 & 11; 12-17 & 33; and 21-27.
• Control Leads: Terminals 9 & 10 and 18-20.
• Use twisted shielded or twisted-pair shielded wire (20-16 AWG [0.5 – 1.25mm2]) for control and signal circuit leads. The shield sheath MUST be connected at the drive end
ONLY (terminal 12). The other end should be dressed neatly and left unconnected
(floating). See Figure 1-2B.
• Signal leads and feedback leads (PG) must be separated from control leads main circuit leads and any other power cables to prevent erroneous operation caused
• Lead length should NOT EXCEED 164 feet (50 meters). Wire sizes should be determined considering the voltage drop.
• All AC relays, contactors and solenoids should have RC surge supressors installed across their coils.
• All DC relays, contactors and solenoids should have diodes installed across their coils.
TO GPD 515
SIGNAL
TERMINALS
TO SHIELD
SHEATH
TERMINAL
(TERM. 12)
SHIELD SHEATH
OUTER JACKET
WRAP BOTH ENDS
OF SHEATH WITH
INSULATING TAPE
CRIMP
CONNECTION
Figure 1-2B. Shielded Sheath Termination
DO NOT
CONNECT
TO
EXTERNAL
CIRCUIT
1-15
1-16
Table 1-3. Terminal Functions and Signals of Control Circuit
TERMINAL FUNCTIONS
1
2
3
2-WIRE CONTROL: Forward Run / Stop signal
(See NOTE 1)
3-WIRE CONTROL: Run signal
2-WIRE CONTROL: Reverse Run / Stop signal
(See NOTE 1)
3-WIRE CONTROL: Stop signal
External fault input
4
5
6
7
8
9, 10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
Run at closed, stop at open (See NOTE 2)
Run at closed (See NOTE 2)
Run at closed, stop at open (See NOTE 2)
Fault Reset input (external)
Multi-step Speed Reference 1
Multi-step Speed Reference 2
Jog Reference
External baseblock
Multi-function contact output (N.O.).
One of 18 functions are available, by setting of parameter H2-01 .
Sequence control input common for terminals 1-8.
Connection for shield sheath of signal leads
Frequency reference analog input (voltage); auto input – can be changed to manual by setting of parameter H3-01 .
Frequency reference analog input (current); can be changed to voltage input by setting of parameter H3-08 and cutting jumper J1.
Frequency reference power supply
Stop at open (See NOTE 2)
Fault at closed (see NOTES 2 & 3). When the
External Fault input is applied, the drive’s Fault relay trips (shutdown) and the motor coasts to a stop. The Digital Operator displays “ EF3 ” failure.
Fault Reset at closed (see NOTES 2 & 3). The
Fault Reset input will reset the Fault relay, if the drive is in “stopped” condition. Both Forward
Run/Stop signal and Reverse Run/Stop signal must be OPEN.
Effective when closed (See NOTES 2 & 3)
Effective when closed (See NOTES 2 & 3)
Run at preset jog frequency when closed
Drive output stops when closed
Contact capacity:
250 Vac at 1A or less
30 Vdc at 1A or less
Sequence control input 0 V
– – – –
0 to +10V (20K ohms)
–10 to +10V (20K ohms)
4-20mA (250 ohms)
+15V (Control power supply for frequency setting: max 20 mA)
0 V Frequency reference analog input common
Multi-function contact output
(N.O./N.C.).
Closed at fault
Open at fault
Common
Contact capacity:
250 Vac at 1A or less
30 Vdc at 1A or less
1-17
Table 1-3. Terminal Functions and Signals of Control Circuit - Continued
TERMINAL FUNCTIONS
21
22
23
25
26
27
33
Multi-function analog monitor 1 (+) Output current Type of analog signal (operation parameter) to be or output
Multi-function analog monitor (–) output is selected by setting of parameters H4-01 frequency is and H4-04 .
Multi-function analog monitor 2 (+) selectable
Multi-function open collector output 1
Multi-function open collector output 2
Monitor output: 0 to +11V; 2 mA maximum
One of 18 functions Photocoupler insulation output: +48V, 50 mA available, by setting maximum of parameters H2-02 and H2-03 .
Multi-function open collector output common
Frequency reference power supply
0V
–15V Control power supply for frequency setting: max 20 mA
NOTES:
1 .
When Forward Run and Reverse Run inputs are both closed for more than 500 ms, the Digital
Operator displays a blinking “ EF ” alarm code and the motor (if rotating) is decelerated by the drive to a stop. This stop condition is not stored by the drive (on Digital Operator, red LED at
S T O P key does not light); I F O N E O F T H E I N P U T S I S O P E N E D , T H E M O T O R W I L L
I M M E D I A T E L Y S T A R T U P A G A I N .
2 .
Terminals 1-8 source +24 Vdc (8mA max.) and operate in a Low = True (ON) configuration when connected to terminal 11.
When using relays for input to terminals 1-8, use relays with highly reliable contacts (for very small current) with a capacity of 30 Vdc or more and rated current of 100mA or higher. When using transistor (open collector) input, use transistors with rated voltage of 35 Vdc or more and rated current of 100mA or more.
3 .
These terminals are multi-function inputs. The indicated functions are their settings, based on a
2-Wire reset. For 3-Wire reset definitions, and other settings, see descriptions for “Multi-
Function Input Terminals”, parameters H 1 - 0 1 t h r u H 1 - 0 6 , in paragraph 5.32.
1-18
1-19
1 . 4 . 5 I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n – 2 - W i r e C o n t r o l O p e r a t i o n - F i g u r e 1 - 3 .
Notes referred to in figure 1-3.
✱
– Indicates components not supplied.
✱✱
– Branch circuit protection (circuit breaker or input fuses) must be supplied by customer.
■
– Indicates customer connection terminal. Wire only to terminals shown. Note that not all terminals shown are available in all ratings – see Tables 1-1 and 1-2.
( ) – Indicates alternate terminal marking, i.e., (R) and L1.
▲
– Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters
H 1 - 0 1 through H 1 - 0 6 . See paragraph 5.32.
●
– Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters
H 2 - 0 1 through H 2 - 0 3 . See paragraph 5.33.
♦
– Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters
H 3 - 0 1, - 0 4, - 0 5, - 0 8, & - 0 9 . See paragraphs 5.19 & 5.30.
■
– Function labels and signal levels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters H 4 - 0 1 & H 4 - 0 4 . See paragraph 5.31.
1 .
If only a remote Manual Speed pot (1RH) is used, 3SS is not needed; in that case, a jumper must be added between terminals 5 and 11. This jumper will override both the Auto and Digital Operator frequency references, regardless of the programming of parameter b 1 - 0 1 . If you are using a remote speed command or the Digital Operator, DO NOT install this jumper. See paragraph 5.19.
2 .
The Drive Electronic Thermal Overload function (parameters L 1 - 0 1 , L 1 - 0 2 ) meets standards set by
UL and cUL for motor thermal overload protection. If local code requires separate mechanical overload protection, an overload relay should be installed, interlocked with the drive as shown. It should be the manual reset type to prevent automatic restart following a motor fault and subsequent contact reclosure after cool down.
3 .
Insulated twisted shielded wire is required.
2-conductor #18 GA. (Belden #8760 or equivalent). 3-conductor #18 GA. (Belden #8770 of equivalent).
Connect shield ONLY AT DRIVE END. Stub and isolate other end.
4 .
Digital Operator is standard on every drive. Remote operators, as shown, may not be required.
5 .
Customer to connect terminal to earth ground (100
Ω or less, 230V; 10 Ω or less, 460V and 600V).
6 .
Wire only one of the inputs as an Auto Reference. If H 3 - 0 9 is set to “ 1F “, terminals 13 and 14 are added for the internal frequency reference.
7 .
If the Dynamic Braking (DB) option is used, wire per Appendix 6 instructions.
8 .
An optional DC reactor may be added for harmonic attenuation, if needed; see separate instruction sheet f o r w i r i n g .
9 .
If application does not allow reverse operation, b 1 - 0 4 , Reverse Run Prohibit, should be set to “ 1 ”
(Reverse Run Disabled), and the Reverse Run/Stop input can be eliminated.
1 0 . If supplying the drive with DC voltage instead of 3ø AC, remove jumpers from terminals l
1 and l
2 and connect a separate 1ø AC supply to l
1 and l
2 instead.
1 1 . Use l
1 (R) and l
2 (S) for single-phase input. Note that for drives up through GPD515C-A064, -B034, and
-C032 (CIMR-G5M20151F, 40151F, and 50221F) must be derated by 50%. Consult factory for derating of larger drives.
1-20
MAN SPEED
1RH
✱
SEE NOTE 1
ISOLATED
AUTO
REFERENCE
✱
SEE NOTE 6
4-20mA
0-10V
1R
✱
FOR OPTIONAL
DC REACTOR
SEE NOTE 8
FOR WIRING
DYNAMIC
BRAKING
OPTION
SEE NOTE 7
1ø POWER SUPPLY (SEE NOTE 11)
3ø POWER SUPPLY (SEE NAMEPLATE DATA)
L1 L2 L3
1CB
✱✱
(GPD515C-A080 [CIMR-G5M20151F] AND ABOVE;
GPD515C-B041 [CIMR-G5M40151F] AND ABOVE;
GPD515C-C027 [CIMR-G5M50221F] AND ABOVE)
SEE NOTE 10
FWD
RUN/STOP
15
+15Vdc
(20mA MAX)
♦
16
17
COM
12
SHIELD
♦
14
♦
13
MAN REF. IN
(0 TO
±10Vdc)
4-20mA
(250
SEE
NOTE 4
0 TO
±10Vdc
(20K
L1 L2 L3
(R) (S) (T)
1
(r)
2
FWD 1
GPD 515/G5
COOLING
FAN
POWER
REV
EXT. FAULT
▲
2
3
▲
FAULT RESET
4
DRIVE FWD REV REMOTE
SEQ REF
DIGITAL OPERATOR
JVOP-130
AUTO/MAN
▲
5
▲
MULTI-STEP
FREQ SELECT
JOG
SPEED
6
▲
7
COAST STOP
(BASE BLOCK)
▲
8
0 VOLTS
11
LOCAL
REMOTE
MENU ESC
RUN CONTACT
RY1
●
9
+ 1
JOG
DATA
ENTER
10
+ 2
B2
FWD
REV
RUN
RESET
STOP
FAULT CONTACTS
RY2
18
RY2
19
B1
OR
+ 3
–
(GPD515C-B041 thru -B096)
FACTORY SET FOR 460V
ANALOG
OUTPUT
ANALOG
OUTPUT
20
■
■
21
■
22
23
380V
400/
415V 440V 460V
Voltage Selector
OPEN
COLLECTOR
CIRCUIT
●
25
33
–15Vdc
(20mA MAX)
OPEN
COLLECTOR
CIRCUIT
●
26
27
(E)
G
(U) (V) (W)
T1 T2 T3
TO
TERM. 12
SEE
NOTE 1
REV
1SS
RUN/STOP
✱
SEE
NOTE 9
2SS
✱
EXT. FAULT
✱
EXT. FAULT RESET
+
–
MULTI-FUNCTION
MONITOR OUTPUT
0 to +10V or
–10 to +10V,
2mA MAX.
+
MULTI-
FUNCTION
OPEN
COLLECTOR
OUTPUTS
CAPACITY:
50mA AT 48Vdc MAX.
(U) (V) (W)
T1 T2 T3
1OL
✱
SEE
NOTE
2
TERMINALS 1-8:
IF INPUT FROM RELAY CONTACTS:
RATED 30Vdc OR MORE,
100mA OR MORE
IF OPEN COLLECTOR INPUT:
RATED 35Vdc OR MORE,
100mA OR MORE
RY CONTACTS
CAPACITY:
1A AT 250Vac
1A AT 30Vdc
SEE
NOTE 3
1PB
✱
AUTO
3SS
✱
MAN
EARTH
GROUND
SEE NOTE 5
ALTERNATE
MOTOR CONNECTION
(T2)
(T1) (T3)
AC MOTOR
✱
1OL
✱
SEE NOTE 2
(T2)
(T1) (T3)
AC MOTOR
✱
BASIC INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM FOR 2-WIRE CONTROL
Figure 1-3. 230, 460 or 600V Interconnections - 2-Wire Control
(with parameters b1-01 = 1, b1-02 = 1, H1-01 = 24, H1-02 = 14, H1-03 = 3,
H1-04 = 4, H1-05 = 6, and H1-06 = 8 )
See Figure 1-5 for Closed-loop PG connections
1-21
1 . 4 . 6 I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n – 3 - W i r e C o n t r o l O p e r a t i o n F i g u r e 1 - 4 .
Notes referred to in figure 1-4.
✱
– Indicates components not supplied.
✱✱
– Branch circuit protection (circuit breaker or input fuses) mu st be supplied by customer.
■
– Indicates customer connection terminal. Wire only to terminals shown. Note that not all terminals shown are available in all ratings – see Tables 1-1 and 1-2.
( ) – Indicates alternate terminal marking, i.e., (R) and L1.
▲
– Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters H 1 - 0 1 through H 1 - 0 6 : H 1 - 0 1 = 2 4 , H 1 - 0 2 = 1 4 , H 1 - 0 3 = 0 , H 1 - 0 4 = 3 , H 1 - 0 5 = 4 , H 1 - 0 6 = 6 .
See paragraph 5.32.
●
– Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters
H 2 - 0 1 through H 2 - 0 3 . See paragraph 5.33.
♦
– Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters
H 3 - 0 1, - 0 4, - 0 5, - 0 8, & - 0 9 . See paragraphs 5.19 & 5.30.
■
– Function labels and signal levels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters H 4 - 0 1 & H 4 - 0 4 . See paragraph 5.31.
1 .
If only a remote Manual Speed pot (1RH) is used, 2SS is not needed; in that case, a jumper must be added between terminals 6 and 11. This jumper will override both the Auto and Digital Operator frequency references, regardless of the programming of parameter b 1 - 0 1 . If you are using a remote speed command or the Digital Operator, DO NOT install this jumper. See paragraph 5.19.
2 .
The Drive Electronic Thermal Overload function (parameters L 1 - 0 1 , L 1 - 0 2 ) meets standards set by UL and cUL for motor thermal overload protection. If local code requires separate mechanical overload protection, an overload relay should be installed, interlocked with the drive as shown. It should be the manual reset type to prevent automatic restart following a motor fault and subsequent contact reclosure after cool down.
3 .
Insulated twisted shielded wire is required.
2-conductor #18 GA. (Belden #8760 or equivalent). 3-conductor #18 GA. (Belden #8770 of equivalent).
Connect shield ONLY AT DRIVE END. Stub and isolate other end.
4 .
Digital Operator is standard on every drive. Remote operators, as shown, may not be required.
5 .
Customer to connect terminal to earth ground (100
Ω or less, 230V; 10 Ω or less, 460V and 600V).
6 .
Wire only one of the inputs as an Auto Reference. If H 3 - 0 9 is set to “ 1F “, terminals 13 and 14 are added for the internal frequency reference.
7 .
If the Dynamic Braking (DB) option is used, wire per Appendix 6 instructions.
8 .
An optional DC reactor may be added for harmonic attenuation, if needed; see separate instruction sheet f o r w i r i n g .
9 .
If application does not allow reverse operation, b 1 - 0 4 , Reverse Run Prohibit, should be set to “ 1 ”
(Reverse Run Disabled), and the Forward/Reverse input can be eliminated.
1 0 . If supplying the drive with DC voltage instead of 3ø AC, remove jumpers from terminals l
1 and l
2 and connect a separate 1ø AC supply to l
1 and l
2 instead.
1 1 . Use l
1 (R) and l
2 (S) for single-phase input. Note that for drives up through GPD515C-A064, -B034, and
-C032 (CIMR-G5M20151F, 40151F, and 50221F) must be derated by 50%. Consult factory for derating of larger drives.
CAUTION
Before running, parameter A1-03 must be set to " 0 ". Resetting drive constant A1-03 to " 2220 " may cause the motor to run in the reverse direction WITHOUT A RUN
COMMAND, and possibly result in damage to the equipment or personal injury.
1-22
MAN SPEED
1RH
✱
2K / 2
.
5K
SEE NOTE 1
ISOLATED
AUTO
REFERENCE
✱
SEE NOTE 6
4-20mA
0-10V
1R
✱
2K
FOR OPTIONAL
DC REACTOR
SEE NOTE 8
FOR WIRING
DYNAMIC
BRAKING
OPTION
SEE NOTE 7
3ø POWER SUPPLY (SEE NAMEPLATE DATA)
L1 L2 L3
1CB
✱✱
(GPD515C-A080 [CIMR-G5M20151F] AND ABOVE;
GPD515C-B041 [CIMR-G5M40151F] AND ABOVE;
GPD515C-C027 [CIMR-G5M50221F] AND ABOVE)
SEE NOTE 10
RUN
15
+15Vdc
(20mA MAX)
♦
16
17
COM
12 SHIELD
♦
14
♦
13
MAN REF. IN
(0 TO
±10Vdc)
4-20mA
(250
SEE
NOTE 4
0 TO
±10Vdc
(20K
L1 L2 L3
(R) (S) (T)
GPD 515/G5
DIGITAL OPERATOR
JVOP-130
1 2
RUN 1
COOLING
FAN
POWER
STOP
EXT. FAULT
2
▲
3
DRIVE FWD REV REMOTE
SEQ REF
FAULT RESET
▲
4
▲
FWD/REV
AUTO/MAN
▲
5
6
▲
MULTI-STEP
FREQ SELECT
7
JOG
SPEED
▲
8
0 VOLTS
11
LOCAL
REMOTE
MENU ESC
RUN CONTACT
RY1
●
9
+ 1
JOG
DATA
ENTER
+ 2
B2
FWD
REV
RUN
RESET
STOP
10
FAULT CONTACTS
RY2
18
RY2
19
B1
OR
+ 3
–
(GPD515C-B041 thru -B096)
FACTORY SET FOR 460V
380V
400/
415V 440V 460V
Voltage Selector
ANALOG
OUTPUT
ANALOG
OUTPUT
OPEN
COLLECTOR
CIRCUIT
20
■
■
■
21
22
23
●
25
33
–15Vdc
(20mA MAX)
●
26
(E)
G
(U) (V) (W)
T1 T2 T3
OPEN
COLLECTOR
CIRCUIT
27
TO
TERM. 12
SEE
NOTE 1
+
–
+
STOP
1PB
✱
1OL
✱
2PB
✱
EXT. FAULT
✱
EXT. FAULT RESET
SEE
NOTE 3
3PB
✱
FWD
1SS
✱
REV
SEE NOTE 9
TERMINALS 1-8:
IF INPUT FROM RELAY CONTACTS:
RATED 30Vdc OR MORE,
100mA OR MORE
IF OPEN COLLECTOR INPUT:
RATED 35Vdc OR MORE,
100mA OR MORE
RY CONTACTS
CAPACITY:
1A AT 250Vac
1A AT 30Vdc
MULTI-
FUNCTION
OPEN
COLLECTOR
OUTPUTS
CAPACITY:
50mA AT 48Vdc MAX.
(U) (V) (W)
T1 T2 T3
AUTO
2SS
✱
MAN
SEE
NOTE
2
MULTI-FUNCTION
MONITOR OUTPUT
0 to +10V or
–10 to +10V,
2mA MAX.
EARTH
GROUND
SEE NOTE 5
ALTERNATE
MOTOR CONNECTION
(T2)
(T1) (T3)
AC MOTOR
✱
1OL
✱
SEE NOTE 2
(T2)
(T1) (T3)
AC MOTOR
✱
BASIC INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM FOR 3-WIRE CONTROL
Figure 1-4. 230, 460 or 600V Interconnections - 3-Wire Control
(with parameters b1-01 = 1, b1-02 = 1, H1-01 = 24, H1-02 = 14, H1-03 = 0,
H1-04 = 3, H1-05 = 4, and H1-06 = 6 )
See Figure 1-5 for Closed-loop PG connections
1-23
1 . 4 . 7 E n c o d e r F e e d b a c k
If either the Flux Vector (A1-02 = 3) or Volts Per Hertz with Encoder (A1-02 = 1) control method is desired, an encoder feedback board for the drive is required.
The drive can accept many types of encoder feedback. Table 1-4 shows which option board is needed for each type of encoder.
T a b l e 1 - 4 . E n c o d e r f e e d b a c k o p t i o n b o a r d t y p e s .
O p t i o n
Board
C o n t r o l
M e t h o d ( s )
E l e c t r i c a l I n p u t
S c h e m e
Required Signals From Encoder
PG-X2
A L L
Q u a d r a t u r e ,
L i n e D r i v e r
A + , A - , B + , & B - ( Z + , Z - o p t i o n a l )
PG-W2*
ALL
Dual Input,
Quadrature, Line
Driver
A+, A-, B+, B-, (Z+, Z- optional)
PG-B2
ALL
Quadrature,
Single Ended
A, B, & Common
PG-D2
PG-A2
All, Except
Flux Vector
All, Except
Flux Vector
Line Driver
Single Ended
A+ & A-
A & Common
*Accepts inputs from two encoders. Primarily used with custom software.
The most common encoder used with the drive is the Quadrature, Line Driver style encoder. When an encoder of this type is used, a PG-X2 option board must be mounted onto the drive. The encoder then wires to the PG-X2 option board.
Table 1-5 and Figure 1-5 show connections for the PG-X2 and some typical encoders.
Table 1-5. Encoder (PG) Connection
PG-X2 EPC
(1)
FUNCTION TERMINAL MODEL
TA1 755A
+12V (200mA) 1 White
0V 2 Black
+5V
A+
A–
B+
B–
5
6
7
3
4
DYNAPAR
H-20
(2)
(Pin #)
D
F
DYNAPAR LAKESHORE/
HS-35 NORTHSTAR
SL-56
D
F
6
1
No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection
Red A A 3
Green
Brown
Yellow
H
B
I
H
B
I
8
2
7
SHIELD
TA3
Shield E No Connection 10
( 1 )
( 2 )
For PG, EPC Model 755A, Orange and Blue wires are not used.
For PG, Dynapar H-20, pins C, G, and J are not used.
The PG-X2 card also has a connector TA2 which provides processed PG signal output for use by an external pulse monitor. This connection can be made according to Figure 1-5.
1-24
7
8
5
6
9
3
4
1
2
10
GPD 515/G5 panel or enclosure
Factory wiring —
TB1 to TA1
TB1
GPD 515/G5
TA1
PG-X2 Card
PG input per
Table 1-9
300 KHz (2) input max.
P
P
P
P
7
8
5
6
9
3
4
1
2
10
TA3
Isolated Power Supply
+12V
0V
+5V
A+
A-
B+
B-
Z+
(3)
Z-
(3)
0V
Shield
Optical
Isolation
Line Receiver
(1)
TA2
Pulse
Monitor
Ouptut
120 ‰
120 ‰
120 ‰
P
P
P
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
A+
A-
B+
B-
Z+
Z-
Line Driver
Pulse
A
Pulse
B
Pulse
Z
RS422
Compatible
300kHz
(2) ouptut max.
N/C
NOTE:
Wiring distance from GPD 515/G5 to pulse monitor: 100m or less.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Factory Connection
(to control terminal 12)
Customer supplied.
Refer to Section 2.2b or 2.2d (PG-X2) to calculate frequency.
Z pulses not requred for most applications.
E
Figure 1-5. PG-X2 Card Input/Output Connections
1-25
Section 2. INITIAL START-UP ("LOCAL" CONTROL)
2.1 PRE-POWER CHECKS
• Verify wires are properly connected and no erroneous grounds exist.
• Remove all debris from the drive enclosure. Check for loose wire clippings.
• Verify all mechanical connections inside the drive are tight.
• Verify motor is not connected to load.
• Apply input power only after the front cover is in place. DO NOT remove the front cover or Digital Operator while input power is on.
• F o r 4 6 0 V , G P D 5 1 5 C - B 0 4 1 t h r u - B 0 9 6 ( C I M R - G 5 M 4 0 P 4 1 F t h r u 4 0 4 5 1 F ):
Verify that the drive power voltage select connector, located at lower left corner inside drive chassis (see Figure 2-1), is positioned correctly for the input power line voltage.
Voltage is preset to 460V at the factory. Reposition, if required, to match nominal line voltage.
23CN 24CN 25CN 26CN 22CN FU2
20CN r
TB1
s
+ +
21CN
380V 400/415V 440V 460V
F i g u r e 2 - 1 a . P o w e r V o l t a g e S e l e c t i o n i n 4 6 0 V d r i v e
•
• •
•
For 600V, GPD515C-C027 thru -C200
( C I M R - G 5 M 5 0 1 8 1 F t h r u 5 1 6 0 0 F ).
Verify that the drive power voltage select connector, located at lower left corner inside drive chassis (see Figure 2-1b), is positioned correctly for the input power line voltage. Voltage is preset to 600V at the factory. Reposition, if required, to match nominal line voltage.
F i g u r e 2 - 1 b .
P o w e r V o l t a g e S e l e c t i o n i n 6 0 0 V D r i v e
2-1
2 . 2 C O N T R O L METHOD SELECTION
• Determine the proper control method for the application using Figure 2-2.
NOTE: For a more complete determination of control method, consult factory.
START
Vector Control
NO
Is the load
Variable Torque?
(Pump or Fan)
YES
V/F Control
NO
High
Starting Torque and/or Zero Speed
Control?
YES
PG (Encoder)
Required
On Motor
PG-X2
Option Card
Required
Use Open
Loop Vector
Control
Method
Use Flux
Vector
Control
Method
NO
Use V/f
Control
Method
Speed
Regulation
Better than
± 3%?
F i g u r e 2 - 2 . C o n t r o l M e t h o d S e l e c t i o n F l o w c h a r t
YES
PG (Encoder)
Required
On Motor
PG-X2
Option Card
Required
Use V/f w/ PG Fdbk
Control
Method
• If the selected control method requires a PG encoder on the motor, verify that a PG-X2 card is installed in the drive (see separate option installation sheet for details) and that all encoder wiring is correct.
• Proceed to the correct Power On and Preliminary Checks procedure:
Control Method
Open Loop Vector
Flux Vector
V / f
V/f with PG Feedback
POWER ON AND PRELIMINARY CHECKS
Section
2.2a
2 . 2 b
2 . 2 c
2 . 2 d
2-2
2 . 2 a P O W E R O N A N D PRELIMINARY CHECKS - OPEN LOOP VECTOR CONTROL
DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE
Apply input power to the drive.
If the display is not in English, go to section 2.3, “CHANGING
THE LANGUAGE ON THE
DIGITAL OPERATOR”.
Set the control method of the drive to Open Loop Vector.
(Set A1-02 to 2.)
NOTE: The drive leaves the factory set for
Open Loop Vector control — this step may not be required.
Press
MENU
Press
Press
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
, then
, then twice
, then set drive to Open Loop
Vector using:
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
** Main Menu **
Initialize
Control Method
V/F Control
A1-02= 2
Open Loop Vector
Write value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER
Set parameter access level to Press
Advanced. This allows all parameters to be viewed and modified.
Press
MENU
DATA
ENTER
, then
, then
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then set drive to Advanced using:
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Control Method
Open Loop Vector
** Main Menu **
Initialize
Access Level
Quick Start
A1-01= 4
Advanced Level
Write value to memory by pressing:
DATA
ENTER
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Access Level
Advanced Level
2-3
2 . 2 a ( c o n t i n u e d )
DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE
Check the motor rotation using the JOG function.
Press
MENU
, then
DATA
ENTER
NOTE: The frequency reference for this operation comes from d1-09 and is factory set to 6 Hz.
WARNING
THE NEXT KEY-PRESS
WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR
TO MOVE; TAKE APPRO-
PRIATE PRECAUTIONS.
If either or both of the SEQ and REF lights are on, press
LOCAL
REMOTE
Press & hold
The motor should ramp up to speed, and rotation should be counter-clockwise if the FWD light is on. Rotation should be clockwise if the REV light is on.
If rotation is incorrect, reverse Release any two motor leads, then repeat the motor rotation check.
JOG
JOG
Run the Auto-Tuning routine:
WARNING
THE MOTOR WILL MOVE
WHEN AUTO-TUNING IS
EXECUTED! TAKE
PROPER PRECAUTIONS!
CAUTION
Motor should be disconnected from the load before executing the auto-tuning routine.
NOTE: If the motor cannot be disconnected from the load, or if Auto-Tuning fails, motor parameters should be entered manually. See section
2.4 for the procedure.
Enter the motor nameplate values needed to perform Autotuning
Press
MENU
, then 3 times
DIGITAL OPERATOR
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 6.00 HZ
RUN light will illuminate
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
2-4
2 . 2 a ( c o n t i n u e d )
DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE
Press
DATA
ENTER
twice
Set the correct Nameplate voltage of the motor, using:
RESET
Write the value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER
DIGITAL OPERATOR
Rated Voltage
400.0 VAC
Rated Voltage
460.0 VAC
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Rated Voltage
460.0 VAC
When all of the parameters are entered, execute Auto-
Tuning.
The drive will first output current to the motor, then run the motor at a high speed.
During tuning, the following message will appear:
Enter the current and the rest of the parameters following a similar procedure to that of the motor nameplate voltage.
Press
Press
RUN
If no problems are encountered, the following message will appear:
• If a problem occurs during
Auto-Tuning execution, see section 6.2, AUTO
TUNING FAULTS AND
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS.
Proceed to section 2.5,
“TEST RUN USING DIGITAL
OPERATOR”
Tuning Ready ?
Press RUN key
Tune Proceeding
XX HZ X.XX A
Tune Successful
Tune Aborted
"Reason"
2-5
2 . 2 b P O W E R O N A N D PRELIMINARY CHECKS - FLUX VECTOR CONTROL
• Ensure motor is disconnected from load. To assure safety, disconnect the coupling or belt which connects the motor with the machine, so that motor operation is isolated prior to test operation.
• Verify the encoder to be used meets the following criteria: Line driver type (8830,
88C30), output pulse levels of 5-12V, and quadrature (A+, A–, B+, B–). Power supply for the encoder from the PG-X2 card is capable of 200mA @ 12VDC or 200mA @ 5VDC.
Do not use both of these power supplies simultaneously.
• Verify that the encoder PPR (pulses per revolution) and expected motor speed do not exceed the bandwidth of the PG-X2 card, using the following formula:
300,000 Hz
≥ 1.2 x (Max Speed in RPM / 60) x PPR of encoder
NOTE: Speed in RPM = 120 x frequency / number of motor poles
Example: Encoder PPR = 1024, Maximum speed = 1750 RPM
300,000 Hz
≥ 1.2 x (1750 / 60) x 1024
300,000 Hz
≥ 35,840 Hz – Acceptable
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE
Apply input power to the drive.
If the display is not in English, go to section 2.3, “CHANGING
THE LANGUAGE ON THE
DIGITAL OPERATOR”.
Set the control method of the drive to Flux Vector (Set
A1-02 to 3.)
Press
MENU
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then
, then twice
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then set drive to Flux
Vector using:
** Main Menu **
Initialize
Control Method
Open Loop Vector
A1-02= 3
Flux Vector
Write value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Control Method
Flux Vector
2-6
2 . 2 b ( c o n t i n u e d )
DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE
, then Set parameter access level to Press
Advanced. This allows all parameters to be viewed and modified.
Press
MENU
DATA
ENTER
, then
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then set drive to Advanced using:
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
** Main Menu **
Initialize
Access Level
Quick Start
A1-01= 4
Advanced Level
Write value to memory by pressing:
DATA
ENTER
Set PG Pulses/Rev to the correct value. (NOTE: For a
Yaskawa vector motor, the correct value is 1024.)
Press
MENU
, then
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then
Press
DATA
ENTER
3 times
Set the correct PPR, using: twice
4 times
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Access Level
Advanced Level
** Main Menu **
Programming
Group F
Options
PG Pulses/Rev
00600
PG Pulses/Rev
01024
RESET
Write value to memory by pressing:
DATA
ENTER
Entry Accepted briefly, then
PG Pulses/Rev
F1-01= 1024
2-7
2 . 2 b ( c o n t i n u e d )
DESCRIPTION
Display motor speed. Press
KEY SEQUENCE
MENU
, then
DATA
ENTER
, then
4 times
Rotate the motor shaft counterclockwise by hand (as viewed from the load end of the motor).
• As the shaft is turned counter-clockwise, a low positive speed should be indicated.
• As the shaft is turned clockwise, a low negative speed should be indicated.
• If the speed doesn’t change when the motor shaft is rotated, check encoder wiring and connections.
The pulses from the encoder can also be checked; see section 6.6, “CHECKING
ENCODER PULSES.”
• If the polarity is wrong, switch the channels on the input to the PG-X2 card
(on terminal block TA1, swap wires at terminals
4 & 6 and swap wires at terminals 5 & 7).
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
Function U1
Monitor
Motor Speed
U1-05= 0.00 HZ
Motor Speed
U1-05= 2.38 HZ
Motor Speed
U1-05=- 1.47 HZ
2-8
2 . 2 b ( c o n t i n u e d )
DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE
Check the motor rotation using Press the JOG function.
MENU
NOTE: The frequency reference for this operation comes from d1-09 and is factory set to 6 Hz.
WARNING
THE NEXT KEY-PRESS
WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR
TO MOVE; TAKE APPRO-
PRIATE PRECAUTIONS.
Press & hold
The motor should ramp up to speed, and rotation should be counter-clockwise if the FWD light is on. Rotation should be clockwise if the REV light is on.
If the motor does not accelerate smoothly or oscillates, reverse Release any two motor leads, then repeat the motor rotation check.
JOG
JOG
, then
DATA
ENTER
If either or both of the SEQ and REF lights are on, press
LOCAL
REMOTE
Run the Auto-Tuning routine:
WARNING
THE MOTOR WILL MOVE
WHEN AUTO-TUNING IS
EXECUTED! TAKE
PROPER PRECAUTIONS!
CAUTION
Motor should be disconnected from the load before executing the auto-tuning routine.
NOTE: If the motor cannot be disconnected from the load, or if Auto-Tuning fails, motor parameters should be entered manually. See section
2.4 for the procedure.
3 times Enter the motor nameplate values needed to perform Autotuning
Press
MENU
, then
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 6.00 HZ
RUN light will illuminate
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
2-9
2 . 2 b ( c o n t i n u e d )
DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE
Press
DATA
ENTER
twice
Set the correct Nameplate voltage of the motor, using:
RESET
Write the value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
Rated Voltage
400.0 VAC
Rated Voltage
460.0 VAC
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Rated Voltage
460.0 VAC
When all of the parameters are entered, execute Auto-
Tuning.
The drive will first output current to the motor, then run the motor at a high speed.
During tuning, the following message will appear:
Enter the current and the rest of the parameters following a similar procedure to that of the motor nameplate voltage.
Press
Press
RUN
If no problems are encountered, the following message will appear:
• If a problem occurs during
Auto-Tuning execution, see section 6.2, AUTO TUNING
FAULTS & CORRECTIVE
ACTIONS .
Proceed to section 2.5,
“TEST RUN USING DIGITAL
OPERATOR”
Tuning Ready ?
Press RUN key
Tune Proceeding
XX HZ X.XX A
Tune Successful
Tune Aborted
"Reason"
2-10
2 . 2 c P O W E R O N A N D PRELIMINARY CHECKS - V/f CONTROL
DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE
Apply input power to the drive.
If the display is not in English, go to section 2.3, “CHANGING
THE LANGUAGE ON THE
DIGITAL OPERATOR”.
Set the control method of the drive to V/f Control.
(Set A1-02 to 0.)
Press
MENU
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then
, then twice
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then set drive to V/f
Control using:
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
** Main Menu **
Initialize
Control Method
Open Loop Vector
A1-02= 0
V/F Control
Write value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER
Set parameter access level to Press
Advanced. This allows all parameters to be viewed and modified.
Press
MENU
DATA
ENTER
, then
, then
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then set drive to Advanced using:
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Control Method
V/F Control
** Main Menu **
Initialize
Access Level
Quick Start
A1-01= 4
Advanced Level
Write value to memory by pressing:
DATA
ENTER
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Access Level
Advanced Level
2-11
2 . 2 c ( c o n t i n u e d )
DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE
Select the drive input voltage, Press then select an appropriate V/f pattern. Refer to section 5.38,
“V/F PATTERN – STANDARD” or 5.39, “V/F PATTERN –
CUSTOM”.
Press
MENU
DATA
ENTER
NOTE: A standard V/f pattern for a 60 HZ motor is pattern 1 (60 HZ
Saturation).
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then
, then twice
3 times
Press
DATA
ENTER
twice, then set the drive to the nominal input line voltage using:
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
** Main Menu **
Programming
Group E
Motor
Function E1
V/F Pattern
Input Voltage
460 VAC
Write to memory by pressing:
DATA
ENTER
Press twice, then
DATA
ENTER
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Input Voltage
E1-01= 460 VAC
E1-03= F***
User Defined V/F
Then set the drive to desired V/F pattern using:
E1-03= 1
60 HZ Saturation
Write to memory by pressing:
DATA
ENTER
Entry Accepted briefly, then
V/F Selection
60 HZ Saturation
2-12
2 . 2 c ( c o n t i n u e d )
DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE
Check the motor rotation using the JOG function.
Press
MENU
, then
DATA
ENTER
NOTE: The frequency reference for this operation comes from d1-09 and is factory set to 6 Hz.
WARNING
THE NEXT KEY-PRESS
WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR
TO MOVE; TAKE APPRO-
PRIATE PRECAUTIONS.
If either or both of the SEQ and REF lights are on, press
LOCAL
REMOTE
Press & hold
The motor should ramp up to speed, and rotation should be counter-clockwise if the FWD light is on. Rotation should be clockwise if the REV light is on.
If rotation is incorrect, reverse Release any two motor leads, then repeat the motor rotation check.
JOG
JOG
Proceed to section 2.5,
“TEST RUN USING DIGITAL
OPERATOR”
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 6.00 HZ
RUN light will illuminate
2-13
2 . 2 d P O W E R O N A N D PRELIMINARY CHECKS - V/f WITH PG FEEDBACK
• Ensure motor is disconnected from load. To assure safety, disconnect the coupling or belt which connects the motor with the machine so that motor operation is isolated, prior to test operation.
• Verify the encoder to be used meets the following criteria: Line driver type (8830,
88C30), output pulse levels of 5-12V, and quadrature (A+, A–, B+, B–). Power supply for the encoder from the PG-X2 card is capable of 200mA @ 12VDC or 200mA @ 5VDC.
Do not use both of these power supplies simultaneously.
• Verify that the encoder PPR (pulses per revolution) and expected motor speed do not exceed the bandwidth of the PG-X2 card, using the following formula:
300,000 Hz
≥ 1.2 x (Max Speed in RPM / 60) x PPR of encoder
NOTE: Speed in RPM = 120 x frequency / # of motor poles
Example: Encoder PPR = 1024, Maximum speed = 1750 RPM
300,000 Hz
≥ 1.2 x (1750 / 60) x 1024
300,000 Hz
≥ 35,840 Hz – Acceptable
DESCRIPTION
Apply input power to the drive.
If the display is not in English, go to section 2.3, “CHANGING
THE LANGUAGE ON THE
DIGITAL OPERATOR”.
Set the control method of the drive to V/f w/PG Feedback
(Set A1-02 to 1.)
KEY SEQUENCE
Press
MENU
, then
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then
Press
DATA
ENTER
twice
, then set drive to V/F w/PG
Fdbk using:
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
** Main Menu **
Initialize
Control Method
Open Loop Vector
A1-02= 1
V/F w/PG Fdbk
Write value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Control Method
V/F w/PG Fdbk
2-14
2 . 2 d ( c o n t i n u e d )
DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE
Set parameter access level to Press
Advanced. This allows all parameters to be viewed and modified.
Press
MENU
DATA
ENTER
, then
, then
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then set drive to Advanced using:
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
** Main Menu **
Initialize
Access Level
Quick Start
A1-01= 4
Advanced Level
Write value to memory by pressing:
DATA
ENTER
Set PG Pulses/Rev to the correct value. (NOTE: For a
Yaskawa vector motor, the correct value is 1024.)
Press
MENU
, then
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then
Press
DATA
ENTER
3 times twice
4 times
Set the correct PPR, using:
Write value to memory by pressing:
DATA
ENTER
RESET
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Access Level
Advanced Level
** Main Menu **
Programming
Group F
Options
PG Pulses/Rev
00600
PG Pulses/Rev
01024
Entry Accepted briefly, then
PG Pulses/Rev
F1-01= 1024
2-15
2 . 2 d ( c o n t i n u e d )
DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE
Select the drive input voltage, Press then select an appropriate V/F pattern. Refer to section 5.38,
“V/F PATTERN – STANDARD” or 5.39, “V/F PATTERN –
CUSTOM”. Press
MENU
DATA
ENTER
NOTE: A standard V/F pattern for a 60 HZ motor is pattern 1 (60 HZ
Saturation).
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then
, then twice
3 times
Press
DATA
ENTER
twice, then set the drive to the nominal input line voltage using:
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
** Main Menu **
Programming
Group E
Motor
Function E1
V/F Pattern
Input Voltage
460 VAC
Write to memory by pressing:
DATA
ENTER
Press twice, then
DATA
ENTER
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Input Voltage
E1-01= 460 VAC
E1-03= F***
User Defined V/F
Then set the drive to desired V/F pattern using:
E1-03= 1
60 HZ Saturation
Write to memory by pressing:
DATA
ENTER
Entry Accepted briefly, then
V/F Selection
60 HZ Saturation
2-16
2 . 2 d ( c o n t i n u e d )
DESCRIPTION
Display motor speed. Press
KEY SEQUENCE
MENU
, then
DATA
ENTER
, then
4 times
Rotate the motor shaft counterclockwise by hand (as viewed from the load end of the motor).
• As the shaft is turned counter-clockwise, a low positive speed should be indicated.
• As the shaft is turned clockwise, a low negative speed should be indicated.
• If the speed doesn’t change when the motor shaft is rotated, check encoder wiring and connections.
The pulses from the encoder can also be checked; see section 6.6, “CHECKING
ENCODER PULSES.”
• If the polarity is wrong, switch the channels on the input to the PG-X2 card
(on terminal block TA1, swap wires at terminals
4 & 6 and swap wires at terminals 5 & 7).
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
Function F1
Monitor
Motor Speed
U1-05= 0.00 HZ
Motor Speed
U1-05= 2.38 HZ
Motor Speed
U1-05=- 1.47 HZ
2-17
2 . 2 d ( c o n t i n u e d )
DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE
Check the motor rotation using Press the JOG function.
MENU
NOTE: The frequency reference for this operation comes from d1-09 and is factory set to 6 Hz.
WARNING
THE NEXT KEY-PRESS
WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR
TO MOVE; TAKE APPRO-
PRIATE PRECAUTIONS.
, then
DATA
ENTER
If either or both of the SEQ and REF lights are on, press
LOCAL
REMOTE
Press & hold
The motor should ramp up to speed, and rotation should be counter-clockwise if the FWD light is on. Rotation should be clockwise if the REV light is on.
If rotation is incorrect, reverse Release any two motor leads, then repeat the motor rotation check.
JOG
JOG
Proceed to section 2.5,
“TEST RUN USING DIGITAL
OPERATOR”
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 6.00 HZ
RUN light will illuminate
2-18
2 . 3 C H A N G I N G THE LANGUAGE O N THE DIGITAL OPERATOR
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
Power ON
Bring up the Main Menu and go to Initialize mode.
KEY SEQUENCE
Press
MENU
, then then
DATA
ENTER
Change the language.
,
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then select the correct language using:
[ Display in Wrong
Language ]
A1-00= 0
English
Write value to memory.
Press
DATA
ENTER
Return to operating mode.
Press
MENU
, then
DATA
ENTER
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Select Language
English
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ
2-19
2 . 4 C A L C U L A T I N G MOTOR PARAMETERS
This procedure can be used as an alternative to auto-motor tuning. If the motor being used with the drive did not pass motor auto-tuning or if the motor cannot be disconnected from the load, the motor parameters need to be calculated and entered manually.
T h i s p r o c e d u r e o n l y a p p l i e s t o t h e O p e n L o o p V e c t o r C o n t r o l m e t h o d & t h e
F l u x V e c t o r C o n t r o l m e t h o d .
The following information used in the calculation formulas is usually listed on the motor nameplate. If no-load current is not marked on the nameplate and the motor manufacturer is not able to supply it, use the default value of (0.3 x I
FLA
) = I
NLA
.
Motor Voltage (V)
Motor Rated Speed (RPM)
Motor Rated Frequency (Hz)
Motor Synchronous Speed (RPM)
Full Load Amps (FLA)
No-Load Amps (NLA)
Vm
N
R f
R
N
S
I
FLA
I
NLA
( N
S
= f
R
* 120 / number of motor poles)
DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE
Enter the Maximum frequency Press
( E1-04 ). For constant torque applications, set to motor nameplate frequency. For constant horsepower applications, set to maximum frequency desired.
Press
MENU
DATA
ENTER
, then
, then twice
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
** Main Menu **
Programming
3 times Group E
Motor
Press
DATA
ENTER
twice
Input Voltage
E1-01= 460 VAC
Press twice, then
DATA
ENTER
Max. Frequency
0060.0 HZ
Set the maximum frequency using:
RESET
Write value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER
Max. Frequency
0060.0 HZ
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Max. Frequency
E1-04= 60.0 HZ
2-20
2 . 4 ( c o n t i n u e d )
DESCRIPTION
Enter the Base frequency
( E1-06 ). This value can be obtained from the motor nameplate (rated frequency).
Press
KEY SEQUENCE
twice , then
Set the base frequency using:
DATA
ENTER
RESET
Write value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
Base Frequency
0060.0 HZ
Base Frequency
0060.0 HZ
Enter the maximum motor voltage ( E1-05 ). This value can be obtained from the motor nameplate (rated voltage).
Press , then
DATA
ENTER
Set the maximum voltage using:
RESET
Write value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Base Frequency
E1-06= 60.0 HZ
Max. Voltage
400.0 VAC
Max. Voltage
460.0 VAC
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Max. Voltage
E1-05= 460.0 VAC
2-21
2 . 4 ( c o n t i n u e d )
DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE
Enter the motor rated full load Press amps ( E2-01 ). This value can be obtained from the motor nameplate (motor full load amps).
Press
ESC
DATA
ENTER
, then twice
Set the FLA using:
RESET
Write value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
Function E2
Motor Setup
Motor Rated FLA
001.00 A
Motor Rated FLA
001.20 A
Enter the motor rated slip
( E2-02 ). This value can be calculated using the following formula:
E2-02 =
(Ns - Nr)
Ns x 60 x 0.7
Nr = nameplate rated speed
Ns = synchronous speed
Ns = f
R x 120 / # of motor poles
Press , then
Set motor rated slip using:
DATA
ENTER
RESET
Write value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Motor Rated FLA
E2-01= 1.20 A
Motor Rated Slip
02.90 HZ
Motor Rated Slip
1.08 HZ
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Motor Rated Slip
E2-02= 1.08 Hz
2-22
2 . 4 ( c o n t i n u e d )
DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE
Enter the motor no-load current Press
( E2-03 ). This value can sometimes be obtained from the motor nameplate. If it is unavailable, use the following
, then
DATA
ENTER
Set motor no load current using: formula to calculate it:
1-5 HP:
I
NLA
5-15 HP:
= I
FLA x 0.50
I
NLA
> 15 HP:
= I
FLA x 0.40
I
NLA
= I
FLA x 0.30
Write value to memory by pressing
RESET
DATA
ENTER
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
No-Load Current
000.60 A
No-Load Current
000.32 A
Enter number of motor poles
( E2-04 ).
Press , then
DATA
ENTER
(Assuming an f
R of 50 or 60 Hz)
Rated Speed
(RPM) # of motor poles
2400-3600 2
1300-1800
900-1200
660-900
4
6
8
Set number of motor poles using:
RESET
Write value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER
Note:
This step is not required for
Open Loop Vector Control method (A1-02=0).
Entry Accepted briefly, then
No-Load Current
E2-03= 0.32A
Number of Poles
04
Number of Poles
04
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Number of Poles
E2-04= 4
Parameters E2-05 to E2-09 :
Factory set values are acceptable.
2-23
2 . 5 T E S T R U N USING DIGITAL OPERATOR ( " L O C A L " CONTROL)
The operation shown in Figure 2-3 and described in Table 2-5 is for a standard 60 Hz motor.
OUTPUT
FREQUENCY
+
0
➀
➁
➂
FWD
ROTATION
AT 15HZ
➃
ACCEL
CHANGE FREQ.
REFERENCE
DECEL
STOP
ACCEL
–
POWER
ON
FORWARD
RUN
FREQUENCY
SETTING
REVERSE
RUN
REV
ROTATION
AT 15HZ
➄
ACCEL
REV
ROTATION
AT 60HZ
➅
F i g u r e 2 - 3 . E x a m p l e o f S i m p l e O p e r a t i o n
DECEL
DESCRIPTION
Power ON
T a b l e 2 - 5 . T e s t R u n W i t h D i g i t a l O p e r a t o r
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
Press
KEY SEQUENCE
MENU
, then
DATA
ENTER
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ
If either the SEQ or REF lights Press are on, they should be turned off by pressing the LOCAL/
LOCAL
REMOTE
REMOTE key. This will set the drive so it can be completely controlled by the Digital
Operator.
SEQ and REF lights are off,
DRIVE and FWD lights are on.
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ
2-24
T a b l e 2 - 5 . T e s t R u n W i t h D i g i t a l O p e r a t o r - C o n t i n u e d
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
Set a run frequency of 15 Hz.
KEY SEQUENCE
Press
DATA
ENTER
Frequency Ref
000.00 HZ
Set the frequency to 15 using:
Frequency Ref
015.00 HZ
RESET
Write the value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Frequency Ref
015.00 HZ
Display the output frequency.
Press
ESC
, then
Output Freq
U1-02= 0.00 HZ
Run the motor in the forward direction.
Press
Run the motor in the reverse direction.
Press
FWD
REV
RUN
RUN light comes on and motor ramps up to speed.
Output Freq
U1-02= 15.00 HZ
NOTE: Output frequency may be slightly higher than the frequency reference, depending on the control method selected.
RUN light remains on. FWD light goes out and REV light comes on.
The motor ramps down to zero speed, then ramps up in the opposite direction.
Output Freq
U1-02= -15.00 HZ
NOTE: output frequency may be slightly higher than the frequency reference, depending on the control method selected.
2-25
T a b l e 2 - 5 . T e s t R u n W i t h D i g i t a l O p e r a t o r - C o n t i n u e d
DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
Change the frequency reference from 15 Hz to
60 Hz.
Press
MENU
, then
DATA
ENTER
twice
Frequency Ref
015.00 HZ
Change the frequency using:
Frequency Ref
060.00 HZ
RESET
Write the value to memory by pressing
DATA
ENTER
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Frequency Ref
060.00 HZ
Display the output frequency.
Press
ESC
, then
Stop the motor.
Press
STOP
Output Freq
U1-02= -60.00 HZ
NOTE: Output frequency may be slightly higher than the frequency reference, depending on the control method selected.
The STOP light turns on, and the
RUN light blinks during the deceleration of the motor.
Output Freq
U1-02= 0.00 HZ
2-26
2.6 PRE-OPERATION CONSIDERATIONS
• After completing the Test Run, connect the motor to the load.
• Additional control circuit wiring can be added, and parameters in the drive can be programmed to configure the drive system to your specific application, including “Remote”
(2-wire or 3-wire) Control. See Section 5 for description of programmable features, and also see instruction sheets for any options included with the drive.
• Record all parameter values (see Quick Reference sheets at the front of this manual).
2 . 7 S T O R A G E FUNCTION
The drive uses internal NV-RAM to store information when power is removed or in the event of a power failure. Therefore, when power is reapplied, operation will begin at the same state as when power was removed.
The following information is stored:
• Last Main Speed Reference setting and forward/reverse selection from Digital
Operator.
• The sequence of failure conditions that occurred before power was removed
(including content of a " CPF " failure).
2-27
2-28
Section 3. OPERATION A T LOAD
After completing the start-up, and programming of parameters, turn off the AC main circuit power. Make additional wiring connections required for the external control functions selected by the parameter programming. Connect the driven machine to the motor. Verify that the driven machine is in running condition, and that no dangerous conditions exist around the drive system.
CAUTION
When starting and stopping the motor, use the operation signals (RUN/STOP,
FWD/REV), NOT the magnetic contactor on the power supply side (if present).
Run the motor under load with control by the Digital Operator using the same procedure as for the Test Run (Table 2-5). If the Digital Operator is used in combination with external commands or external commands only are used, the procedure must be altered accordingly.
For preset starting (one-touch operation after setting the frequency), perform the following:
1 . Set the speed and press RUN. Motor accelerates, at the rate corresponding to the preset accel time, to the preset speed. The accel time ( C 1 - 0 1 ) is set too short relative to the load if the RPM of the accelerating motor does not increase smoothly, or if a fault is displayed on the Digital Operator.
2 . Press STOP. Unless coast to stop operation has been selected (by programming of b 1 - 0 3 ), the motor decelerates, at the rate corresponding to the preset decel time ( C 1 - 0 2 ), to a stop.
3-1
3-2
Section 4. DIGITAL OPERATOR
4 . 1 G E N E R A L
All functions of the GPD 515/G5 are accessed using the Digital Operator. In addition to controlling motor operation, the operator can enter information into the drive memory to configure the drive to the application by entering the Program mode.
4 . 2 D I S P L A Y A N D KEYPAD
The Digital Operator has a 2 line by 16 character LCD display. Both numeric and alphanumeric data can appear on the display.
Indicator lamps and keys on the Digital Operator are described in Figure 4-1.
REMOTE Mode indication LEDs.
The LEDs light when REMOTE
Mode has been selected, either for Start/Stop (SEQ) control or Frequency
Reference (REF).
DRIVE FWD REV
SEQ
REMOTE
REF
Indicates which direction the motor is being commanded to run.
Lights when the GPD 515/G5 is in Drive (operation) mode.
Increase parameter number or value of blinking digit.
Switch between LOCAL and
REMOTE operation modes.
Initiates Jog function.
Selects forward or reverse operation.
Run the motor. LED lights when drive is controlling motor speed.
Frequency Ref
U1-01 = 0.00 Hz
DIGITAL OPERATOR
JVOP-130
LOCAL
REMOTE
JOG
MENU
ESC
DATA
ENTER
FWD
REV
RUN
RESET
STOP
2 line, 16 character alphanumeric LCD display; shows selected operation status, fault code, or parameter data.
Displays the main menu for mode selection.
Returns to previous status or menu level.
Displays data to be changed, and enters new data.
Decrease parameter number or value of blinking digit.
Resets a drive fault, or selects digit of a set value to be changed. The selected digit will blink.
Stop the motor. LED lights when drive is in stopped condition.
F i g u r e 4 - 1 . D i g i t a l O p e r a t o r
4-1
DRIVE
FWD
REV
REMOTE
SEQ
REMOTE
REF
RUN
STOP
T a b l e 4 - 1 . D i g i t a l O p e r a t o r C o n t r o l s
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
Lights when the drive is in the Drive mode of operation.
Lights when Forward motor run has been selected.
Lights when Reverse motor run has been selected.
Lights when the drive is programmed to operate from external RUN and STOP signals.
Lights when the drive is programmed to operate by an external frequency reference signal.
Off when drive is in stopped condition; lights steadily when Run signal is active; blinks after Stop signal has been received and drive output is ramping down. (See Figure 4-2.)
Lights steadily at initial power-up; blinks after Run signal becomes active but frequency reference is zero; off when drive output is controlling motor speed.
(See Figure 4-2.)
LOCAL
REMOTE
JOG
FWD
REV
RUN
STOP
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
Pressing this key toggles between the Local (Digital Operator) and Remote (Terminals) modes of operation. Active only when the drive is in stopped condition.
IN DRIVE MODE: Pressing and holding this key will initiate Jog function: drive output goes to programmed Jog Frequency ( d1-09 ) to check motor operation, or to position machine. When key is released, output returns to zero and motor stops.
If the motor is already running, pressing this key will have no effect.
NOTE: Disabled if the drive is programmed to use an external JOG input.
IN DRIVE MODE: Each press of this key will toggle between Forward and Reverse motor run direction. The selected direction is indicated by the FWD or REV lamp being lit. If the selection is made while the drive is stopped, it determines the direction the motor will run when started. If the selection is changed during running, the drive will ramp the motor to zero speed and then ramp it up to set speed in the opposite (i.e. newly selected) direction.
IN DRIVE MODE: If the drive is not programmed to operate by external RUN and STOP signals (as indicated by REMOTE SEQ lamp being lit), pressing this key will produce a Run command to initiate drive output to the motor. However, output frequency will be zero if the frequency reference is zero at the time this key is pressed.
IN DRIVE MODE: Pressing this key will produce a Stop command. The drive will decelerate the motor in the programmed stopping manner, then drive output will be disconnected from the motor.
4-2
Table 4-1. Digital Operator Controls - Continued
MENU
ESC
DATA
ENTER
>
RESET
^
(up arrow)
v
(down arrow)
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
IN DRIVE MODE: Pressing this key will display the top level of the menu tree for selecting and reading parameters. The drive will change to Program mode.
IN PROGRAM MODE: Pressing this key will display the top level of the menu tree for returning to the Drive mode. Pressing the MENU & DATA/ENTER keys in succession will change to Drive mode and display the frequency reference setting.
Each time this key is pressed the display returns to the previous level in the menu tree or to the status prior to pressing DATA/ENTER.
IN DRIVE MODE OR PROGRAM MODE: When a parameter number is being displayed, pressing this key will display the parameter’s set value which is presently in memory.
IN PROGRAM MODE ONLY: After the displayed set value has been changed as desired, pressing this key will write the new set value into the drive memory to replace the old value.
IN DRIVE MODE OR PROGRAM MODE: When a changeable data value is being displayed, pressing this key moves the blinking (i.e. "changeable") position to the next digit to the right. If at the right-most position, this will wrap-around to the first position on the left side of the display.
IN DRIVE MODE OR PROGRAM MODE: Pressing this key will increase the value of the blinking digit in the display by 1. Pressing this key will increase a parameter number by 1.
IN DRIVE MODE OR PROGRAM MODE: Pressing this key will decrease the value of the blinking digit in the display by 1. Pressing this key will decrease a parameter number by 1.
RUN
COMMAND
FREQUENCY
REFERENCE
POWER
ON
PRESS
RUN KEY
PRESS
STOP KEY
OUTPUT
FREQUENCY
RUN
LAMP
STOP
LAMP
= Off = Blinking = Lighted Steady
F i g u r e 4 - 2 . F u n c t i o n i n g o f R U N a n d S T O P L a m p s
4-3
4 . 3 D I G I T A L OPERATOR MENU TREES
A . Q u i c k - s t a r t A c c e s s L e v e l
The flowchart tree below illustrates the process of accessing drive parameters when the
Access Level is set to Quick Start ( A 1 - 0 1 = 2 ) .
MENU
Operation
Drive operation is enabled.
Drive status is displayed.
A
Initialize
( Initialize )
LCD language display is selected.
Parameter access levels, control method selection and initialize passwords are set.
Programming
( Programming )
Parameters are set/read. Items to be set/read vary depending on the access level setting.
Auto-tuning
( Auto-tuning )
Motor parameters are automatically set by entering tuning data (motor nameplate values) when using Open
Loop or Flux Vector control method ( A1-02 = 2 or 3).
Modified Constants
( Modified Parameters )
Only parameters that have been changed from the factory settings are set/read.
(2)
(3)
(1)
NOTES
A Function is a “sub-menu” containing many parameters.
Use the DATA/ENTER key to access these parameters.
This parameter is user selectable according to the setting of o1-01 .
Not available for all Control
Methods.
DATA
ENTER
Use the and keys to scroll through the Functions and Parameters.
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
Display
U1-01
U1-02
U1-03
U1-06
U2
U3
U1
Frequency Reference
Output Frequency
Output Current
Output Voltage (2)
Fault Trace
Fault History
Monitor
A1-00
A1-01
A1-02
A1-03
A1-04
Select Language
Access Level
Control Method
Init Parameters
Enter Password
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
E1-13
E2-01
E2-02
E2-03
E2-04 b1-01 b1-02 b1-03
C1-01
C1-02 d1-01 d1-02
Reference Source
Run Source
Stopping Method
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Reference 1
Reference 2
d1-03 d1-04 d1-09
Reference 3
Reference 4
Jog Reference
E1-01
Input Voltage
E1-02
Motor Selection
E1-03
V/F Selection (3)
Max Frequency
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
Max Voltage
Base Frequency
Mid Frequency A (3)
Mid Voltage A (3)
Min Frequency
Min Voltage (3)
Base Voltage (3)
Motor Rated FLA
Motor Rated Slip (3)
No-Load Current (3)
Number of Poles (3)
Function (1) or
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Function
Function
Function
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
4-4
4 . 3 D I G I T A L OPERATOR MENU TREES
B. Basic Access Level
Continued
The flowchart tree below illustrates the process of accessing drive parameters when the
Access Level is set to Basic ( A 1 - 0 1 = 3 ) .
MENU
Operation
Drive operation is enabled.
Drive status is displayed.
A
Initialize
( Initialize )
LCD language display is selected.
Parameter access levels, control method selection and initialize passwords are set.
Programming
( Programming )
Parameters are set/read. Items to be set/read vary depending on the access level setting.
Auto-tuning
( Auto-tuning )
Motor parameters are automatically set by entering tuning data (motor nameplate values) when using Open
Loop or Flux Vector control method ( A1-02 = 2 or 3).
Modified Constants
( Modified Parameters )
Only parameters that have been changed from the factory settings are set/read.
(2)
(3)
(1)
NOTES
A Function is a “sub-menu” containing many parameters.
Use the DATA/ENTER key to access these parameters.
This parameter is user selectable according to the setting of o1-01 .
Not available for all Control
Methods.
DATA
ENTER
Use the and keys to scroll through the Functions and Parameters.
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
Display
U1-01
U1-02
U1-03
U1-06
U2
U3
U1
Frequency Reference
Output Frequency
Output Current
Output Voltage (2)
Fault Trace
Fault History
Monitor
A1-00
A1-01
A1-02
A1-03
A1-04
Select Language
Access Level
Control Method
Init Parameters
Enter Password
Sequence
DC Braking
Accel/Decel
Motor-Slip Comp (3)
Torque Comp (3)
ASR Tuning (3)
Carrier Freq.
Preset Reference
Reference Limits
Jump Frequencies
V/F Patern
Motor Setup
Digital Inputs
Digital Outputs
Analog Inputs
Analog Outputs
Motor Overload
PwrLoss Ridethru
Stall Prevention
Ref Detection
Fault Reset
Torque Detection
Torque Limit (3)
Hdwe Protection
Monitor Select
Key Selection
L4
L5
L6
L1
L2
L3
L7
L8 o1 o2
H2
H3
H4
E1
E2
H1 b1
C4
C5
C6 b2
C1
C3 d1 d2 d3
4-5
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function (1) or
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Function
Function
Function
4 . 3 D I G I T A L OPERATOR MENU TREES
C . A d v a n c e d A c c e s s L e v e l
Continued
The flowchart tree below illustrates the process of accessing drive parameters when the
Access Level is set to Advanced ( A 1 - 0 1 = 4 ) .
MENU
Operation
Drive operation is enabled.
Drive status is displayed.
A
Initialize
( Initialize )
LCD language display is selected. Parameter access levels, control method selection and initialize passwords are set.
Programming
( Programming )
Parameters are set/read.
Items to be set/read vary depending on the access level setting.
Auto-tuning
( Auto-tuning )
Motor parameters are automatically set by entering tuning data (motor nameplate values) when using Open
Loop or Flux Vector control method ( A1-02 = 2 or 3).
Modified Constants
( Modified Parameters )
Only parameters that have been changed from the factory settings are set/read.
(2)
(3)
(1)
NOTES
A Function is a “sub-menu” containing many parameters.
Use the DATA/ENTER key to access these parameters.
This parameter is user selectable according to the setting of o1-01 .
Not available for all Control
Methods.
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
To
A
Use the and keys to scroll through the Functions and Parameters.
b
C d
Application
Application
Tuning
Tuning
Reference
Reference
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER d1 d2 d3 d4 d5
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b1 b2 b3 b4
Display
U1-01
U1-02
U1-03
U1-06
U2
U3
U1
Frequency Reference
Output Frequency
Output Current
Output Voltage (2)
Fault Trace
Fault History
Monitor
A1-00
A1-01
A1-02
A1-03
A1-04
A2
Select Language
Access Level
Control Method
Init Parameters
Enter Password
User Constants
Sequence
DC Braking
Speed Search
Delay TImers
PID Control
Reference Hold
Droop Control (3)
Energy Saving (3)
Zero Servo (3)
Accel/Decel
S-Curve Acc/Dec
Motor-Slip Comp (3)
Torque Comp (3)
ASR Tuning (3)
Carrier Freq
Hunting Prev (3)
Factory Tuning (3)
Preset Reference
Reference Limits
Jump Frequencies
Sequence
Torque Control (3)
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function (1) or
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Function
Function
Function
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Function
4-6
4 . 3 D I G I T A L OPERATOR MENU TREES
C . A d v a n c e d A c c e s s L e v e l (Continued)
Continued
From
A
E
F
L o
Motor Parameters
Motor
Options
Options
H
Control Circuit Terminals
Terminal
Protection
Protection
Digital Operator
Operator
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
Digital Inputs
Digital Outputs
Analog Inputs
Analog Outputs
Serial Com Setup
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
Motor overload
PwrLoss Ridethru
Stall Prevention
Ref Detection
Fault Restart
Torque Detection
Torque Limit (3)
Hdwe Protection
o1 o2
Monitor Select
Key Functions
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
Display
V/f Pattern
Motor Setup
Control Method (Motor 2) v/f Pattern (Motor 2)
Motor Setup (Motor 2)
Function (1) or
Parameter
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
PG Speed Setup (3)
AI-14 Setup
DI-08, 16 Setup
AO-08, 12 Setup
DO-02 Setup
DO-08 Setup
PO-36F Setup
SI-F/G Setup
CP-916 Setup
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
4-7
4 . 4 B A S I C PROGRAMMING
All parameters are set by accessing them through a menu tree with multiple access levels.
The setting of the Access Level in the Initialization Menu determines which parameters appear on the Digital Operator. To see Example 1 and 2 in detail, refer to Tables 4-5, 4-6 and 4-7.
Menu Level
(Advanced
Access)
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
Level 6
T a b l e 4 - 2 . P a r a m e t e r M e n u
Reference Name
Digital Operator Mode
Parameter Group
Parameter Function
Parameter Name
Parameter Number
Parameter Setting Value
Digital Operator
Display
Example 1
Programming
C – Tuning
C1 Accel/Decel
Decel Time 1
C1-02
10.0 sec
Digital Operator
Display
Example 2
Initialize
—
—
Control Method
A1-02
V/F Control
The parameters are arranged by groups. The following table shows which Parameter
Group(s) appear under which Mode.
T a b l e 4 - 3 . P a r a m e t e r G r o u p s
Digital Operator
Modes
Parameter
Groups List *
Operation
U – Monitor
Initialize
A – Initialize
Programming Auto-Tuning
Modified
Constants
b – Application No Group Name No Group Name
C – Tuning d – Reference
E – Motor
F – Options
H – Terminals
L – Protection o – Operator
* For a complete listing of parameters, see Appendix 1.
4-8
4 . 5 M O D E S OF OPERATION
The procedure for choosing a mode is shown in Table 4-4.
DESCRIPTION
T a b l e 4 - 4 . D i g i t a l O p e r a t o r M o d e S e l e c t i o n
KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ
Top of Main Menu
• Displays Operation Mode
(drive changes to Program mode).
• Displays Initialize Mode.
Press
MENU
Press
** Main Menu **
Operation
** Main Menu **
Initialize
• Displays Programming
Mode.
Press
** Main Menu **
Programming
• Displays Auto-Tuning Mode Press
(displayed only when Vector
Control Method is selected).
• Displays Modified
Parameter Menu.
Press
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
** Main Menu **
Modified Constants
Top of Main Menu
• Return to Operation.
Press
MENU
or
** Main Menu **
Operation
• Select Operation Mode.
• Displays frequency reference setting (changes to Drive mode).
Press
DATA
ENTER
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ
4-9
Parameters are changed by pressing the MENU key to enter the Program mode, then advancing through the levels of the menu to access the parameter that is desired to be changed. Only the parameters listed in Table A1-11 (Appendix 1) may be changed while the drive is running.
Table 4-5. Example 1A: Changing a Parameter in Quick-start Access Level
DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ
• Select Programming Mode.
Press
MENU
, then twice
** Main Menu **
Programming
• Select the Parameter Name.
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then 4 times
Decel Time 1
C1-02= 10.0 sec
• Select the Decel Time 1 parameter setting. (The first digit of the value to be set blinks.)
Press
DATA
ENTER
• Change reference value.
Change value by pressing
• Write into memory.
RESET
Press
DATA
ENTER
Decel Time 1
0010.0 sec
Decel Time 1
0001.0 sec
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Decel Time 1
C1-02= 1.0 sec
Top of Main Menu
• Return to Operation.
Press
MENU
** Main Menu **
Operation
• Select Operation Mode
(changes to Drive mode).
Press
DATA
ENTER
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ
4-10
T a b l e 4 - 6 . E x a m p l e 1 B : C h a n g i n g a P a r a m e t e r i n A d v a n c e d A c c e s s
DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ
• Select Programming Mode.
Press
MENU
, then twice
** Main Menu **
Programming
• Select Tuning Parameter
Group.
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then
Group C
Tuning
• Select the Accel/Decel
Function.
Press
DATA
ENTER
Function C1
Accel/Decel
• Select the Parameter Name.
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then
Decel Time 1
C1-02= 10.0 sec
• Select the Decel Time 1 parameter setting. (The first digit of the value to be set blinks.)
Press
DATA
ENTER
• Change reference value.
Change value by pressing
• Write into memory.
RESET
Press
DATA
ENTER
Decel Time 1
0010.0 sec
Decel Time 1
0001.0 sec
Top of Main Menu
• Return to Operation.
Press
MENU
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Decel Time 1
C1-02= 1.0 sec
** Main Menu **
Operation
• Select Operation Mode
(changes to Drive mode).
Press
DATA
ENTER
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ
4-11
Table 4-7. Example 2: Changing Control Method in Quick-start Access Level
DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ
• Select Initialize Mode.
Press
MENU
, then
** Main Menu **
Initialize
• Select the Parameter Name.
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then
• Change data value.
Press
DATA
ENTER
, then
• Write into memory.
Press
DATA
ENTER
twice twice
Control Method
Open Loop Vector
A1-02= 0
V/F Control
Top of Main Menu
• Return to Operation.
Press
MENU
Entry Accepted briefly, then
Control Method
V/F Control
** Main Menu **
Operation
• Select Operation Mode
(changes to Drive mode).
Press
DATA
ENTER
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00 HZ
4-12
Section 5. PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
5 . 1 G E N E R A L
This section describes features of the GPD 515/G5 which are defined by programmed settings in the various parameters in memory. Since most features use more than one parameter, the descriptions appear in alphabetical order by the function name. In Table
5-1, the functions are grouped into operational categories. To cross reference a particular parameter to the features to which it applies, see the listings in Appendix 1, or the Index.
T a b l e 5 - 1 . L i s t o f F e a t u r e s D e f i n e d B y P a r a m e t e r s
FUNCTION
P A R A G R A P H
REFERENCE
P A R A M E T E R ( S )
SET-UP
Initialization (Reset), 2-Wire or 3-Wire
Access Level
Control Method Selection
Drive Capacity, Parameters Affected By
Volts/Hertz Patterns, Standard
Volts/Hertz Pattern, Custom
Input Voltage Setting
Encoder (PG) Parameters
Thermal Motor Overload Protection
Digital Operator Display, Re-scaling
Input Phase Loss Detection
Output Phase Loss Detection
User Parameters
Miscellaneous Parameters
STARTING
Accel Time
S-Curve Characteristics
Dwell
DC Injection Braking at Start
STOPPING
Stopping Method
Decel Time
Dwell
DC Injection Braking at Stop
SPEED CONTROL
Frequency Ref. Input Signals (Auto/Manual)
(Term. 13, 16)
Frequency Reference, Upper & Lower Limits
Jog Reference
Speed Reference Selection (Local/Remote)
Multi-step Speed Setting
Sample/Hold
Up/Down Frequency Setting
5.37
5.4
2.2
Table A3-1
5.47
5.48
5.37
5.15
5.41
5.11
5.34
5.35
5.46
5.26
5.2
5.3
5.14
5.10
5.40
5.2
5.14
5.10
5.19
5.22
5.24
5.25 A
5.25 B
5.32 F
5.32 G
A1-03
A1-01
A1-02
———
E1-03
E1-04 thru -10
E1-01
F1-10 thru F1-14
E1-02; E2-01; L1-01, L1-02
o1-03, o1-04
L8-05
L8-07
A2-01 thru -32; o2-03
o2-01,-02,-05,-06,-07,-08
C1-01,-03,-05,-07,-11
C2-01,-03
b6-01 thru -04
b2-01,-02,-03
b1-03
C1-02,-04,-06,-08,-09,-11
b6-01 thru -04
b2-01,-02,-04
H3-01 thru -12
d1-01 thru -08
d1-09
b1-01,-02; H1-01 thru -06
d1-01 thru -09; H1-01 thru -06
H1-01 thru -06
H1-01 thru -06
5-1
Table 5-1. List of Features Defined By Parameters - Continued
FUNCTION
P A R A G R A P H
REFERENCE
P A R A M E T E R ( S )
SPEED CONTROL - continued
Automatic Frequency Regulator (AFR) Gain
Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR)
Frequency Reference Retention
MODBUS Control
PID Control
Zero-Servo Control
Zero Speed Control
REVERSE
Reverse Run Disabled
RUNNING
Critical Frequency Rejection
Carrier Frequency
Speed Search
5.6
5.7
5.20
5.28
5.36
5.49
5.50
Table A1-2
5.9
5.8
5.32 D
C8-08
C5-01 thru -04,-06; H1-01 thru -06
d4-01
b1-01,-02; H5-01 thru -04
b1-01; b5-01 thru -08
b2-01; b9-01; H5-01 thru -04
b1-05; E1-09
b1-04
d3-01 thru -04
C6-01,-02,-03
b2-01,-02,-03;
H1-01 thru -06; L2-03,-04
Speed Coincidence
Energy Saving
Slip Compensation
RUNNING IMPROVEMENTS
Torque Compensation
Stall Prevention
Droop
Hunting Prevention
PROTECTIVE FEATURES
Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru
Auto Restart
Frequency Reference Loss Detection
Overtorque Detection
Miscellaneous Protective Functions
DRIVE CONTROLS, INPUT
Multi-function Analog Inputs (Term. 16, 14)
Frequency Reference Bias and Gain
Multi-function Input Terminals (Term. 3-8)
External Fault Terminals
DRIVE OUTPUT
Multi-function Output Terminals (Term. 9 & 10; 25-27)
Analog Monitor Output (Multi-function) (Term. 21-23)
MONITOR DISPLAY
Digital Operator Display Selection
Display – Monitor (at Power-up) Selection
5.33 A
5.16
5.38
5.42
5.39
5.13
5.23
5.29
5.5
5.20
5.42
5.27
5.29
5.17
5.31
5.31
5.32
5.30
5.11
5.12
b8-01,-02; H1-01 thru -06
C3-01 thru -04
C4-01,-02
L3-01 thru -06
b7-01,-02
C7-01,-02
H1-01 thru -06; L2-01,-02
L5-01,-02
L4-05
L6-01 thru -06
L8-01,-02
H3-05,-09
H3-03,-07,-11; H3-02,-06,-10
H1-01 thru -06
H1-01 thru -06
H2-01,-02,-03
H4-01 thru -07
o1-03 o1-02
5-2
5 . 2 A C C E L / D E C E L TIME
A .
C 1 - 0 1 : Accel Time 1 C 1 - 0 6 : Decel Time 3 Factory setting (each): 1 0 . 0
C 1 - 0 2 : Decel Time 1 C 1 - 0 7 : Accel Time 4
Range* (each): 0.0 to 6000.0
C 1 - 0 3 : Accel Time 2 C 1 - 0 8 : Decel Time 4 seconds
C 1 - 0 4 : Decel Time 2 C 1 - 0 9 : Fast Stop
(* Note: see para. 5.2 E)
C 1 - 0 5 : Accel Time 3 Decel Time
The drive incorporates four sets of individually programmable acceleration and deceleration times.
B .
H 1 - 0 1 t h r u H 1 - 0 6 : Multifunction Inputs (Term. 3 thru 8)
Data 7 : Accel/Decel Time Selection 1
Data 1 A : Accel/Decel Time Selection 2
By programming data " 7 " into one of the multi-function parameters ( H 1 - 0 1 thru
H 1 - 0 6 ), the corresponding multi-function input terminal (3 thru 8) becomes the Time Selection 1 input. When the input terminal (i.e. external contact) is open, Time 1 ( C 1 - 0 1 / C 1 - 0 2 ) is selected. When the input terminal is closed,
Time 2 ( C 1 - 0 3 / C 1 - 0 4 ) is selected. By
TIME SELECTION 1 o o o
TIME SELECTION 2 o o o
7
8
11
GPD 515/G5
programming data " 1A " into another of the multi-function parameters, the corresponding multi-function input terminal becomes the Time
Selection 2 input. When the input terminal is
0V open, Time 1 or 2 is selected based on the setting of the Time Selection 1 input. When the input is closed, Time 3 ( C 1 - 0 5 / C 1 - 0 6 ) or Time 4 ( C 1 - 0 7 / C 1 - 0 8 ) is selected based on the status of the Time Selection 1 input.
Accel/Decel
Selection 2
H1-06 = 1A
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Accel/Decel
Selection 1
H1-05 = 07
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Accel Time
C1-01
C1-03
C1-05
C1-07
Decel Time
C1-02
C1-04
C1-06
C1-08
5-3
5 . 2 A C C E L / D E C E L TIME
Continued
B .
(Continued) Data A : Accel/Decel Hold (Speed
HOLD Command)
By programming data " A " into one of the multifunction input parameters ( H 1 - 0 1 thru
H 1 - 0 6 ), one of the multi-function input terminals (3 thru 8) becomes a HOLD command input. As long as the HOLD command is present, accel and decel are in a prohibit state, and the output speed is held at the level it was at the time the HOLD command was input.
When the HOLD command is removed while the system is still in Run condition, accel or decel will again become active to allow output to reach set speed. If Stop is initiated while the HOLD command is present, the prohibit state is cancelled and the system enters stop operation.
FWD RUN
HOLD CMD
SPEED REF.
OUTPUT SPEED
HOLD Function Timing
C .
C 1 - 0 9 : Fast-Stop Decel Time Factory setting: 1 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 6000.0 seconds
H 1 - 0 1 t h r u H 1 - 0 6 : Multi-function Inputs
(Term. 3 thru 8)
Data 1 5 : Fast-Stop
The Fast-Stop Decel Time is used instead of the selected Decel Time ( C 1 - 0 2 , - 0 4 , - 0 6 or - 0 8 ) if:
1 ) It has been selected as the decel time for a specific fault ( H 5 - 0 4 ,
L 8 - 0 3 , etc.), o r
2 ) One of the multi-function inputs has been programmed for Fast-Stop, and the corresponding input is closed.
5-4
5 . 2 A C C E L / D E C E L TIME
Continued
D .
H 3 - 0 5 : Multi-Function Analog
Input (Term. 16)
The multi-function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control or the
Accel/Decel time. The input voltage, in the range of 1 to 10V, determines the coefficient by which the Accel/Decel time is reduced:
Actual Accel/Decel Time =
Accel/Decel Time
Coefficient
Data 5 : Accel/Decel Time
Coefficient
ACCEL/
DECEL
COEFFICIENT
1R
GPD 515/G5
15 +15V
16 0-10V (20K
Ω)
17
C
EXAMPLE:
Accel/Decel Time = 10 sec *
Voltage Ref. at Term. 16 = 5V
Actual Accel/ =
Decel Time
10 sec = 2 sec
5 (coefficient)
* C1-01 or C1-02 setting, or selected accel/decel setting.
10
COEFFICIENT
5
1
0 1 5
VOLTAGE
10
E.
C1-10 : Accel/Decel Time Setting Unit Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 = 0.01 seconds
1 = 0.1 seconds
In addition to determining the setting resolution, this parameter controls the range of
C 1 - 0 1 thru C 1 - 0 9 ; if the resolution is 0.01 sec., the range is 0.000 to 600.00 sec. If the resolution is set to 0.1 sec., the range is 0.0 to 6000.0 sec.
F .
C 1 - 1 1 : Accel/Decel Switching Frequency Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
By using C 1 - 1 1 , the Accel and Decel times can be automatically switched from Time 1 to Time 4. If the output frequency is greater than or equal to the C 1 - 1 1 frequency, the
C 1 - 0 1 and C 1 - 0 2 times are used. If the output frequency is below C 1 - 1 1 , C 1 - 0 7 and C 1 - 0 8 are used instead.
NOTE: If used in conjunction with a multi-function input ( H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 6 set to "A" or "1A"), the multi-function input has priority over the C 1 - 1 1 switching frequency.
5-5
5.3 ACCEL/DECEL: S-CURVE CHARACTERISTICS
C 2 - 0 1 : S-Curve Characteristic Time at Accel Start
C 2 - 0 2 : S-Curve Characteristic Time at Accel End
C 2 - 0 3 : S-Curve Characteristic Time at Decel Start
C 2 - 0 4 : S-Curve Characteristic Time at Decel End
Factory setting (each): 0 . 2 0
Range (each): 0.00 to 2.50
seconds
Setting of these parameters determine the
S-curve (starting and ending) characteristics of the acceleration and deceleration ramp.
Each is set in increments of
0.01 seconds.
NOTE: Actual accel time =
Set accel time +
C 2 - 0 1 + C 2 - 0 2
2
Actual decel time =
Set decel time +
C 2 - 0 3 + C 2 - 0 4
2
RUN
FREQ
COMMAND
0
OUTPUT
FREQUENCY
Accel ramp per selected Accel Time
S-Curve Characteristic
Time (T
SC
)
TIME
The following figure shows FWD/REV switching and acceleration & deceleration to a stop with S-curve active.
FORWARD RUN COMMAND
REVERSE RUN COMMAND
OUTPUT FREQUENCY
ACCELERATION
C2-01
C2-02 C2-03
DC INJECTION
TIME AT STOP
C2-04
DECELERATION
MIN. OUTPUT
FREQUENCY
E1-09
E1-09
C2-01
DECELERATION
b2-03
ACCELERATION
C2-04
= S-CURVE CHARACTERISTIC
C2-02
C2-03
5-6
5 . 4 A C C E S S L E V E L
A .
A 1 - 0 1 : Parameter Access Level Factory setting: 2
Range: 0 to 4
This setting determines which parameters are accessible, which are also dependent upon the setting of the Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 ) .
Setting
0
The default setting is for Quick-start Access Level, which accesses 32 parameters. Basic Access
Level allows access to 90 additional parameters.
1
2
3
Advanced Level accesses all parameters available for a given Control Method setting. The User
4
Program Access Level will only be available if one or more parameters are programmed into A 2 - 0 1 through A 2 - 3 2.
Description
Monitor Only
User Program
Quick-start
Basic
Advanced
See paragraph 4.3 for menu trees for each of the Access Levels, and paragraph 4.5,
Examples 1A and 1B, for programming examples in different Access Levels.
B .
User Program. Parameters A 2 - 0 1 through A 2 - 3 2 can each be set by the user to allow a customized Access Level. The drive must first be temporarily set to Advanced
Access Level ( A 1 - 0 4 = 4); then use the “up arrow”, “down arrow” and “right arrow” keys to set A 2 - 0 1 to the first parameter to which access is desired, A 2 - 0 2 to the next, etc.
Only the parameters entered into A 2 - 0 1 through A 2 - 3 2 will be available for monitoring and modifying if A 1 - 0 1 is then set to "1".
5 . 5 A U T O - R E S T A R T
A .
L 5 - 0 1 : Number of Auto-Restart Attempts Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 10
When a fault occurs during operation, the drive can be programmed for an auto-restart operation to automatically reset the fault. Auto-restart operation will use the number of reset attempts set in this parameter, up to the maximum of 10. When set to " 0 ", no auto-restarts will be attempted.
• The following faults can be automatically reset:
OC: Overcurrent GF: Ground fault
OV: Overvoltage
OL3: Overtorque Detect
UV1: Undervoltage (Power UV)
• The following conditions WILL NOT initiate auto-restart:
1. OL, EF , PUF or CPF fault.
2. When OC or UV occurs during deceleration.
3. When L 2 - 0 1 is programmed to stop during momentary power failure (data =
" 0 "). (See paragraph 5.29, MOMENTARY POWER LOSS RIDE-THRU. )
• The number of restart attempts available will be reset to the L 5 - 0 1 setting when:
1. 10 minutes has elapsed without a fault occurring.
2. The RESET key, or external Fault Reset push button, is pressed.
3. Power is removed from the Drive.
5-7
5 . 5 A U T O - R E S T A R T
Continued
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
This digit controls how the fault contact responds to a drive fault during the auto-restart operation.
0
= Fault contact will not actuate during auto-restart attempts
1
= Fault contact actuates during auto-restart attempts
FAULT DETECTION
FAULT CONTACT
L5-01 = 1
L5-01 = 0
OUTPUT FREQUENCY
Time from fault detection to reset attempt, or time between reset attempts
100 ms
MOTOR RPM
AUTOMATIC FAULT RESET
A u to - R e s t a r t O p e r a t i o n T i m i n g
5 . 6 A U T O M A T I C FREQUENCY REGULATOR ( A F R ) G A I N
C 8 - 0 8 : AFR Gain Factory setting: 1 . 0 0
Range: 0.00 to 10.00
C 8 - 0 9 : AFR Time Factory setting: 5 0
Range: 0 to 1000 msec
Useable only in Open Loop Vector Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 = 2), these parameters affect the speed response or prevent the motor from hunting. To improve the speed response, increase C 8 - 0 8 and/or decrease C 8 - 0 9 . To stop the motor from hunting, decrease
C 8 - 0 8 and/or increase C 8 - 0 9 .
5-8
5 . 7 A U T O M A T I C SPEED REGULATOR (ASR)
A .
C 5 - 0 1 : ASR Proportional Gain 1
(ASRP1)
C 5 - 0 2 : ASR Integral Time 1
(ASRI1)
Factory setting: 2 0 . 0 0
Range: 0.00 to 300.00
Factory setting: 0 . 5 0 0
Range: 0.000 to 10.000 seconds
Parameters C 5 - 0 1 and C 5 - 0 2 provide adjustments to enable the optimum performance during load disturbances. The proportional gain ( C 5 - 0 1 ) adjusts the amount of instantaneous droop as a function of loss, and provides damping from load disturbances such as speed reference change, or a change in load. The integral time (
C 5 - 0 2 ) adjusts the response time of the drive to the load disturbances.
NOTE: Speed control response is increased by increasing the proportional gain setting and decreasing the integral time. However, instability or hunting may occur between the drive and the load if C 5 - 0 1 (ASR Proportional Gain) is set too high, or C 5 - 0 2 (ASR Integral Time) is set too low.
SPEED +
REF.
–
SPEED
FEEDBACK
(INPUT)
ERROR
ASR CIRCUIT
K ( 1 +
1 s T
)
C5-01 C5-02
(OUTPUT)
OUTPUT (TORQUE REF.)
0
INTERNAL
LIMITER
INPUT (ERROR)
TIME
TORQUE
REF.
5-9
5 . 7 A U T O M A T I C SPEED REGULATOR (ASR)
Continued
EXAMPLES OF C5-01 AND C5-02 ADJUSTMENTS
ASR Gain ( C5-01 ) Adjustment Only
Speed Ref. = 10% of max.
C5-01 = 30.00
C5-02 = 0 .000
ASR Integral Time ( C5-02 ) Adjustment Only
Speed Ref. = 10% of max.
C5-01 = 30.00
C5-02 = 10.000
SPEED
10%
6.9%
0%
LOAD
100%
0% t t
SPEED
10%
0%
LOAD
100%
0% t t
Speed Ref. = 10% of max.
C5-01 = 60.00
C5-02 = 0 .000
Speed Ref. = 10% of max.
C5-01 = 30.00
C5-02 = 1.000
SPEED
10%
8.4%
0%
LOAD
100%
0% t t
SPEED
10%
0%
LOAD
100%
0% t t
5-10
5 . 7 A U T O M A T I C SPEED REGULATOR (ASR)
Continued
B .
C 5 - 0 3 : ASR Proportional Gain 2
(ASRP2)
C 5 - 0 4 : ASR Integral Time 2
(ASRI2)
Factory setting: 2 0 . 0 0
Range: 0.00 to 300.00
Factory setting: 0 . 5 0 0
Range: 0.000 to 10.000 seconds
Parameter C 5 - 0 3 is used as an additional proportional gain adjustment, and parameter
C 5 - 0 4 determines the response time for Proportional Gain 2 ( C 5 - 0 3 ) .
GAIN
C5-03
C5-01
0
C5-07
SPEED
C .
H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 6: Multi-function
Input Terminal Function
Selection (Term. 3 thru 8)
By programming data " E " into one of the multi-function input parameters ( H 1 - 0 1 thru
H 1 - 0 6 ), one of the multi-function input terminals
(3 thru 8) becomes an ASR integral reset. When there is a long time lag between the applying of control power and actual run operation, output voltage may be produced due to the integrator offset. In such cases, the integral reset function should be ON until the start of run operation.
Data E: ASR Integral Reset (IRST)
ASR
I-RESET o o 8
11
GPD 515/G5
0V
D .
C 5 - 0 6 : ASR Output Lag Time Factory setting: 4
Range: 0 to 500 msec
This function is used as a filter for mechanical problems such as mechanical backlash, play, etc., which may prevent the ASR proportional gain from being increased as adjusted.
5-11
5.8 CARRIER FREQUENCY
C 6 - 0 1 : Carrier Frequency Upper Limit
C 6 - 0 2 : Carrier Frequency Lower Limit
C 6 - 0 3 : Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain
Factory Setting: See Table A3-1
Range (each): 0.4 to 15.0 kHz
Factory Setting: See Table A1-3
Range: 0 to 99
The relationship between output frequency and carrier frequency is determined from the set values of C 6 - 0 1 t o C 6 - 0 3 .
( a ) For constant carrier frequency (set value of C 6 - 0 1 ) :
Set C 6 - 0 3 = 0 , and set the same value in both C 6 - 0 1 and C 6 - 0 2 .
( b ) For synchronous mode (only with proportional section):
Set C 6 - 0 3 = 12, 24, 36, or 48. These setting values establish carrier frequencies of 12f, 24f, 36f, or 48f, respectively, where f = output frequency.
( c ) In Vector Control mode, ONLY C 6 - 0 1 is effective.
CARRIER FREQUENCY UPPER LIMIT
C6-01
≥ 10.0 kHz
10.0 kHz > C6-01
≥ 5.0 kHz
C6-01 < 5.0 kHz
K
3
2
1
CARRIER
FREQUENCY
C6-01
C6-02
0
Fout x C6-03 x K
OUTPUT FREQUENCY
NOTE: Fault code " o P E 1 1 " is displayed if either of the following conditions is detected:
1. C 6 - 0 3 > 6, and C 6 - 0 2 > C 6 - 0 1
2. C 6 - 0 1 > 5.0 kHz, and C 6 - 0 2
≤ 5.0 kHz
5-12
5 . 9 C R I T I C A L FREQUENCY REJECTION
A .
d 3 - 0 1 : Prohibited Frequency 1
d 3 - 0 2 : Prohibited Frequency 2
d 3 - 0 3 : Prohibited Frequency 3
Factory setting (each): 0 . 0
Range (each): 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
These parameters allow programming of up to three prohibited frequency points for eliminating problems with resonant vibration of the motor/machine. This feature does not actually eliminate the selected frequency values, but will accelerate and decelerate the motor through the prohibited bandwidth.
B .
d 3 - 0 4 : Prohibited Frequency Deadband Factory setting: 1 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 20.0 Hz
This parameter determines the width of the deadband around each selected prohibited frequency point. The factory setting is " 1.0 ", which establishes a deadband of ± 1.0 Hz.
EXAMPLE:
Vibration encountered between 30.0 and 36.0 Hz.
SOLUTION: Set d3-01 = 33.0. This is the center of the problem frequency band.
Set d3-04 = 3.0. This will cause the drive to reject all frequency command values between 30.0 and 36.0 Hz.
A frequency command in the deadband will be converted to the bottom value of the deadband, e.g. a command of 33 Hz would result in a run frequency of 30 Hz.
Total Deadband = 6.0 Hz
FREQ. CMD
36 Hz
d3-01 = 33 Hz
30 Hz
0
± d3-04 (3.0 Hz)
OUTPUT FREQUENCY (Hz)
5-13
5.10 DC INJECTION BRAKING
A .
b 1 - 0 3 : Motor Stopping Method Selection
b 2 - 0 4 : DC Injection Time at Stop
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 3
Factory setting: 0 . 5 0
Range: 0.00 to 10.00 seconds
When full range DC injection braking stop is enabled ( b 1 - 0 3 = 2), DC injection braking is used to stop a motor more quickly than normal coast to stop, without the need for braking resistors. When a STOP command is issued, there is a 0.5 second time delay to apply DC to two phases of the motor’s stator winding. Then DC injection current is applied. The duration of DC braking is a time period proportional to b 2 - 0 4 ( a t 1 0 % output frequency) and the level of output frequency at the time the STOP command is issued.
Braking torque is 50-70% of full load motor torque.
EXAMPLE:
b 2 - 0 4 = 0.5 sec (at 10% output)
Braking time at Fmax (100% output frequency) = 10 x 0.5 = 5 seconds
STOP
RUN CMD
OUTPUT
FREQUENCY
0.5 sec
COASTING
DC BRAKING TIME
b2-04 x 10
DC
INJECTION
BRAKING
TIME
b2-04
0 10% 100%
OUTPUT FREQUENCY
AT TIME OF STOP COMMAND
Full Range DC Injection Braking Stop Sequence
5-14
5.10 DC INJECTION BRAKING
Continued
B . b 2 - 0 1 : DC Inj. Braking Start Frequency
b 2 - 0 2 : DC Injection Braking Current
(% of Drive Rated Current)
Factory Setting: 0 . 5
Range: 0.1 to 10.0 Hz
Factory setting: 5 0
Range: 0 to 100 %
b 2 - 0 3 : DC Injection Time at Start Factory setting: 0 . 0 0
Range: 0.00 to 10.00 seconds
b 2 - 0 4 : DC Injection Time at Stop Factory setting: 0 . 0 0
Range: 0.00 to 10.00 seconds
DC injection can be used to stop a motor whose rotational direction is uncertain at start-up.
For this operation, application of DC injection braking current is controlled by a multifunction input (see paragraph 5.8.D).
With ramp to stop enabled ( b 1 - 0 3 = 0 ), after a STOP command is received the drive controls motor deceleration according to the Decel Time setting, until output frequency reaches the DC Injection Braking Start Frequency ( b 2 - 0 1 setting). Then the drive output is turned off and DC injection current is applied to the motor. The effective DC injection time and current should be set to provide adequate stopping without excessive motor heating. The DC injection voltage is determined by the DC injection braking current and motor impedance.
STOP
RUN COMMAND
RAMP TO STOP
OUTPUT FREQUENCY
DC INJECTION TIME AT
START ( b2-03 )
DC
DC INJ. BRK. START
FREQUENCY ( b2-01 )
DC INJECTION TIME AT
STOP ( b2-04 )
DC Braking Sequence
DC
b 2 - 0 8 : Field Compensation
At Start
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 500%
This parameter adjusts the amount of motor current during DC Injection at start. A setting of 0% disables this feature. A setting of 100% equals motor no-load current (E 2 - 0 3). This current level will be applied until the DC Injection Time at Start (b 2 - 0 3) expires. This parameter is useful when starting motors that are relatively higher in horsepower than the drive, due to the requirement for increased magnetizing current. This parameter may also compensate for reduced starting torque due to motor circuit inefficiencies.
5-15
5.10 DC INJECTION BRAKING
C . H 3 - 0 5 : Multi-function Analog Input
(Term. 16)
Continued
Data 6 : DC Injection Braking Current
Adjust
The multi-function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of the amount of DC injection braking current (from 0% to 100% of the current level set in
b 2 - 0 2 ), which directly controls the amount of DC injection voltage applied to the motor.
BRAKING
CURRENT
ADJUST
1R
GPD 515/G5
15 +15V
16 0-10V (20K
Ω)
17
C
BRAKING
CURRENT
(%)
( b2-02 )
100
0
ANALOG VOLTAGE
10
D .
H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 6 : Multi-function Inputs Data 6 0 : DC Injection Braking
(Term. 3 thru 8) Command
Any multi-function input terminal can be utilized to control DC injection braking. When used, DC injection current will be applied until the input is removed, provided that the drive output frequency is below the DC Braking Start
Frequency ( b 2 - 0 1 ) .
o o o
GPD 515/G5
8 DC INJ. BRK.
COMMAND
11
0V
EXAMPLE:
H 1 - 0 6 = 6 0
Contact input at Terminal 8 is the DC Injection Braking Command
STOP
RUN COMMAND
DC INJECTION
BRAKING COMMAND
RAMP TO STOP
OUTPUT FREQUENCY
DC
DC INJ. BRK. START
FREQUENCY ( b2-01 )
DC
DC Braking Sequence
5-16
5 . 1 1 D I G I T A L OPERATOR DISPLAY SELECTION
o 1 - 0 3 : Display Scaling Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 39999
This parameter determines the scaling of the Digital Operator display, for both Output
Frequency and all Frequency References.
0
(factory setting)
1
2
t o 3 9
(no. of motor poles)
0 0 0 4 0
t o
3 9 9 9 9
Output frequency, in increments of 0.01 Hz.
Output frequency, in increments of 0.01 %.
Motor synchronous speed (P = ) in increments of 1 RPM *
Ns
(39999 max).
P = no. of motor poles
F = Frequency
Ns = motor synchronous speed
NOTE: If motor synchronous speed exceeds
39999 RPM, display holds at " 3 9 9 9 9 " .
Line speed or other parameter. Setting must be
5 digits.
X X X X X
Display value at maximum frequency ( E 1 - 0 4 )(include leading zeroes if necessary)
Location of decimal point:
0 = X X X X
1 = X X X . X
2 = X X . X X
3 = X . X X X
(See CAUTION on next page)
EXAMPLE:
To display Line Speed, based on
54.32 FPM at 60 Hz:
o1-03 setting = 2 5 4 3 2
* Ineffective when in Flux Vector Control mode.
5-17
5 . 1 1 D I G I T A L OPERATOR DISPLAY SELECTION
Continued
Exceptions to the general format are as follows:
o 1 - 0 3
DISPLAY
" 1 0 0 0 0 " =
1 0 0 0 . 0
" 2 0 0 0 0 " =
1 0 0 . 0 0
" 3 0 0 0 0 " =
1 0 . 0 0 0
CAUTION
When setting a value in o1-03, the decimal point position selected will automatically affect all of the Frequency Reference
Memory Settings ( d1-01 thru d1-09; see Table A1-4).
EXAMPLE:
o 1 - 0 3 factory setting: 0 0 0 0 0
d 1 - 0 9 (Jog) factory setting: 0 0 6 . 00 (6 Hz)
o 1 - 0 3 changed to 1 0 6 0 0
Decimal point at X X X.X
d 1 - 0 9 setting becomes 0 0 6 0 . 0
Therefore, for 10.00 Hz Jog frequency, d 1 - 0 9 must be reprogrammed to " 0 0 1 . 0 0 " .
o 1 - 0 4 : Digital Operator Display Units
This parameter sets the frequency units for Flux
Vector mode.
The setting of o 1 - 0 4 affects the following parameters:
E 1 - 0 4 : Maximum Frequency
E 1 - 0 6 : Base Frequency
E 1 - 0 7 : Mid Frequency A
E 1 - 0 9 : Minimum Frequency
E 1 - 1 1 : Mid Frequency B
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
Setting
0
1
Description
Hertz
RPM
o 1 - 0 5 : Parameter/Address Display Selection
This parameter selects whether the parameter addresses are displayed on the Digital Operator by parameter number, or by its corresponding
MODBUS address number.
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
Setting
0
1
Description
Parameter Number
MODBUS Address
5-18
5 . 1 2 D I S P L A Y – MONITOR ( A T POWER-UP) SELECTION
o 1 - 0 2 : Monitor Selection After Power-up
Factory setting: 1
Range: 1 to 4
This parameter determines which monitor display will appear on the Digital Operator when the drive is powered up. The number programmed into o 1 - 0 2 corresponds to the appropriate U 1 - X X parameter, which determines monitor status.
o 1 - 0 2
SETTING
3
4
1
2
MONITOR SELECTION
U 1 - 0 1 — Frequency Reference
U 1 - 0 2 — Output Frequency
U 1 - 0 3 — Output Current
U 1 - X X — Monitor parameter selected by o 1 - 0 1
o 1 - 0 1 : Monitor Selection Factory setting: 6
Range: 4 to 38
This setting allows the user to select an item to be displayed in the monitored parameters list. The o 1 - 0 1 parameter corresponds to the o 1 - 0 2 setting "4 - Selected Monitor".
For example, to display DC bus voltage in the monitored parameters list, set parameter
o 1 - 0 1 to "7" for monitor selection U 1 - 0 7 .
5 . 1 3 D R O O P
b 7 - 0 1 : Droop Control Gain Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
When active, the speed decreases or increases in proportion to load torque. As the load increases, the speed droops according to the percentage set in b 7 - 0 1 . As the load decreases, the speed increases.
Maximum droop is reached at full load. Maximum speed is based on the maximum output frequency setting ( E 1 - 0 4 ). Excessive droop, which results in a significant difference between the speed reference and the speed feedback, may activate a Speed Deviation
( D E V ) fault. The deviation detection level is an adjustable value, which can be set in parameter F 1 - 1 0 .
b 7 - 0 2 : Droop Control Delay Time Factory setting: 0 . 0 5
Range: 0.03 to 2.00 seconds
The setting of this parameter determines the drive’s droop response time to a load change.
NOTE
Only available in the Flux Vector Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 = 3 ) .
5-19
5 . 1 4 D W E L L
b 6 - 0 1 : Dwell Frequency at Start
b 6 - 0 2 : Dwell Time at Start
b 6 - 0 3 : Dwell Frequency at Stop
Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 seconds
Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
b 6 - 0 4 : Dwell Time at Stop Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 seconds
This function allows the drive to temporarily suspend acceleration or deceleration and remain at a desired output frequency for a specified length of time.
After receiving a run command, the drive accelerates to the designated dwell start frequency ( b 6 - 0 1 ). The output is then held at that frequency for the duration of the dwell time at start ( b 6 - 0 2 ). After that length of time the drive continues to accelerate to the set frequency.
When the run command is removed the drive decelerates to the designated dwell stop frequency ( b 6 - 0 3 ). The output is then held at that frequency for the duration of the dwell time at stop ( b 6 - 0 4 ). After that length of time the drive continues to decelerate until the output frequency is zero.
RUN
SET FREQUENCY
OUTPUT
FREQ.
b 6 - 0 2 b 6 - 0 1 b 6 - 0 3 b 6 - 0 4
t
5-20
5.15 ENCODER (PG) PARAMETERS
A .
F 1 - 0 1 : Encoder (PG) Constant Factory setting: 1 0 2 4
Range: 0 to 60000 ppr
This parameter is set to the Pulses Per Revolution (ppr) to the encoder used with the motor.
B .
F 1 - 0 2 : Operation Selection at PG
Open Circuit
Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
2 : Fast-stop
3 : Alarm Only
F 1 - 1 4 : PG Open Circuit Detection
Delay Time
Factory setting: 2 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 seconds
The setting of F 1 - 0 2 determines the stopping method when a PG Open Circuit ( PGo ) is detected. A PG open circuit is detected when no pulses are received from the pulse generator within the time specified by F 1 - 1 4 . (Note: The PG Open fault is disabled when zero speed is commanded.)
NOTE
Only available in the V/f w/PG and the Flux Vector Control Methods
( A 1 - 0 2 = 1 or 3).
5-21
5.15 ENCODER (PG) PARAMETERS
Continued
C .
F 1 - 0 8 : Overspeed Detection Level
F 1 - 0 9 : Overspeed Detection Delay Time
Factory setting: 1 1 5
Range: 0 to 120 %
Factory setting: See Table A3-2
Range: 0.0 to 2.0 seconds
F 1 - 0 3 : Operation Selection at
Overspeed
Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
2 : Fast-stop
3 : Alarm Only
Parameters F 1 - 0 8 and F 1 - 0 9 work together to determine when an overspeed ( o S ) fault will occur. Parameter F 1 - 0 8 sets the desired overspeed level as a percentage of the maximum output frequency ( E 1 - 0 4 ), and F 1 - 0 9 determines how long the overspeed condition will be allowed to exist before a fault will occur. Parameter F 1 - 0 3 determines the stopping method when an overspeed fault ( o S ) occurs.
EXAMPLE:
A given application requires that if motor speed were to ever reach 1980 RPM, an overspeed fault would occur and the motor should coast to stop. The motor has 4 poles, and maximum frequency ( E 1 - 0 4 ) = 60Hz.
( E 2 - 0 4 )
F 1 - 0 8 =
Desired Overspeed Level x Number of Motor Poles
120 x Maximum Frequency
( E 1 - 0 4 ) x 100%
F 1 - 0 8 =
1980 x 4
120 x 60 x 100% = 1 1 0 %
F 1 - 0 3 = 1 Coast to Stop
NOTE
Only available in the V/f w/PG and Flux Vector Control Methods
( A 1 - 0 2 = 1 or 3).
5-22
5.15 ENCODER (PG) PARAMETERS
Continued
D .
F 1 - 1 0 : Excessive Speed Deviation
Detection Level
F 1 - 1 1 : Excessive Speed Deviation
Detection Delay Time
Factory setting: 1 0
Range: 0 to 50 %
Factory setting: 0 . 5
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 seconds
F 1 - 0 4 : Operation Selection at
Speed Deviation
Factory setting: 3
Range: 0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
2 : Fast-stop
3 : Alarm Only
Parameters F 1 - 1 0 and F 1 - 1 1 work together to determine when a Speed Deviation
( D E V ) fault will occur. Parameter F 1 - 1 0 determines how far the motor speed has to differ from the speed reference (set as a percentage of E 1 - 0 4 ), and F 1 - 1 1 determines how long the speed has to deviate before a fault will occur. Use F 1 - 0 4 to determine stopping method if a speed deviation fault occurs.
EXAMPLE:
F 1 - 1 0 = 1 0 %, F 1 - 1 1 = 0 . 5 sec, F 1 - 0 4 = 1 , and E 1 - 0 4 (Max
Frequency) = 6 0 Hz. As can be seen below, the motor speed must drop over 10% below the speed reference for 0.5 seconds before a fault occurs.
10% speed = E 1 - 0 4 x 0.1 = 60 x 0.1 = 6Hz
NOTE
Only available in the V/f w/PG and Flux Vector Control Methods
( A 1 - 0 2 = 1 or 3).
5-23
5.15 ENCODER (PG) PARAMETERS
Continued
E .
F 1 - 0 5 : PG Rotation Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 : Counter-clockwise
1 : Clockwise
The setting of F 1 - 0 5 determines how the drive interprets the incoming pulses from the pulse generator. It can be used to change direction of the motor without having to change encoder wiring.
EXAMPLE:
To run a particular machine “forward” requires the motor shaft to turn in a clockwise direction when viewed from the output shaft end of the motor.
The motor/encoder that is installed is running counter-clockwise as forward. in order to change the direction of the motor, two of the motor leads need to be swapped, and F 1 - 0 5 needs to be changed to a 1 .
NOTE
Only available in the V/f w/PG and Flux Vector control modes
( A 1 - 0 2 = 1 or 3).
F .
F 1 - 0 7 : Integral Value During Accel/Decel
Selection
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
The setting of F 1 - 0 7 determines whether the automatic speed regulator (ASR) integral operation is performed during accel/decel.
NOTE
Only available in the V/f w/PG Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 = 1 ) .
5-24
5.15 ENCODER (PG) PARAMETERS
Continued
G .
F 1 - 1 2 : Number of PG Gear Teeth 1
F 1 - 1 3 : Number of PG Gear Teeth 2
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 1000
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 1000
Parameters F 1 - 1 2 and F 1 - 1 3 are used to set the gear ration when there is a gear ratio between the motor and the pulse generator. This function is disabled when F 1 - 1 2 and F 1 - 1 3 are set to 0 .
Motor Speed (RPM) = Load Speed (RPM) x
( F 1 - 1 3 )
PG Gear Teeth 2
PG Gear Teeth 1
( F 1 - 1 2 )
EXAMPLE:
A motor is connected to a load through a toothed timing belt. The sheave on the motor has 23 teeth, and the sheave on the load had 75 teeth. The only mechanically practical place to mount a pulse generator for speed feedback is on the same shaft as the load sheave. In order to correctly scale the encoder feedback, F 1 - 1 2 needs to be set to 2 3 , and F 1 - 1 3 needs to be set to 7 5 .
NOTE
Only available in the V/f w/PG Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 = 1 ) .
5-25
5 . 1 6 E N E R G Y SAVING OPERATION
A . E n e r g y S a v i n g V / f C o n t r o l M e t h o d s
b 8 - 0 1 : Energy Saving Gain
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 100 %
This parameter is only available in the V/f or V/f w/PG Control Methods (A 1 - 0 2 = 0 or 1).
This parameter sets, in increments of 1%, the level to which the output voltage is reduced during the energy-saving operation.
V/f
CONVERSION
TORQUE
COMPENSATION
O O
O
VOLTAGE COMMAND
CLOSE AT
SET FREQUENCY
AND ENERGY-SAVING
ENABLED
ENERGY-
SAVING GAIN
O u t p u t V o l t a g e D u r i n g E n e r g y - S a v i n g O p e r a t i o n
b 8 - 0 2 : Energy Saving Frequency Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0 to 400 Hz
This parameter is only available in the V/f or V/f w/PG control methods (A 1 - 0 2 = 0 or 1).
The energy saving function will only activate if all of the following conditions are met: a multi-function input is activated which is set to energy savings (data 6 3), output frequency is above the Energy Saving Frequency b 8 - 0 2, and the drive is up to its set speed (output frequency = frequency reference).
B . E n e r g y S a v i n g – O p e n L o o p V e c t o r &
F l u x V e c t o r C o n t r o l M e t h o d s
b 8 - 0 3 : Automatic Energy Saving Selection
S e t t i n g
0
1
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
Description
Disabled – Energy saving mode will not be activated under light loads.
Enabled – The energy saving mode will automatically be activated under light loads.
This parameter is only available when in the open loop vector or flux vector control methods
( A 1 - 0 2 = 2 or 3). When b 8 - 0 3 is set to a 1, a multi-function contact input is n o t required to activate energy saving mode. This function is separate and should not be confused with parameters b 8 - 0 1 and b 8 - 0 2. When the drive detects a lightly loaded motor, the output voltage will automatically be reduced.
5-26
5 . 1 6 E N E R G Y SAVING OPERATION
Continued
b 8 - 0 4 : Automatic Energy Saving
Control Gain
Factory setting: 0 . 7 *
Range: 0.0 to 10.0
*Factory setting becomes 1 . 0 when A 1 - 0 2 = 3
b 8 - 0 5 : Automatic Energy Saving
Control Time Constant
Factory setting: 0 . 5 0 * *
Range: 0.00 to 10.0 sec.
**Factory setting becomes 0 . 0 1 when A 1 - 0 2 = 3
These parameters are only available when in the open loop vector or flux vector control methods (A 1 - 0 2 = 2 or 3). Parameters b 8 - 0 4 and b 8 - 0 5 adjust the energy savings voltage regulator. Increasing the gain (b 8 - 0 4) and/or decreasing the time constant (b 8 -
0 5) will increase the responsiveness of the energy savings function. If the response is set too fast, the drive may become unstable. If the response is set too slow, the drive may respond incorrectly when the motor load is re-applied.
H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 6 : Multi-function
Inputs (Term. 3 thru 8)
A multi-function input must be used to command energy saving operation.
When the external Energy-Saving Operation command is closed at set frequency, the energysaving operation shown below is enabled. In the energy saving operation, the output voltage is the value of the energy saving gain ( b 8 - 0 1; factory set to 80%) multiplied by the V constants defined by E 1 - 0 5, - 0 8 and - 1 0 .
NOTE
If energy saving operation is enabled before accel time is complete, output V/Hz is not affected until set frequency is reached; then output voltage is reduced by energy-saving gain ( b 8 - 0 1 ) setting.
Data 6 3 : Energy Saving
Operation
EXTERNAL
CONTACTS
GPD 515/G5
3 H1-01
4 H1-02 MULTI-
> FUNCTION
5 H1-03 INPUT
6 H1-04
7 H1-05
8 H1-06
11
0V
RUN COMMAND
ENERGY-SAVING COMMAND
L2-04
V (of E1-05, -08 & -10 ) x
Energy-Saving Gain ( b8-01 )
OUTPUT VOLTAGE
Energy-Saving Run Timing
5-27
5.17 EXTERNAL FAULT INPUTS
H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 6 : Multi-function
Inputs (Term. 3 thru 8)
Data 2 0 - 2 F : External Fault
The multi-function input terminals can be used to define various modes of external faults.
When the External Faults 1-4 are inputted, " E F 3 " t o " E F 8 " are displayed on the Digital
Operator (steady for a major fault situation, blinking for a minor fault situation). The second digit of the H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 6 setting is entered in hexadecimal values which defines what type of external fault contact is used and how the drive will react to the fault input.
H1-0X Mode (Note 2)
Data:
2 __ 0 1 2 3
0
1
2
3
4
(Factory Set)
5
6
7
C
D
E
F
8
9
A
B
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Always During
Detected Operation
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
NOTES
1 .
N.O. = normally open contact; N.C. = normally closed contact.
2 .
Mode 0 = Ramp to Stop (decel time per C 1 - 0 2 ) ;
Mode 1 = Coast Stop;
Mode 2 = Emergency Stop (decel time per C 1 - 0 9 ) ;
Mode 3 = Continuous operation (minor fault).
Terminal
Input (Note 1)
N.O. N.C.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
EXAMPLE:
To program External Fault 3 (Terminal 3) for a N.C. contact, always detected, and drive to continue operation:
H 1 - 0 1 = 2D
EXTERNAL
FAULT
CONTACT
3
11
GPD 515
0V
5-28
5.18 FREQUENCY REFERENCE B I A S / G A I N
H 3 - 0 2 : Frequency Reference Gain (Term. 13) Factory setting (each): 1 0 0 . 0
H 3 - 0 6 : Frequency Reference Gain (Term. 16) Range (each): 0.0 to 1000.0 %
H 3 - 1 0 : Frequency Reference Gain (Term. 14)
These parameters can be used to set the frequency command gain, in increments of 0.1%, for its respective terminal.
H 3 - 0 3 : Frequency Reference Bias (Term. 13) Factory setting (each): 0 . 0
H 3 - 0 7 : Frequency Reference Bias (Term. 16) Range (each): –100.0 to 100.0 %
H 3 - 1 1 : Frequency Reference Bias (Term. 14)
These parameters can be used to set the frequency command bias, in increments of 0.1%, for its respective terminal.
NOTE: If H 3 - 0 9 = 1F, H 3 - 1 0 and H 3 - 1 1 have no effect. Gain and bias for terminal 14 are set by H 3 - 0 2 and H 3 - 0 3 , respectively.
–10V
100%
FREQ.
REF.
(%)
BIAS
(+)
0%
0V FREQ. REF.
INPUT (V)
(–)
10V
–100%
BIAS
90
100
110
–10V
100%
FREQ.
REF.
(%)
0%
0V
FREQ. REF.
INPUT (V)
10V
110
100
90
(+)
GAIN
(–)
–100%
GAIN
A DJUSTMENT PROCEDURE:
A.
B.
For 0-10 Vdc input (term. 13 or 16)
1 .
2 .
With no input, adjust Bias ( H 3 - 0 3 or H 3 - 0 7 setting) until an output of 0.0 Hz is obtained.
With full scale input, adjust Gain ( H 3 - 0 2 or H 3 - 0 6 setting) until an output of 60.0 Hz (or other desired max. output frequency) is obtained.
For 4-20mA input (term. 14)
1 .
2 .
With 4mA input, adjust Bias ( H 3 - 1 1 setting) until an output of 0.0 Hz is obtained.
With 20mA input, adjust Gain ( H 3 - 1 0 setting) until an output of
60.0 Hz (or other desired max. output frequency) is obtained.
NOTE
Follow the same adjustment procedure for other desired frequency setpoints.
5-29
5.18 FREQUENCY REFERENCE BIAS/GAIN
A DJUSTMENT PROCEDURE (c o n t i n u e d) :
Continued
C.
For inverse-acting frequency reference
1 .
2 .
Begin with H 3 - 0 2 & H 3 - 0 3 settings as shown below.
Fine tune as indicated in A or B above.
Frequency reference inputs: terminals 13 & 17 — 0-10 VDC terminals 14 & 17 — 4-20 mA
FREQUENCY
REFERENCE
GPD 515/G5
13 0-10V (20K
Ω)
14 4-20 mA (250
Ω)
17
C
H3-02 H3-03
= 100.0 0.0
= 0.0 100.0
FREQ
REF.
100%
0%
0V 10V
INPUT VOLTAGE (TERM. 13)
H3-02 H3-03
= 100.0 0.0
= 0.0 100.0
FREQ
REF.
100%
0%
4mA 20mA
INPUT CURRENT (TERM. 14)
5-30
5.19 FREQUENCY REFERENCE INPUT SIGNALS (AUTO/MANUAL)
H 3 - 0 1 : Auto Speed Reference Signal
Level Selection (Term. 13)
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
To change the control circuit terminal 13 input level, program H 3 - 0 1 .
Setting
0
1
Terminal 13 Input Level
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
H 3 - 0 4 : Multi-function Analog Input 1 Signal
Level Selection (Term. 16)
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
To change the control circuit terminal 16 input level, program H 3 - 0 4 .
Setting
0
1
Terminal 16 Input Level
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
H 3 - 0 8 : Multi-function Analog Input 2 Signal
Level Selection (Term. 14)
Factory setting: 2
Range: 0 to 2
To change the control circuit terminal 14 input level, program H 3 - 0 8 .
Setting
0
1
2
Terminal 14 Input Level
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
IMPORTANT
In addition to setting parameter H 3 - 0 8 = 0 or 1 for a voltage input, jumper J1 on the drive’s Control PCB must be cut.
Examples of wiring the drive for frequency references from various sources are shown on the next page.
NOTE
If parameter H 3 - 0 9 = 1F terminals 13 and 14 are added and used as the internal frequency reference.
5-31
5.19 FREQUENCY REFERENCE INPUT SIGNALS (AUTO/MANUAL)
Continued
A. Speed pot or 0-10VDC signal only: b1-01 = 1
H3-01 = 0
H3-04 = 0
H3-08 = 2
15
GPD515/G5
+15V
13
AUTO REF.
0-10VDC
—
17 0V
0-10VDC
+
B. 4-20mA signal only: b1-01 = 1
H3-01 = 0
H3-04 = 0
H3-08 = 2
15
GPD515/G5
+15V
+
14
AUTO REF.
4-20mA
4-20mA DC
—
17 0V
C. 0-10VDC signal (auto) and speed pot (manual):
0-10VDC
+
—
15
16
13
GPD515/G5
5V
AUTO/
MAN
MANUAL REF.
0-10VDC
COM
5
11
AUTO REF.
0-10VDC
AUTO
MANUAL
17
0V b1-01 = 1
H3-01 = 0
H3-04 = 0
H3-08 = 2
H1-03 = 3
For a bidirectional speed pot, set H 3 - 0 4 = 1 and connect the low side to terminal 33 instead of terminal 17.
D. 4-20mA DC signal (auto) and 0-10VDC signal or speed pot (manual):
15
16
GPD515/G5
+15V
AUTO/
MAN
5
MANUAL REF.
0-10VDC
COM
11
AUTO
MANUAL b1-01 = 1
H3-01 = 0
H3-04 = 0
H3-08 = 2
H1-03 = 3
+
0-10VDC
—
4-20mA DC
+
17
0V
14
AUTO REF.
For a –10 to +10V input instead of 0-10V at terminal 13, set H 3 - 0 1 = 1 .
5-32
5.20 FREQUENCY REFERENCE LOSS DETECTION
L 4 - 0 5 : Frequency Reference Loss Detection Factory setting: 0 (disabled)
Range: 0 or 1
The reference loss detection function is either enabled or disabled, based on the setting o f L 4 - 0 5 . When enabled (data " 1 "), the reference loss detection compares the change in reference with respect to time. If the reference decreases by 90% in more than 0.4
seconds, the drive will decelerate to the set reference; if the reference decreases by 90% in less than 0.4 seconds, the drive will continue to operate at 80% of the output frequency. To regain control of output frequency, either exceed the set reference (80% of reference) or initiate a STOP command. If Auto Reference is less than Fmax ( E 1 - 0 4 ) x .05, this function is not performed.
FWD RUN
COMMAND
80%
REF
AUTO
REFERENCE
10%
0.4 SEC 0.4 SEC drive
OUTPUT
FREQUENCY
80%
FREQ.
T i m i n g C h a r t
Note: This function applies only to frequency references at terminal 13 or 14. Frequency reference loss detection does not function at terminal 16.
5.21 FREQUENCY REFERENCE RETENTION
d 4 - 0 1 : Frequency Reference Retention Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
This parameter can be used to retain the held frequency reference in U 1 - 0 1 when power is removed. Set d 4 - 0 1 = 1 if this is desired when using Up/Down or Sample/Hold commands as a multi-function contact input.
Setting
0
1
Description
Not retained
Held reference retained in Frequency
Reference 1 ( U1-01 )
5-33
5.22 FREQUENCY REFERENCE UPPER & LOWER LIMITS
d 2 - 0 1 : Frequency Reference Upper Limit
d 2 - 0 2 : Frequency Reference Lower Limit
Factory setting: 1 0 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 110.0 %
Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 109.0 %
These two parameters set the range for the frequency command signal. Each is set, in increments of 0.1%, as a percentage of maximum frequency (Fmax; E 1 - 0 4 ) as established by either the selected standard V/f pattern or custom V/f pattern.
NOTE: All references are affected by the upper and lower limit points.
EXAMPLE:
E1-04 = " 60 " Hz (100%)
d2-01 = " 80.0 " % = 48Hz – Max. speed
d2-02 = " 10.0 " % = 6Hz – Min. speed
1 0 0 %
OUTPUT
FREQ.
( % )
d 2 - 0 1 8 0 . 0 %
d 2 - 0 2 1 0 . 0 %
2.5% t
5-34
5 . 2 3 H U N T I N G PREVENTION
C 7 - 0 1 : Hunt Prevent Selection Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 or 1
Hunting often occurs following a load change, but may also occur when the motor is in the process of settling to a steady operating frequency. Setting C 7 - 0 1 = 1 enables the anti-hunt feature, which will reduce or suppress oscillation.
Setting
0
1
Disabled
Enabled
Description
C 7 - 0 2 : Hunt Prevent Gain Factory setting: 1 . 0 0
Range: 0.00 to 2.50
This parameter adjusts the hunt prevent gain. It should be decreased for a vibrating condition under heavy loads, and increased for hunting under light loads.
NOTE
This function is only available in the Volts/Hertz Control Method, both with and without PG feedback ( A 1 - 0 2 = 0 or 1).
5-35
5 . 2 4 J O G REFERENCE
d 1 - 0 9 : Jog Reference Factory setting: 6 . 0 0
Range: 0.00 to 400.00 Hz
When jog operation is selected (either by the Digital Operator JOG key, or by external Jog and Run signals), the drive output will ramp to the output level set by this parameter.
When the Digital Operator is used, Jog can only be initiated from the stopped condition.
When the drive is running, the JOG key will have no effect on drive output.
When an external Jog signal is present, it will override the existing operation mode and the drive will ramp to the level set by this parameter.
EXAMPLES:
OPERATION FROM DIGITAL OPERATOR
Press and
Hold JOG
Release
JOG
FREQ. CMD
d1-09 JOG
REF.
0
Press
RUN
Press and
Hold JOG
Release
JOG
Press
STOP
FREQ. CMD
d1-09 JOG
REF.
0
5-36
5 . 2 4 J O G REFERENCE
Continued
EXAMPLES:
OPERATION BY REMOTE SIGNAL INPUT (RUN & JOG1)
RUN
*
JOG1
FREQ. CMD
d1-09 JOG
REF.
0
RUN
*
JOG1
FREQ. CMD
d1-09 JOG
REF.
0
*
Or FWD
JOG2 — 2-WIRE CONFIGURATION
b 1 - 0 2 =1 (Remote Control)
FWD
COMMAND
(EXTERNAL)
JOG2
(FWD OR REV)
FREQ. CMD
d1-09 JOG
REF.
0
5-37
5 . 2 4 J O G REFERENCE
Continued
EXAMPLES:
JOG2 — 3-WIRE CONFIGURATION
b 1 - 0 2 = 1 (Remote Control)
RUN
*
COMMAND
(EXTERNAL)
JOG2
(FWD OR REV)
FREQ. CMD
**
d1-09 JOG
REF.
0
*
Momentary contact.
**
When JOG2 command is released, a STOP command is issued.
NOTES:
1 . Use of external Jog input is selected by setting data " 6 ", " 12 ", or " 13 " in one of the parameters H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 6 .
• The factory configuration for 2-wire control is H 1 - 0 5 = 6, for JOG1 input at terminal 7.
• The factory configuration for 3-wire control is H 1 - 0 6 = 6, for JOG1 input at terminal 8.
• To select JOG2 - FWD, set data " 12 " into one of these parameters.
To select JOG2 - REV, set data " 13 " into one of these parameters.
JOG2 does not require an active RUN command to allow Jog operation.
2 . JOG2 (FWD or REV) has priority over FWD and REV Run in the 2-wire control configuration, and priority over RUN, STOP, and FWD/REV commands in
3-wire control configuration.
3 . JOG2 - FWD and JOG2 - REV can be selected independently.
4 . b 1 - 0 4 = 1 (Reverse Run disabled) will override JOG2- REV.
Also see descriptions of MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS and RESET CODES.
5-38
5.25 LOCAL/REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION
d 1 - 0 1 : Memory 1 d 1 - 0 6 : Memory 6
d 1 - 0 2 : Memory 2 d 1 - 0 7 : Memory 7
d 1 - 0 3 : Memory 3 d 1 - 0 8 : Memory 8
d 1 - 0 4 : Memory 4 d 1 - 0 9 : Jog Reference
d 1 - 0 5 : Memory 5 (See paragraph 5.24)
Factory setting:
d 1 - 0 1 thru d 1 - 0 8 : 0 . 0 0
d 1 - 0 9 : 6 . 0 0
Range (all): 0.00 to 400.00 Hz
H 3 - 0 5 : Multi-function Analog Input (Term. 16) (See paragraph 5.30)
b 1 - 0 2 : Operation Method Selection
H 1 - 0 3 thru H 1 - 0 6 : Multi-function Input Terminals; data " 3 ", " 4 ", " 5 ", and
" 6 " [ or " C " ], respectively, for Reference Select 1, 2, 3 and Jog [ or
Multi-function Analog Input at Term. 16 ] (See paragraph 5.31).
For Local/Remote select, see paragraph 5.31, data " 1 " description.
b 1 - 0 1 : Reference Selection (See below, or separate Option Instruction Sheet).
The drive allows selection of one of twelve references. Two are analog inputs, nine are stored in memory, and one can be from an option card, either analog or digital. In most configurations either the local reference ( d 1 - 0 1 ) or the remote AUTO reference will be utilized.
NOTE
The range and resolution of the d 1 - X X parameters is dependent on the setting of o 1 - 0 3 (see paragraph 5.11).
5 . 2 5 A L o c a l / R e m o t e R e f e r e n c e S e l e c t i o n
b 1 - 0 1 : Reference Selection Data: 0 = Local (Digital Operator) frequency reference
1 = Remote (terminals) frequency reference
By programming b 1 - 0 1 = 1, the external Auto reference input will be used. If b 1 - 0 1 is programmed to " 0 ", the value in d 1 - 0 1 will be used as a frequency command.
IMPORTANT
d 1 - 0 1 will change each time the operator enters a new frequency command from the Digital Operator’s " U 1 - 0 1 = X X . X X " prompt. Another way to think of this is that when the drive is first powered up, the Digital
Operator displays " F r e q u e n c y R e f e r e n c e U 1 - 0 1 = X X . X X H Z ". The value displayed is the current setting of d 1 - 0 1 . If the operator changes the display, then d 1 - 0 1 will also be changed.
5-39
5.25 LOCAL/REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION
Continued
5 . 2 5 B M u l t i p l e S p e e d R e f e r e n c e C o n f i g u r a t i o n [ M u l t i - s t e p S p e e d O p e r a t i o n ]
In a multiple reference configuration, four modes may be selected.
NOTE
In the descriptions of Mode 1 thru Mode 4, the external terminal listings differ depending on whether the drive is set for 2-wire or 3-wire control. For 3-wire control, one of these terminals is dedicated to the FWD/REV selection; therefore, multiple reference operation will use fewer of the memory settings and is a more limited function.
Depending on the control wiring configuration and the multi-step mode chosen, the motor can be operated at up to nine different speeds.
OUTPUT
SPEED
Auto
Speed
Ref. (ext.)
OR
Speed
Ref. 1
( d1-01 )
Manual
Speed
Ref. (ext.)
OR
Speed
Ref. 2
( d1-02 )
d1-04 d1-05 d1-03 d1-06 d1-07 d1-08
Jog
Speed
( d1-09 ) t
RUN
Multi-step
Select 1
(Term. 5)
Multi-step
Select 2
(Term. 6)
Multi-step
Select 3
(Term. 7)
Multi-step
Select 4
(JOG1)
(Term. 8)
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
T y p i c a l M u l t i - s t e p S p e e d O p e r a t i o n
5-40
5.25 LOCAL/REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION
Continued
M o d e 1 ( M e m o r y D a t a O n l y ) uses only memory locations d 1 - 0 1 thru d 1 - 0 9 .
The input commands at terminals 3 thru 8 are a combination of 1's and 0's, which are received as an on or off condition at each terminal. Every combination selects a specific speed reference.
b 1 - 0 1 = local/remote operation
(frequency reference);
H 1 - 0 3 = frequency reference select 1 at terminal 5;
H 1 - 0 4 = frequency reference select 2 at terminal 6;
H 1 - 0 5 = frequency reference select 3 at terminal 7;
H 1 - 0 6 = JOG reference select at terminal 8;
H 3 - 0 5 = manual reference at terminal 16.
GPD 515
5 ( H1-03 )
6 ( H1-04 )
7 ( H1-05 )
8 ( H1-06 )
2-WIRE CONTROL
b 1 - 0 1 = 0
H 1 - 0 3 = 3
H 1 - 0 4 = 4
H 1 - 0 5 = 5
H 1 - 0 6 = 6
H 3 - 0 5 = *
3-WIRE CONTROL
b 1 - 0 1 = 0
H 1 - 0 3 = 0
H 1 - 0 4 = 3
H 1 - 0 5 = 4
H 1 - 0 6 = 6
H 3 - 0 5 = *
Freq.
Ref.
d1-01 d1-02 * d1-03 d1-04 d1-05 d1-06 d1-07 d1-08 d1-09
0
0
1
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
External Terminal
7 6
0
0
0
0
0
1
5
0
1
0
1
1
X
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
X
0
1
X
1
0
1
Freq.
Ref.
d1-01 d1-02 * d1-03 d1-04 d1-09
8
0
0
0
0
1
External Terminal
7 6
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
X X
5
■
■
■
■
■
1 = Closed; 0 = Open;
X = No effect;
■ = FWD/REV
* H 3 - 0 5 selects the function of the multi-function analog input. If data value " 0 " is entered, the analog input represents manual reference. If d 1 - 0 2 is to be utilized, then H 3 - 0 5 MUST N O T b e s e t t o " 0 ". Set H 3 - 0 5 to " 1F " when Multi-function
Analog Input (terminal 16) is not being used.
5-41
5.25 LOCAL/REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION
Continued
M o d e 2 ( M e m o r y , A u t o , M a n u a l ) uses Auto, Manual and d 1 - 0 3 thru d 1 - 0 9 .
The input commands at terminals 3 thru 8 are a combination of 1's and 0's, which are received as an on or off condition at each terminal. Every combination selects a specific speed reference.
b 1 - 0 1 = remote operation;
H 1 - 0 3 = frequency reference select 1 at terminal 5 (Auto/Manual);
H 1 - 0 4 = frequency reference select 2 at terminal 6;
H 1 - 0 5 = frequency reference select 3 at terminal 7;
H 1 - 0 6 = JOG reference select at terminal 8;
H 3 - 0 5 = manual reference at terminal 16.
GPD 515/G5
5 ( H1-03 )
6 ( H1-04 )
7 ( H1-05 )
8 ( H1-06 )
2-WIRE CONTROL
b 1 - 0 1 = 1
H 1 - 0 3 = 3
H 1 - 0 4 = 4
H 1 - 0 5 = 5
H 1 - 0 6 = 6
H 3 - 0 5 = 0
Freq.
Ref.
Auto
Manual
(Multi-func.) d1-03 d1-04 d1-05 d1-06 d1-07 d1-08 d1-09
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
8
0
0
External Terminal
7
0
0
6
0
0
5
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
X
1
1
0
0
1
1
X
0
1
0
1
0
1
X
3-WIRE CONTROL
b 1 - 0 1 = 1
H 1 - 0 3 = 0
H 1 - 0 4 = 3
H 1 - 0 5 = 4
H 1 - 0 6 = 6
H 3 - 0 5 = 0
Freq.
Ref.
Auto
Manual
(Multi-func.) d1-03 d1-04 d1-09
0
0
1
8
0
0
External Terminal
7 6
0
0
0
1
5
■
■
1
1
X
0
1
X
■
■
■
1 = Closed; 0 = Open;
X = No effect;
■ = FWD/REV
5-42
5.25 LOCAL/REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION
Continued
M o d e 3 ( d 1 - 0 1 , M a n u a l , d 1 - 0 3 t h r u d 1 - 0 9 ) uses d1-01, Manual and d 1 - 0 3 thru d 1 - 0 9 .
The input commands at terminals 3 thru 8 are a combination of 1's and 0's, which are received as an on or off condition at each terminal. Every combination selects a specific speed reference.
b 1 - 0 1 = local operation;
H 1 - 0 3 = frequency reference select 1 at terminal 5 (Auto/Manual);
H 1 - 0 4 = frequency reference select 2 at terminal 6;
H 1 - 0 5 = frequency reference select 3 at terminal 7;
H 1 - 0 6 = JOG reference select at terminal 8;
H 3 - 0 5 = manual reference at terminal 16.
GPD 515/G5
5 ( H1-03 )
6 ( H1-04 )
7 ( H1-05 )
8 ( H1-06 )
2-WIRE CONTROL
b 1 - 0 1 = 0
H 1 - 0 3 = 3
H 1 - 0 4 = 4
H 1 - 0 5 = 5
H 1 - 0 6 = 6
H 3 - 0 5 = 0
Freq.
Ref.
d1-01
Manual
(Multi-func.) d1-03 d1-04 d1-05 d1-06 d1-07 d1-08 d1-09
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
8
0
0
External Terminal
7 6
0
0
0
0
5
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
X
1
1
0
0
1
1
X
0
1
0
1
0
1
X
3-WIRE CONTROL
b 1 - 0 1 = 0
H 1 - 0 3 = 0
H 1 - 0 4 = 3
H 1 - 0 5 = 4
H 1 - 0 6 = 6
H 3 - 0 5 = 0
Freq.
Ref.
d1-01
Manual
(Multi-func.) d1-03 d1-04 d1-09
0
0
1
8
0
0
External Terminal
7
0
0
6
0
1
5
■
■
1
1
X
0
1
X
■
■
■
1 = Closed; 0 = Open;
X = No effect;
■ = FWD/REV
5-43
5.25 LOCAL/REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION
Continued
M o d e 4
The final consideration for multiple frequency command configuration modes is that any combination of reference values may be configured for operation. As an example, if only three speed references are required, then the following example will work.
b 1 - 0 1 = local operation;
H 1 - 0 3 = frequency select 1 at terminal 5;
H 1 - 0 4 = frequency select 2 at terminal 6;
H 3 - 0 5 = manual reference at terminal 16.
GPD 515/G5
5 ( H1-03 )
6 ( H1-04 )
2-WIRE CONTROL
b 1 - 0 1 = 0
H 1 - 0 3 = 3
H 1 - 0 4 = 5
H 3 - 0 5 = 0
Freq.
Ref.
d1-01
Manual
(Multi-func.) d1-03
8
0
0
0
External Terminal
7 6
0
0
0
0
5
0
1
0 1 0
5.26 MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS
o 2 - 0 1 : LOCAL/REMOTE Key Selection Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 or 1
This parameter determines if the LOCAL/REMOTE key is operative.
Setting
0
1
Disabled
Enabled
Description
5-44
5.26 MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS
Continued
o 2 - 0 2 : STOP Key Function Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 or 1
This parameter determines if the STOP key is operative during remote run.
Setting
0
1
Disabled
Enabled
Description
o 2 - 0 5 : Digital "Motor Operated Pot" Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
Setting this parameter to " 1 " allows the setting of the frequency reference to imitate a motor operated pot reference.
Setting
0
1
Description
Drive accepts frequency command after ENTER is pressed
Drive accepts frequency reference immediately
o 2 - 0 6 : Operator Detection Selection Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 or 1
Setting this parameter to " 0 " allows the drive to continue to run when the Digital
Operator is disconnected from the drive.
Setting
0
1
Description
Disabled (operation continues)
Enabled (motor coasts to stop and fault is displayed)
o 2 - 0 7 : Elapsed Timer Setting Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 65535
This parameter allows the user to preset a starting value for the elapsed timer. Elapsed time is accumulated according to the setting of o 2 - 0 8 .
5-45
5.26 MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS
Continued
o 2 - 0 8 : Elapsed Timer Selection Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
This parameter determines whether the timer is active whenever power is applied to the drive or whenever the drive is in run mode.
Setting
0
1
Description
Timer active whenever power is applied to the drive
Timer active whenever drive is in “run” mode
b 1 - 0 8 : Run Command Selection
During Program
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
This parameter determines if the drive will accept a run command while in the “program” mode. The drive is in the “program” mode whenever the drive light is off.
Setting
0
1
Description
Disabled – If a run is commanded while the drive is in the “program” mode (drive light is off), it will not run.
Enabled – If a run is commanded while the drive is in the
“program” mode (drive light off), it will operate normally.
5.27 MISCELLANEOUS PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
L 8 - 0 1 : Internal Dynamic Braking (Heatsink)
Resistor Protection
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
Set this parameter to " 1 " only if a heatsink-mount resistor will be used with the drive.
Set L 8 - 0 1 to " 0 " if not using Dynamic Braking, or if using a remote DB resistor.
Setting
0
1
Not provided
Provided
Description
L 8 - 0 2 : OH (Overheat) Protection
Alarm Level
Factory setting: See Table A3-1
Range: 50 to 130 °C
This parameter sets the temperature at which the heatsink thermostat will indicate an overtemperature condition. The corresponding action the drive will take is dependent upon the setting of L 8 - 0 3 (see below).
L 8 - 0 3 : Operation Selection After OH
(Overheat) Pre-alarm
Factory setting: 3
Range: 0 to 3
Setting
2
3
0
1
Description
Ramp to Stop (using C1-02 )
Coast to Stop (base block)
Fast-stop (using C1-09 )
Alarm Only (operation continues)
5-46
5.27 MISCELLANEOUS PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
L 8 - 1 0 : Output Ground Fault
Detection Selection
Continued
Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 or 1
Setting
0
1
Description
Disabled – The drive will not detect a ground fault condition
Enabled – The drive will detect a ground fault condition
L 8 - 1 7 : IGBT Protection Selection
Setting
0
1
2
3 at Low Frequency
Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 or 3
Description
Drive relies on L8-19 protection.
Lower fc – When output current is greater than 100%, and output frequency is less than or equal to 10 Hz, the carrier frequency is automatically decreased to between 8 kHz and 2 kHz depending on the drive size. The carrier will automatically return to the normal value after the load is reduced.
Short term OL2 – OL2 occurs in 2 seconds when output frequency is
6 Hz or less and in current limit (approx. 175% of drive rated current).
I-Limit=150% – Current is limited to 150% of drive rated current.
Parameter L 8 - 1 7 assists in protecting the output transistors (IGBTs) from overheating when the output current is high and the output frequency is low.
L 8 - 1 9 : OL2 Selection At Low Speed
Setting
0
1
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
Description
Disabled – Drive Overload (OL2) protection is the same at low speed as it is at high speed.
Enabled – Drive Overload (OL2) protection responds more quickly when output frequency is 6 Hz or less.
This parameter allows the selection of normal or quick Drive Overload (OL2) protection below 6 Hz. It is recommended that this parameter be enabled at all times. In some instances quick drive overload protection (L 8 - 1 9=1) may not be desired, such as when operating in flux vector at zero speed. If L 8 - 1 9 is set to 0 (disabled) L 8 - 1 7 must be set to 1, 2, or 3.
Caution: When disabling OL2 protection at low speeds (L 8 - 1 9=0), set the carrier frequency (C 6 - 0 1 & C 6 - 0 2) equal to or less than 2 kHz.
5-47
5 . 2 8 M O D B U S C O N T R O L
The drive can perform serial communication by using a programmable controller (PLC) and
MODBUS
protocol. MODBUS is composed of one master PLC and 1 to 31 (maximum) slave units (GPD 515/G5). In serial communication between the master and slaves, the master always starts transmission and the slaves respond to it.
The master communicates with one slave at a time. Address numbers are assigned to each slave in advance, and the master specifies an address to communicate with. The slave which receives the command from the master executes the function, and then responds to the master.
A .
Communication Specifications
• Interface
• Synchronization
• Transmission parameters
: RS-232C (standard); RS-485, RS-422 (option - requires communication interface card CM085)
: Asynchronous
: Baud rate — Selectable from 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600 BPS ( H 5 - 0 2 )
Data length — Fixed to 8 bits
Parity
— Parity / no parity, even / odd selectable ( H 5 - 0 3 )
Stop bit
— Fixed to 1 bit
: MODBUS • Protocol
• Maximum number to units to be connected : 31 units (when RS-485 is used)
B .
Sending/Receiving Data
Data that can be sent and received are run/stop commands, frequency reference, fault reset, drive status, and setting and reading of parameters.
b 1 - 0 1 : Reference Selection
b 1 - 0 2 : Operation Method Selection
Factory setting (each): 1
Range (each): 0 to 4
Select the run command and frequency reference input method in b 1 - 0 1 and
b 1 - 0 2 . To provide a run command and frequency reference by communication, set this data to " 2 ". Monitoring of run status, parameter setting/reading, fault reset and multi-function input command from the PLC are enabled. The multi-function input command is OR’ed with the command input from control circuit terminals 3-8.
EXAMPLE:
b 1 - 0 1 and b 1 - 0 2 settings are " 3 ".
Open : Run by frequency reference from control circuit terminal 13 or 14 and run command from control circuit terminal 1 or 2.
Closed : Run by frequency reference and run command from serial communication.
5-48
5 . 2 8 M O D B U S C O N T R O L
Continued
H 5 - 0 1 : Serial Communication Station Address Factory setting: 1 F
Range: 1 to 1F (Hex)
(= 1 to 31 decimal)
Each slave on the same transmission line must be given a unique address.
H 5 - 0 2 : Serial Communication Baud Rate
Selects the baud rate, as indicated by the following table:
Setting
2
3
0
1
4
Baud Rate (BPS)
1200
2400
4800
9600
19.2 K
Factory setting: 3
Range: 0 to 4
H 5 - 0 3 : Serial Communication Parity Selection Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 2
Selects the parity, as indicated by the following table:
Setting
0
1
2
Parity
None
Even
Odd
NOTE: To change the values set in H 5 - 0 1 thru H 5 - 0 3 and enable the new settings, it is necessary to turn OFF power to the Drive, then turn it ON again.
H 5 - 0 5 : Serial Communication Error ( CE )
Detection
Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 or 1
This parameter determines whether or not the drive will detect a CE condition. The corresponding action the drive will take is dependent upon the setting of H 5 - 0 4 .
Setting
0
1
Description
Disabled
Enabled
5-49
5 . 2 8 M O D B U S C O N T R O L
Continued
H 5 - 0 4 : Stopping Method After Serial
Communication Error ( CE )
Setting
0
1
2
3
Description
Ramp to Stop (using C1-02 )
Coast to Stop (base block)
Fast-stop (using C1-09 )
Alarm Only (operation continues)
Factory setting: 3
Range: 0 to 3
5 . 2 9 M O M E N T A R Y POWER LOSS RIDE-THRU
L 2 - 0 1 : Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru
Protection
0
= Disabled (Factory setting)
1
= Enabled – 2 sec. power loss ride-thru
2
= Enabled – indefinite power loss ride-thru, provided control power is maintained
The setting of this parameter either enables or disables the ride-thru feature of the drive. If disabled, the unit will stop immediately whenever a power loss occurs. If enabled, the drive will continue to operate during a momentary power loss of up to 80%, but if the loss exceeds the identified time period, the drive will stop.
L 2 - 0 2 : Power Loss Ride-Thru
Deactivation Time
Factory setting: See Table A3-1
Range: 0.0 to 2.0 seconds
If the loss exceeds the length of time identified by L 2 - 0 2 , the drive will stop. The factory setting of this parameter, in 0.1 second increments, is related to the drive’s capacity rating (see Appendix 3).
Note that the RUN command must be maintained throughout the ride-thru period. If
L 2 - 0 1 is set to " 2 ", a " U V " alarm is displayed during power loss, and no fault signal is output at any multi-function output that is programmed for a fault.
5-50
5 . 2 9 M O M E N T A R Y POWER LOSS RIDE-THRU
Continued
L 2 - 0 3 : Momentary Power Loss Minimum
Base Block Time
Factory setting: See Table A3-1
Range: 0.0 to 5.0 seconds
When a power loss is detected, the output is baseblocked for the amount of time set in
L 2 - 0 3 . During this time, residual voltage in the motor is allowed to diminish. This guards against faults resulting from the drive output turning on while the motor still has residual voltage.
If the minimum baseblock time ( L 2 - 0 3 ) is greater than the power loss ride-thru time
( L 2 - 0 2 ), drive operation resumes after the minimum baseblock time. If the minimum baseblock time is less than the power loss ride-thru time, drive operation resumes after recovery of input power.
L 2 - 0 4 : Momentary Power Loss Recovery
Ramp Time
Factory setting: 0 . 3
Range: 0.0 to 2.0 seconds
After recovery from a momentary power loss, the drive performs a speed search. The ramp recovery time ( L 2 - 0 4 ) is the time is takes the output voltage to return to the preset V/f pattern.
L 2 - 0 5 : Undervoltage Detection Level Factory setting: 1 9 0 (230V ratings)
3 8 0 (460V ratings)
Range: 150 to 210 VDC (230V ratings)
300 to 420 VDC (460V ratings)
The setting of this parameter determines the DC bus undervoltage trip point. When the voltage level on the DC bus drops below this value, a UV (undervoltage) fault will occur.
5-51
5 . 2 9 M O M E N T A R Y POWER LOSS RIDE-THRU
Continued
UNDERVOLTAGE
DETECTION
MOTOR
RPM
SET FREQUENCY
OUTPUT
FREQUENCY
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
L2-03
L2-02 b3-04
L2-04
OUTPUT
CURRENT
b3-03 b3-02
(150%) t t
L2-03 : Minimum Baseblock Time
L2-02 : Power Loss Ride-thru Time
L2-04 : Voltage Recovery Time
b3-02 : Speed Search Current
b3-03 : Speed Search Decel Time
b3-04 : V/f Reduction During Speed Search
M o m e n t a r y P o w e r L o s s R i d e - t h r u , W i t h S p e e d S e a r c h
t t t
5-52
5 . 3 0 M U L T I - F U N C T I O N ANALOG INPUTS ( T e r m . 1 4 & 1 6 )
H 3 - 0 5 : Multi-function Analog Input 1
Selection (Term. 16)
H 3 - 0 9 : Multi-function Analog Input 2
Selection (Term. 14)
1R
Programming H 3 - 0 5 or H 3 - 0 9 per the chart below configures terminal 16 or 14 for analog control. The figures following the chart show how each setting configures the analog input.
•
See Note 1
2R
GPD 515/G5
15 +15V
16
17
33
0-10V
(20K
Ω)
C
–15V
T A B L E 5 - 1 ; H 3 - 0 5 a n d H 3 - 0 9 D a t a S e t t i n g s
A
B
C
D
4
5
6
0
1
2
7
8
9
E - F
10
11
12
Manual reference
Frequency reference gain
(FGAIN)
Frequency reference bias
(FBIAS)
VBIAS
Accel/decel time coefficient
DC injection braking current adjust
Overtorque detection level
Stall prevention level during running
Frequency reference lower limit
Setting prohibited frequency 4
PID feedback
PID Set Point
Frequency Reference
Bias 2 (FBIAS2)
External reference input
Total gain = Internal gain ( H3-02 ) x FGAIN
Total bias = Internal bias ( H3-03 ) + FBIAS;
FBIAS is based on Fmax ( E1-04 )
Voltage boost after V/f conversion
Accel/decel time varied by analog input
DC injection braking current varied by analog input
(10V/drive rated current); internal setting ( b2-02 ) ineffective
Internal overtorque detection level ( C6-02 ) disabled
Stall prevention level ( L3-06 = 100% level) varied by analog input
Frequency reference lower limit is set by analog input.
Either d2-02 setting value or analog input, whichever is greater, becomes effective.
Analog input sets a fourth prohibited frequency, in addition to those set by d3-01 thru d3-03
Provides feedback signal for use with PID control ( b5-01 )
Provides a setpoint signal for use with PID control.
(Frequency reference no longer acts as PID setpoint.)
Additional frequency reference bias input. Total bias =
Internal bias (H3-03) + FBIAS + FBIAS2. FBIAS2 is based on Fmax (E1-04).
Not Used
FWD torque limit
REV torque limit
Regenerative torque limit
(TLG)
10V = 100% of motor rated torque (forward direction)
Quadrant 1 (See Note 3)
10V = 100% of motor rated torque (reverse direction)
Quadrant 3 (See Note 3)
10V = 100% of motor rated torque (forward & reverse regeneration) Quadrants 2 & 4 (See Note 3)
X X X
X X X
X X
X — —
X X X
X X —
X X X
X — —
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X
— — —
— X X
— X X
— X X
5-53
5.30 MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUTS ( T e r m . 1 4 & 1 6 )
Continued
13
14
15
1F
Torque reference (in
Torque Control);
Torque limit (in Speed
Control)
Torque compensation
Torque limit
“Not Used”
10V = 100% of motor rated torque (forward & reverse)
Quadrants 1, 2, 3, & 4 (See Note 3)
— — X
See paragraph 5.43.
— — X
— X X
When programmed in H3-05, terminal 16 input has no effect.
X X X
When programmed in H3-09, terminal 14 input is added to the terminal 13 frequency reference.
NOTES:
1 .
For a bidirectional pot input instead of 0-10V, set H 3 - 0 4 = 1 (for terminal 16) or
H 3 - 0 8 = 1 (for terminal 14), and connect the low (negative) side of the pot to terminal 33. If using a –10 to +10V input, connect the positive side to terminal 16 or 14, and the negative side to terminal 17.
2 .
Column headings refer to set value of A 1 - 0 2 , Control Method; 0 = V/f,
1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop Vector, 3 = Flux Vector. "X" in column indicates
Available, "—" indicates Not Available.
3 .
Quadrant 1 is forward motor rotation, torque in forward direction;
Quadrant 2 is forward motor rotation, torque in reverse direction (regeneration);
Quadrant 3 is reverse motor rotation, torque in reverse direction;
Quadrant 4 is reverse motor rotation, torque in forward direction (regeneration).
H3-05 = 1
H3-09 = 1
H3-05 = 0
H3-09 = 0
FREQUENCY
REF.
–10V
100%
0%
0V 10V
FGAIN
–10V
100%
0%
0V 10V
–100%
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
–100%
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
5-54
5.30 MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUTS ( T e r m . 1 4 & 1 6 )
H3-05 = 2 or C
H3-09 = 2 or C
H3-05 = 4
H3-09 = 4
100%
FBIAS &
FBIAS2
VBIAS
–10V
0%
0V 10V
Continued
100V
–10V 0V 10V
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
–100%
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
H3-05 = 5
H3-09 = 5
REDUCTION
COEFFI-
CIENT
–10V
10
1
0V 1V 10V
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
Actual accel or decel time =
Accel or decel time
Coefficient
H3-05 = 6
H3-09 = 6
100%
DC INJECTION
BRAKING
CURRENT
–10V 0%
0V 10V
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
H3-05 = 7
H3-09 = 7
200%
OVERTORQUE
DETECTION
LEVEL 0%
–10V 0V 10V
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
H3-05 = 8
H3-09 = 8
STALL
PREVENTION
LEVEL DURING
RUNNING
(PERCENT
OF L3-06
10V
SETTING)
–10V
100%
50%
30%
0V 3V 5V
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
H3-05 = 9
H3-09 = 9
FREQUENCY
REFERENCE
LOWER LIMIT
( E1-04 )
Max. Output Freq.
0 Hz
–10V 0V 10V
H3-05 = A
H3-09 = A
SETTING
PROHIBITED
FREQUENCY 4
( E1-04 )
Max. Output Freq.
0 Hz
–10V 0V 10V
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
5-55
5.30 MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUTS ( T e r m . 1 4 & 1 6 )
H3-05 = 10
H3-09 = 10
FWD
TORQUE
LIMIT
100%
0%
–10V 0V 10V
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
Continued
H3-05 = 11
H3-09 = 11
REV
TORQUE
LIMIT
100%
0%
–10V 0V 10V
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
H3-05 = 12
H3-09 = 12
REGEN
TORQUE
LIMIT
100%
0%
–10V 0V 10V
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
H3-05 = 13
H3-09 = 13
TORQUE
REFERENCE
–10V
H3-05 = 14
H3-09 = 14
TORQUE
COMPEN-
SATION
–10V
100%
0%
0V 10V
100%
0%
0V 10V
H3-05 = 15
H3-09 = 15
100%
TORQUE
LIMIT
–100%
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
0%
0V 10V
–100%
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
–100%
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
H 3 - 1 2 : Analog Input Filter Time
Constant
Factory setting: 0 . 0 0
Range: 0.00 to 2.00 seconds
This parameter adjusts the time it takes to process the analog input signal. The signal that comes into the drive on terminals 13, 14 and 16 goes through an analog to digital converter, and then to the control circuit. This filter time constant determines the time between converting and processing.
For cases when there is noise on the analog signal, this time constant may be increased.
Extending the processing time can help prevent erratic performance of the drive.
5-56
5.31 MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG MONITOR OUTPUT ( T e r m . 2 1 - 2 3 )
H 4 - 0 1 : Multi-function Analog Monitor
Output 1 Selection
H 4 - 0 4 : Multi-function Analog Monitor
Output 2 Selection
Factory setting: 2
Range: 1 to 38
Factory setting: 3
Range: 1 to 38
The analog monitor outputs provides a 0 to ±1 0
Vdc signal between terminals 21 & 22 (or 23 &
22), proportional to the value of the U 1 - X X parameter identified by the setting of H 4 - 0 1 ( o r
GPD 515/G5
H 4 - 0 4 ). (See Appendix 1 for listing of U 1 - X X parameters.)
Analog
Monitor 1
(±10 VDC output)
Factory setting, monitor output 1 =
H 4 - 0 1 = 2 ( U 1 - 0 2 ) : Output Frequency
(10V = Fmax)
Analog
Monitor 2
(±10 VDC output)
Factory setting, monitor output 2 =
H 4 - 0 4 = 3 ( U 1 - 0 3 ) : Drive output current
(5V = continuous rated current)
●
23
21
22
FREQUENCY / CURRENT
METER
(1MA FULL SCALE)
+ –
MULTI-
FUNCTION
MONITOR
OUTPUT 1
●
+ –
MULTI-
FUNCTION
MONITOR
OUTPUT 2
NOTE
This output is suitable for metering, but SHOULD NOT be used for external control circuits. To produce an output signal for use by external control circuits, an Analog Monitor option card (AO-08 or AO-12) must be installed in the drive.
H 4 - 0 2 : Multi-function Analog Monitor 1 Gain
H 4 - 0 5 : Multi-function Analog Monitor 2 Gain
Factory Setting : 1 . 0 0
Factory Setting : 0 . 5 0
Range (each): 0.00 to 2.50
The settings of these parameters, in increments of 0.01, are used to calibrate the output at terminals 21 & 22 or 23 & 22.
H 4 - 0 3 : Multi-function Analog Monitor 1 Bias
H 4 - 0 6 : Multi-function Analog Monitor 2 Bias
Factory Setting (each): 0 . 0 %
Range (each): –1 0 . 0 t o +10.0 %
The settings of these parameters, in increments of 0.1 %, are used to calibrate the output at terminals 21 & 22 or 23 & 22.
H 4 - 0 7 : Multi-function Analog Monitor Signal
Level Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
This function allows the analog monitor output(s) to have a unipolar output signal (0-10V), or a bipolar output signal (0 to ±1 0 V ) .
0 : Analog output is + voltage only (absolute value).
1 : Analog output is ± voltage according to sign (direction).
5-57
5 . 3 2 M U L T I - F U N C T I O N INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )
H 1 - 0 1 : Terminal 3 Function
H 1 - 0 2 : Terminal 4 Function
H 1 - 0 3 : Terminal 5 Function
H 1 - 0 4 : Terminal 6 Function
H 1 - 0 5 : Terminal 7 Function
H 1 - 0 6 : Terminal 8 Function
Factory settings: 2-Wire control 3-Wire control
H 1 - 0 1
H 1 - 0 2
H 1 - 0 3
H 1 - 0 4
H 1 - 0 5
H 1 - 0 6
24
14
3
4
6
8
24
14
0
3
4
6
These six parameters select the input signal functions for terminals 3 thru 8, and can be independently set.
Parameter settings are checked whenever power is applied to the drive, or upon exiting Program mode. A parameter set value failure ( oPE3 ) will occur if any of the following conditions are detected among these six parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
EXTERNAL
CONTACTS
GPD 515/G5
3 H1-01
4 H1-02 MULTI-
> FUNCTION
5 H1-03 INPUT
6 H1-04
7 H1-05
8 H1-06
11
0V
(1) Two or more of the parameters contain the same value (except for External
Fault, data " 2X ").
(2) Two or three Speed Search functions (data " 61 ", " 62 ", or " 64 ") have been selected.
(3) Any Speed Search function (data " 61 ", " 62 ", or " 64 ") has been entered into any parameter other than H 1 - 0 6 .
(4) Both the Sample/Hold (data " A ") and Up/Down (data " 10 " & " 11 ") functions have been selected.
(5) The Up function (data " 10 ") and the Down function (data " 11 ") have not both been selected.
(6) The Trim Control Increase (Data "1C") AND Trim Control Decrease (Data "1D")
Functions have not both been selected.
Table 5-2 lists the possible data setting values for these parameters, with the function and a brief description for each one.
For a few of the data settings, a more detailed description is given on the following pages; for others, the description is given in other PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES paragraphs.
5-58
5 . 3 2 M U L T I - F U N C T I O N INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )
Continued
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
T a b l e 5 - 2 . H 1 - 0 1 t h r u H 1 - 0 6 D a t a S e t t i n g s
Forward/Reverse selection f o r 3 - w i r e c o n t r o l
Local/Remote selection
Option / drive reference selection
DESCRIPTION
Redefines terminals to:
1 = Run; 2 = Stop; corresponding terminal (3-8) = FWD/REV select
Open = Operates according to setting of
b 1 - 0 1 and b 1 - 0 2
Closed = Operates from keys of the Digital
Operator
S e e D a t a d e s c r i p t i o n f o l l o w i n g t h i s t a b l e
Open = Operates from Digital Operator and or external terminals
Closed = Operates from installed option
AVAILABILITY
(See Note 1)
0 1 2 3
X X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Multi-step reference select 1
Multi-step reference select 2
Multi-step reference select 3
Jog frequency reference
S e e p a r a g r a p h 5 . 2 5 B
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
Accel/decel time selection 1
External base block
(N.O. contact input)
External base block
(N.C. contact input)
Accel/decel ramp hold
(speed hold command)
External overheat alarm signal
Multi-function analog input selection
Speed control disable
ASR integral reset (IRST)
Terminal Not Used
Closed = Jog selected
S e e p a r a g r a p h 5 . 2 4 & 5 . 2 5 B
Open = Accel/decel by C 1 - 0 1 / C 1 - 0 2
Closed = Accel/decel by C 1 - 0 3 / C 1 - 0 4
S e e p a r a g r a p h 5 . 2 B
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Closed = Shuts off drive output
(speed reference is held)
S e e D a t a d e s c r i p t i o n f o l l o w i n g t h i s t a b l e
Open = Shuts off drive output
(speed reference is held)
S e e D a t a d e s c r i p t i o n f o l l o w i n g t h i s t a b l e
X X X X
X X X X
Closed = Hold
S e e p a r a g r a p h 5 . 2 B
Drive does not react to input
X
Closed = " oH2 " blinks on the Digital Operator, X X X X and operation continues (minor fault)
X X X X Open = Analog inputs (terms. 14 & 16) are disabled
Closed = Analog inputs (terms. 14 & 16) are enabled
— X — X Open = Speed control enabled
Closed = Speed control disabled
Closed = Integral reset
S e e p a r a g r a p h 5 . 7 C
— X — X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5-59
10
11
12
13
14
5 . 3 2 M U L T I - F U N C T I O N INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )
Continued
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
T a b l e 5 - 2 . H 1 - 0 1 t h r u H 1 - 0 6 D a t a S e t t i n g s - C o n t i n u e d
DESCRIPTION
AVAILABILITY
(See Note 1)
0 1 2 3
Up function
Down function
Forward jog (Jog2)
Reverse jog (Jog2)
S e e D a t a d e s c r i p t i o n f o l l o w i n g t h i s t a b l e
X X X X
X X X X
S e e p a r a g r a p h 5 . 2 4
X X X X
X X X X
Fault Reset
Fast-Stop (N.O.)
Motor 2 Select
Fast Stop (N.C.)
Resets a fault, only if RUN command is not present
X X X X
Open = No Effect
Closed = Ramp to stop by Fast-Stop Decel
Time ( C 1 - 0 9 )
Switches between two different sets of motor parameters
Open = Use parameter A 1 - 0 2,
E 1 P a r a m e t e r & E 2 Parameters.
Closed = Use parameter E 3 - 0 1, E 4
Parameters & E 5 Parameters.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Closed = No Effect X X X X
Open = Ramp to stop by Fast-Stop Decel Time
( C 1 - 0 9)
S e e D a t a d e s c r i p t i o n f o l l o w i n g t h i s t a b l e
X X X X Timer function
(ON or OFF delay)
PID control disable
Accel/decel time selection 2
Program lockout
Trim control increase
Trim control decrease
Analog reference sample/ hold
Frequency reference selection
Closed = PID control is disabled – setpoint becomes frequency reference
Open = Accel/decel by C 1 - 0 1 t h r u C 1 - 0 4
Closed = Accel/decel by C 1 - 0 5 t h r u C 1 - 0 8
S e e p a r a g r a p h 5 . 2 B
Open = Programming from Digital Operator is disabled
Closed = Programming from Digital Operator is enabled
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Closed = Increase analog frequency reference X X X X by d 4 - 0 2 value
S e e D a t a d e s c r i p t i o n f o l l o w i n g t h i s t a b l e
Closed = Decrease analog frequency reference X X X X by d 4 - 0 2 value
S e e D a t a d e s c r i p t i o n f o l l o w i n g t h i s t a b l e
X X X X Open = Hold frequency reference
Closed = Sample frequency reference
S e e D a t a d e s c r i p t i o n f o l l o w i n g t h i s t a b l e
Open = Freq. ref. from term. 13
Closed = Freq. ref. from term. 14
X X X X
5-60
5 . 3 2 M U L T I - F U N C T I O N INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )
Continued
20
t h r u
2F
30
31
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
71
72
77
T a b l e 5 - 2 . H 1 - 0 1 t h r u H 1 - 0 6 D a t a S e t t i n g s - C o n t i n u e d
External fault
DESCRIPTION
AVAILABILITY
(See Note 1)
0 1 2 3
Second digit of setting is a hexadecimal value which defines what type of external contact is used and how the drive will react when the signal input is active. S e e p a r a g r a p h 5 . 1 7
X X X X
PID integral reset
PID Integral Hold
DC injection braking command
Speed Search 1
Speed Search 2
Energy saving operation
Speed Search 3
Closed = Set calculated integral time value to 0. S e e p a r a g r a p h 5 . 3 6 F
X X X X
Closed = Hold integrator at its present level X X X X
(PID Control). S e e p a r a g r a p h 5 . 3 6 F
Closed = DC injection braking active
S e e p a r a g r a p h 5 . 1 0 D
X X X X
Closed * = Speed Search operation from maximum frequency
S e e D a t a d e s c r i p t i o n f o l l o w i n g t h i s t a b l e
X — X —
Closed * = Speed Search operation from set X — X — frequency
S e e D a t a d e s c r i p t i o n f o l l o w i n g t h i s t a b l e
Closed = Energy saving
S e e p a r a g r a p h 5 . 1 6
X X — —
Closed * = Speed Search operation from output frequency
S e e D a t a d e s c r i p t i o n f o l l o w i n g t h i s t a b l e
X — X —
Closed = KEB ride-thru is disabled X X X X Kinetic energy braking ride-thru NC
Kinetic energy braking ride-thru NO
Speed / torque control selection
Closed = KEB ride-thru is enabled X X X X
— — — X
Zero-Servo command
ASR gain selection
Open = Speed control operation
Closed = Torque control operation
S e e p a r a g r a p h 5 . 4 3
Open = Zero-Servo OFF
Closed = Zero-Servo ON
S e e p a r a g r a p h 5 . 4 9 A
Closed = ASR proportional gain is set according to C 5 - 0 3
— — — X
— — — X
NOTES:
* All contact closures must be maintained, except for speed search (Data " 61 ",
" 62", & ' 64 "), which may be momentary (see paragraph 5.32 D).
1. Column headings refer to set value of A 1 - 0 2 , Control Method; 0 = V/f,
1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open loop vector, 3 = Flux vector.
5-61
5 . 3 2 M U L T I - F U N C T I O N INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )
Continued
A .
Data 1 : Local/Remote
Set b 1 - 0 1 and b 1 - 0 2 to data " 1 " to select external inputs as the source for frequency reference and operation commands. The use of a Local/Remote command input allows switching between Digital Operator control and the external terminal input signals, without the need to re-program b 1 - 0 1 and b 1 - 0 2 . If the status of the Local/Remote command input is changed while the drive is running, the Local/Remote operation selection is not completed until the next time the drive is stopped.
Closed = Controlled locally (Digital Operator)
Open = Controlled according to the setting of b 1 - 0 1 and b 1 - 0 2
NOTE
If manual speed is selected
– by the external Auto/Manual switch (3SS [2-wire] or 2SS [3-wire]),
– by jumper from terminal 5 to 11 (2-wire control), o r – by jumper from terminal 6 to 11 (3-wire control), the drive speed reference will be controlled by manual speed reference regardless of the state of the Local/Remote input.
b 1 - 0 7 : Local / Remote Run Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Range: 0 to 1
S e t t i n g
0
1
Description
Cycle External Run
Accept External Run
When switching from local (digital operator) back into remote (terminals) and a remote run command is present, parameter b 1 - 0 7 determines how the drive will react. With a setting of "1", the drive will start running as soon as remote mode is selected. A setting of " 0 " will require the run command to be removed and re-applied after the remote mode is selected.
5-62
5.32 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )
Continued
B .
Data 8 : External Base Block by N.O. Contact
• When either the Forward Run command or
Reverse Run command is present, and the external Base Block command is applied
(i.e. contact closed), coast stop is accomplished (after a 20 msec delay), while the frequency command is maintained.
When the Base Block command is removed, the drive will recover in a manner similar to that of Speed Search operation, except that it searches up from 0 Hz, and supersedes a
Speed Search command.
EXTERNAL
BASE BLOCK
o o
8
11
GPD 515/G5
0V
• When both the Forward Run command and
Reverse Run command are open, and the external Base Block command is applied (i.e. contact closed), coast stop is accomplished and after a 20 msec delay the frequency command is changed to 0Hz.
When the Base Block command is removed, the drive will remain in stopped condition until Forward Run command or Reverse Run command is again applied.
• When external Base Block command is active, a blinking " BB " will be displayed on the Digital Operator.
RUN
Freq. Cmd
0
Base Block
V out
0
20msec t = L2-04 setting
(A) Base Block With Run Active
RUN
Freq. Cmd
0
Base Block
V out
0
20msec
(B) Base Block After Stop Com
C .
Data 9 : External Base Block by N.C. Contact
Base block operation is the same as described above, except that the Base Block contact must be open to be recognized.
5-63
5 . 3 2 M U L T I - F U N C T I O N INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )
D .
Data 6 1 : Speed Search From Max Frequency
Data 6 2 : Speed Search From Set Frequency
Data 6 4 : Speed Search From Output Frequency
Continued
A multi-function input terminal is utilized to activate speed search. When the external speed search command is closed, the base is blocked for the min. base block time,
L 2 - 0 3 , then the speed search is made. The operation depends on the set value.
IMPORTANT
Set values 6 1, 6 2 & 6 4 CANNOT be selected in combination.
• When 6 1 is set, the speed search begins with the maximum frequency.
• When 6 2 is set, the speed search begins with the frequency command that has been set after the search command was received.
• When 6 4 is set, the speed search begins with the last output frequency before the speed search command was received.
RUN
SIGNAL
SPEED SEARCH
MAX FREQ., FREQ.
REF., OR OUTPUT
FREQ. WHEN SPEED
SEARCH IS INPUTTED
WITHIN 0.5 SEC
SPEED COINCIDENCE
POINT
OUTPUT FREQUENCY
MIN.
BASE
BLOCK
TIME
( L2-03 )
SPEED SEARCH
OPERATION
VOLTAGE AT
SPEED SEARCH
OUTPUT VOLTAGE
NORMAL V/f
OUTPUT
( E1=03 )
NOTE: When momentary power loss ride-thru function is selected ( L2-01 = 1 or 2), the Speed Search command must be enabled.
S p e e d S e a r c h O p e r a t i o n T i m i n g
5-64
5.32 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )
Continued
b 3 - 0 1 : Speed
Search
Selection
Factory setting: 0 = Disabled (when V/f control or Open
Loop Vector control has been selected)
1
= Enabled (when V/f w/PG control or
Flux Vector control has been selected)
Range: 0 or 1
b 3 - 0 2 : Speed Search Deactivation Current
Level
Factory setting: 1 5 0
Range: 0 to 200 %
b 3 - 0 3 : Speed Search Deceleration Time Factory setting: 2 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 sec.
After power recovery, if the drive output current is larger than the set value of
b 3 - 0 2 , speed search is started, using a decel rate per the setting of b 3 - 0 3 . When drive output current is lower than the set value of b 3 - 0 2 , speed search is complete and acceleration or deceleration is continued at the normal rate ( C 1 - X X ) to set frequency.
L 2 - 0 3 : Minimum Baseblock Time Factory setting: See Table A3-1
Range: 0.1 to 5.0 sec.
When a momentary power loss is detected, the drive output transistors are disabled for a period of time determined by the setting of L 2 - 0 3 . The L 2 - 0 3 setting should represent the time required for the motor residual voltage to go to zero.
When the momentary power loss time exceeds the minimum base block time, the speed search operation is started immediately after power recovery.
WHEN MIN. BASEBLOCK TIME IS LONGER THAN MOMENTARY POWER LOSS TIME
MOMENTARY POWER
LOSS TIME
MIN.
BASEBLOCK TIME
DRIVE
BASEBLOCK TIME
WHEN MIN. BASEBLOCK TIME IS SHORTER THAN MOMENTARY POWER LOSS TIME
MOMENTARY POWER
LOSS TIME
MIN.
BASEBLOCK TIME
DRIVE
BASEBLOCK TIME
5-65
5 . 3 2 M U L T I - F U N C T I O N INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )
Continued
E .
Data 18 : Timer Input Function
H 2 - 0 1 : Multi-function Output Terminals (9 & 10)
H 2 - 0 2 : Multi-function Output Terminals (25 & 27)
H 2 - 0 3 : Multi-function Output Terminals (26 & 27)
Data 1 2 : Timer Function
b 4 - 0 1 : On-delay Timer
b 4 - 0 2 : Off-delay Timer
Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 300.0 sec.
Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 300.0 sec.
When the timer function input is “closed” for longer than On-delay Timer ( b 4 - 0 1 ), the timer function output closes.
When the timer input is “open” for longer than Off-delay Timer ( b 4 - 0 2 ), the timer function output opens.
Multi-function Contact
Input: Timer Function
ON
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Multi-function Contact
Output: Timer Function
b4-01
ON
b4-02 b4-01
ON
b4-02
As can be seen, the timer function must be programmed as both a multi-function input a n d an output to be effective.
F .
Data 1E : Sample/Hold Command
This function applies only to an analog voltage or current input used as a frequency reference at terminals 13 or 14.
If the Sample/Hold command is present (contact is closed) for more than 0.1 sec., the frequency reference will follow (sample) the analog signal, e.g. if 5V corresponds to 50% frequency, a 5V analog signal will produce 50% frequency reference if the Sample/Hold command is present.
If the Sample/Hold command is removed (contact is opened) while the Drive is still in Run condition, the frequency reference is held at the level it was at the time the Sample/Hold command was removed, e.g. the frequency reference would remain at 50%, even though the analog signal increased to 8V.
5-66
5 . 3 2 M U L T I - F U N C T I O N INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )
Continued
10V
8V
5V
ANALOG INPUT
0.1
sec.
SAMPLE/
HOLD CMD Open
0.1
sec.
Closed t1
0.11
sec.
t2
0.05
sec.
t3
0.15
sec.
S a m p l e / H o l d F u n c t i o n T i m i n g
100%
80%
FREQ. REF.
50%
G .
Data 1 0 : Up Function
Data 1 1 : Down Function
d 4 - 0 1 : Frequency Reference Hold
Function Selection
Factory setting: 0
Data: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Programming data " 10 " and " 11 " for two of the six multi-function input terminals allows those inputs to be used for Up/Down frequency setting by simulating the action of a MOP
(motor operated potentiometer).
NOTES:
1. Set parameter b 1 - 0 2 = 1.
2. OPE3 fault will occur if " 10 " and " 11 " data settings are not used together.
3. OPE3 fault will occur if " 10 " and " 11 " data settings are programmed at the same time as setting " A " (Accel/decel ramp hold).
4. Jog has priority over Up/Down function.
5. Up/Down has priority over Multi-step Speed inputs.
6. Up/Down is ineffective when operation is from the Digital Operator.
(NOTES continued on next page)
5-67
5.32 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )
G .
(Continued)
Continued
NOTES (Continued):
7. Upper limit speed is set by the formula:
E 1 - 0 4 (Fmax) x d 2 - 0 1 (Freq. Ref. Upper Limit)
8. Lower limit speed is either the reference from external terminals 13 or 14, or from d 2 - 0 1 , Frequency Reference Lower Limit.
9. If d 4 - 0 1 = " 0 ", Frequency Reference will be reset to 0 Hz if the stop command is given, or if input power is removed and reapplied.
10. If d 4 - 0 1 = " 1 ", the drive will retain the last valid Frequency Reference if a stop command is given or if input power is removed, and will accelerate to that reference upon reapplication of a run command.
EXAMPLE:
H 1 - 0 5 Data 1 0 : Up function
H 1 - 0 6 Data 1 1 : Down function
UP o o
DOWN o o
GPD 515/G5
7 UP
8 DOWN
11
0V
INPUT SIGNAL
UP DOWN
Open Open
Closed Open
FUNCTION
HOLD
UP (Frequency command approaches frequency command upper limit)
Open Closed DOWN (Frequency command approaches minimum output frequency or frequency command lower limit, whichever is larger)
Closed Closed HOLD
5-68
5 . 3 2 M U L T I - F U N C T I O N INPUT TERMINALS ( T e r m . 3 - 8 )
Continued
FWD RUN
UP
COMMAND
DOWN
COMMAND
UPPER
LIMIT SPEED
LOWER
LIMIT SPEED
OUTPUT
FREQUENCY*
D1 H U H D H U H D D1 H
U
U1 H D D1 H
"SPEED AT SET
FREQUENCY"
MULTI-FUNCTION
OUTPUT SIGNAL
* U = UP (Accel) status; D = DOWN (Decel) status; H = HOLD (constant speed) status;
U1 = At Upper Limit Speed; D1 = At Lower Limit Speed
U p / D o w n F r e q u e n c y S e t t i n g T i m i n g
H .
Data 1 C : Trim Control Increase
Data 1 D : Trim Control Decrease
d 4 - 0 2 : Trim Control Level Factory setting: 1 0
Range: 0 to 100 %
The value of d 4 - 0 2 is a percentage of the maximum output frequency ( E 1 - 0 4 ) .
When the trim control increase input is closed, the value of d 4 - 0 2 gets added to the analog frequency reference.
When the trim control decrease input is closed, the value of d 4 - 0 2 gets subtracted from the analog frequency reference.
5-69
5.33 MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT T E R M I N A L S ( T e r m . 9 & 1 0 ; 2 5 - 2 7 )
H 2 - 0 1 : Contact Output (external terminals 9 & 10)
H 2 - 0 2 : Open Collector Output
(external terminals 25 & 27)
H 2 - 0 3 : Open Collector Output
(external terminals 26 & 27)
A contact, or two different open collector outputs, can be programmed to change states during any of the conditions indicated in Table
5 - 3 .
GPD 515/G5
o o 9
10
25
26
27
MULTI-FUNCTION
CONTACT OUTPUT
250Vac 1A OR LESS
30Vdc 1A OR LESS
(FACTORY SETTING
IS FOR SIGNAL
DURING OPERATION)
MULTI-
FUNCTION
OPEN
COLLECTOR
OUTPUTS
48Vdc AT
50mA MAX.
IMPORTANT
If an open collector output is applied to a DC relay, the relay MUST be diode protected, as shown in the recommended configuration below.
25
48Vdc MAX. *
Recommended
Configuration for
DC Relays
•
26
DIODE
▲
*
*
DC
RELAY
27
C
* Customer supplied
5-70
5.33 MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT T E R M I N A L S ( T e r m . 9 & 1 0 ; 2 5 - 2 7 )
Continued
B
C
D
E
9
A
4
5
F
10
11
12
0
1
2
3
6
7
8
T a b l e 5 - 3 . H 2 - 0 1 t h r u H 2 - 0 3 D a t a S e t t i n g s
During Operation
Zero speed
DESCRIPTION
Closed = Drive is operating
Closed = Drive is at 0Hz
Speed at set frequency 1
Speed coincidence 1
Closed = Freq. Ref. – L 4 - 0 2
≤ output X f r e q
≤ Freq. Ref. + L 4 - 0 2
S e e D a t a d e s c r i p t i o n f o l l o w i n g t h i s t a b l e
X Closed = Speed at set frequency and
L 4 - 0 1 – L 4 - 0 2
≤ output freq.
≤ L 4 - 0 1 + L 4 - 0 2
S e e D a t a d e s c r i p t i o n f o l l o w i n g t h i s t a b l e
Frequency detection 1 – low Closed = Output frequency
≤ L 4 - 0 1
S e e D a t a d e s c r i p t i o n f o l l o w i n g t h i s t a b l e
Frequency detection 1 – high Closed = Output frequency
≥ L 4 - 0 1
S e e D a t a d e s c r i p t i o n f o l l o w i n g t h i s t a b l e
X
X
AVAILABILITY
(See Note 1)
0, 1 2 3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Operation ready Closed = Drive is ready for operation
During undervoltage detection Closed = Undervoltage detected
During base block Closed = Drive output base block is active; motor is coasting
Frequency reference mode
Run reference mode
Open = Command by external input
Closed = Command by Digital Operator
Open = Run by external input
Closed = Run by Digital Operator
Overtorque detection 1 Closed = Overtorque detected
Frequency reference missing Closed = Frequency reference is missing
Braking resistor fault
Fault
Closed = Braking resistor is overheating or has faulted
Closed = Drive fault has occurred
(except C P F 0 0 , C P F 0 1 )
Not Used
A l a r m ( m i n o r f a u l t )
During fault reset
Timer output function
Closed = Alarm condition is present
Closed = Drive is performing fault reset
S e e p a r a g r a p h 5 . 3 2 E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5-71
5.33 MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT T E R M I N A L S ( T e r m . 9 & 1 0 ; 2 5 - 2 7 )
Continued
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
T a b l e 5 - 3 . H 2 - 0 1 t h r u H 2 - 0 3 D a t a S e t t i n g s - C o n t i n u e d
Speed at set frequency 2
Speed coincidence 2
DESCRIPTION
AVAILABILITY
(See Note 1)
0, 1 2 3
Closed = Freq. Ref. – L 4 - 0 4
≤ output X f r e q
≤ Freq. Ref. + L 4 - 0 4
S e e D a t a d e s c r i p t i o n f o l l o w i n g t h i s t a b l e
X Closed = Speed at set frequency and
L 4 - 0 3 – L 4 - 0 4
≤ output freq.
≤ L 4 - 0 3 + L 4 - 0 4
S e e D a t a d e s c r i p t i o n f o l l o w i n g t h i s t a b l e
X
X
X
X
Frequency detection 2 – low Open = Output freq.
≥ L 4 - 0 3 + L 4 - 0 4
Closed = Output frequency
≤ L 4 - 0 3
S e e D a t a d e s c r i p t i o n f o l l o w i n g t h i s t a b l e
Frequency detection 2 – high Open = Output freq.
≤ L 4 - 0 3 + L 4 - 0 4
Closed = Output frequency > L 4 - 0 3
S e e D a t a d e s c r i p t i o n f o l l o w i n g t h i s t a b l e
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X Overtorque detection 1
(N.C.)
Overtorque detection 2
(N.O.)
Overtorque detection 2
(N.C.)
During reverse run
During base block 2
Motor 2 Selected
Regenerating
During restart
OL1 pre-alarm
OH pre-alarm
Open = Overtorque 1 detected according to settings of L 6 - 0 1 t h r u L 6 - 0 3
Closed = Overtorque 2 detected according to settings of L 6 - 0 4 t h r u L 6 - 0 6
Open = Overtorque 2 detected according to settings of L 6 - 0 4 t h r u L 6 - 0 6
Closed = Drive operation in reverse
Open = Drive output base block is active; motor is coasting
Closed = Motor 2 is selected
Closed = Regenerating mode [ only when A 1 -
0 2 is set for Flux Vector Control ]
Closed = Retry operation after a fault
Closed = Thermal overload level exceeds
90% of fault detection level
Closed = Cooling fin temperature exceeds
L 8 - 0 2 l e v e l
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
21 – 2F Not Used
30
31
During torque limit
During speed limit
Closed = Torque limit —
Closed = Speed limit reached [ only when A 1 - —
0 2 is set for Flux Vector Control ]
X
—
X
X
5-72
5.33 MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT T E R M I N A L S ( T e r m . 9 & 1 0 ; 2 5 - 2 7 )
Continued
32
33
34 – 36
37
T a b l e 5 - 3 . H 2 - 0 1 t h r u H 2 - 0 3 D a t a S e t t i n g s - C o n t i n u e d
DESCRIPTION
AVAILABILITY
(See Note 1)
0, 1 2 3
Not Used
Zero-Servo complete Closed = Zero-Servo is complete
S e e p a r a g r a p h 5 . 4 9 C
— — X
Not Used
During operation Closed = Drive is operating (except during base block or injection braking)
X X X
38 – 3F Not Used
NOTES:
1. Column headings refer to set value of A 1 - 0 2 , Control Method; 0 = V/f,
1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open loop vector, 3 = Flux vector.
A .
Data 2 – 5 , 1 3 – 1 6 : Frequency or Speed Detection Output Signals
L 4 - 0 1 : Speed Coincidence Detection Level
L 4 - 0 2 : Speed Coincidence Detection Width
L 4 - 0 3 : Speed Coincidence Detection
Level (+/–)
L 4 - 0 4 : Speed Coincidence Detection
Width (+/–)
Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
Factory setting: 2 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 20.0 Hz
Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: –400.0 to +400.0 Hz
Factory setting: 2 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 20.0 Hz
These speed coincidence parameters are used to control contact output at terminals 9 &
10, or one of the open collector outputs at terminals 25 & 26 (with respect to terminal
27), when selected by H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 3 . Both L 4 - 0 1 and L 4 - 0 2 are insensitive to motor direction.
The output contact will close, or the open collector output will go low, when the acceleration or deceleration is completed, or output frequency or speed is within the detection width for the selected output function. See the timing diagrams on the following pages.
5-73
5.33 MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT T E R M I N A L S ( T e r m . 9 & 1 0 ; 2 5 - 2 7 )
F r e q u e n c y d e t e c t i o n 1 – l o w
H2-01 = 4 L4-01 = 30 Hz L4-02 = 5 Hz
: Output Freq. or
Motor Speed
35 Hz
L4-01 = 30 Hz
L4-02
Continued
L4-01 = 30 Hz
35 Hz
Contact
Closure
F r e q u e n c y d e t e c t i o n 1 – h i g h
H2-01 = 5 L4-01 = 30 Hz L4-02 = 5 Hz
L4-01 = 30 Hz
25 Hz
L4-02
L4-01 =
25 Hz
30 Hz
Contact
Closure
F r e q u e n c y d e t e c t i o n 2 – l o w
H2-01 = 15 L4-03 = 30 Hz L4-04 = 5 Hz
35 Hz
L4-03 = 30 Hz
L4-04
L4-02
: Output Freq. or
Motor Speed
L4-02
: Output Freq. or
Motor Speed
Contact
Closure
5-74
5.33 MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT T E R M I N A L S ( T e r m . 9 & 1 0 ; 2 5 - 2 7 )
F r e q u e n c y d e t e c t i o n 2 – h i g h
H2-01 = 16 L4-03 = 30 Hz L4-04 = 5 Hz
: Output Freq. or
Motor Speed
L4-03 = 30 Hz
25 Hz
L4-04
Continued
Contact
Closure
S p e e d a t s e t f r e q u e n c y 1
60 Hz
50 Hz
H2-01 = 2 L4-02 = 10 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
Contact
Closure
S p e e d a t s e t f r e q u e n c y 2
H2-01 = 13 L4-04 = 10 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
Contact
Closure
5-75
: Speed Reference
: Output Freq. or
Motor Speed
: Speed Reference
: Output Freq. or
Motor Speed
5.33 MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT T E R M I N A L S ( T e r m . 9 & 1 0 ; 2 5 - 2 7 )
S p e e d c o i n c i d e n c e 1
H2-01 = 3 L4-01 = 30 Hz L4-02 = 5 Hz
: Output Freq. or
Motor Speed
L4-01 =
35 Hz
30 Hz
25 Hz
L4-02
Continued
L4-01 =
25 Hz
30 Hz
35 Hz
Contact
Closure
S p e e d c o i n c i d e n c e 2
H2-01 = 14 L4-03 = 30 Hz L4-04 = 5 Hz
35 Hz
L4-03 = 30 Hz
25 Hz
L4-04
L4-02
: Output Freq. or
Motor Speed
Contact
Closure
5-76
5 . 3 4 P H A S E LOSS DETECTION, INPUT
L 8 - 0 5 : Input Phase Loss Detection Selection Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
The input phase loss detection circuit monitors the DC bus current ripple and activates when one of the input phases is lost. This causes a " PF " fault to occur and the motor to coast to a stop.
Setting
0
1
Description
Input phase loss detection disabled
Input phase loss detection enabled
5 . 3 5 P H A S E LOSS DETECTION, OUTPUT
L 8 - 0 7 : Output Phase Loss Detection Selection Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 or 1
The output phase loss detection circuit monitors the DCCT's and activates when one of the output phases is lost. This causes a " L F " fault to occur and the motor to coast to a stop.
Setting
0
1
Description
Output phase loss detection disabled
Output phase loss detection enabled
5-77
5 . 3 6 P I D C O N T R O L
The Proportional, Integral and Derivative control function provides closed-loop control, or regulation, of a system process variable (pressure, temperature, etc.). This regulation is accomplished by comparing a feedback signal to a setpoint reference, which results in an error signal. The PID control algorithm then performs calculations, based upon the PID parameter settings ( b 5 - 0 1 thru b 5 - 1 4 ), on this error signal. The result of the PID algorithm is then used as the new frequency reference, or is added to the existing speed reference.
A .
b 5 - 0 1 : PID Selection Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 4
Using this parameter, PID control can be enabled, and the type of PID control can be selected.
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
Description
PID Disabled
PID Enabled (D = Feedback)
PID Enabled (D = Feed forward)
PID Enabled, Reference + PID (D = Feedback)
PID Enabled, Reference + PID (D = Feedback forward)
5-78
5 . 3 6 P I D C O N T R O L
Continued
B .
S e t p o i n t R e f e r e n c e S e l e c t i o n
b 1 - 0 1 : Reference Selection
d 1 - 0 1 thru d 1 - 0 9 : Multi-step Frequency Factory settings: d 1 - 0 9 = 6 . 0
Presets all others = 0 . 0
Range (each): 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
H 3 - 0 1 : Auto Speed Reference Signal
Level Selection (Term. 13)
Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 to 4
H 3 - 0 4 : Multi-Function Analog Input 1
Level Selection (Term. 16)
H 3 - 0 5 : Multi-Function Analog Input 1
Selection (Term. 16)
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 1F
H 3 - 0 8 : Multi-Function Analog Input 2
Level Selection (Term. 14)
H 3 - 0 9 : Multi-Function Analog Input 2
Selection (Term. 14)
Factory setting: 2
Range: 0 to 2
Factory setting: 1 F
Range: 0 to 1F
The PID setpoint can come from the frequency reference (terminal 13 for 0 – 10 VDC or the multi-step speed parameters d 1 - 0 1 thru d 1 - 0 9) or a Multi-Function Analog Input.
PID Setpoint examples:
• External Terminal 13: Set b 1 - 0 1 to data " 1 " or
• Multi-step speed parameters: Set b 1 - 0 1 to data " 0 " (See Multi-step
Speed Setting, paragraph 5.25B) or
• External Terminal 16: Set H 3 - 0 5 to data " C " or
• External Terminal 14: Set H 3 - 0 9 to data " C "
C .
Feedback Signal Selection
H 3 - 0 5 : Multi-function Analog Input 1
Selection (Term. 16)
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 1F
H 3 - 0 9 : Multi-function Analog Input 2
Selection (Term. 14)
Factory setting: 1 F
Range: 0 to 1F
Select the PID control Feedback Signal from external terminal 14 for a current signal
(4-20mA DC) or from terminal 16 for a voltage (0-10 VDC or –10 to +10 VDC).
PID Feedback examples:
• Current signal (4-20mA): Set H 3 - 0 9 to data " B " and H 3 - 0 8 to data " 2 ".
• Voltage signal (0-10 VDC): Set H 3 - 0 5 to data " B " and H 3 - 0 4 to data " 0 ".
• Voltage signal (–10 to 10 VDC): Set H 3 - 0 5 to data " B " and H 3 - 0 4 t o data " 1 ".
5-79
5 . 3 6 P I D C O N T R O L
Continued
D . PID S e t t i n g s
b 5 - 0 2 : Proportional Gain Factory setting: 1 . 0 0
Range: 0.00 to 10.00
Proportional gain is the value by which the error signal is multiplied to generate a new
PID controller output. A higher setting will result in a more responsive system. A lower setting will result in a more stable system.
b 5 - 0 3 : Integral Time Factory setting: 1 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 360.0 seconds
This parameter determines how fast the PID controller will seek to eliminate any steady-state error. The smaller the setting, the faster the error will be eliminated. To eliminate the integral function entirely, set this parameter to 0.0 seconds. A lower setting will result in a more responsive system. A higher setting will result in a more stable system.
b 5 - 0 4 : Integral Value Limit ( 1 ) Factory setting: 1 0 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 %
This parameter will limit the effect that the integrator can have. It works whether the
PID controller output is positive or negative. It can also be used to prevent integrator
“wind-up.”
b 5 - 0 5 : Derivative Time Factory setting: 0 . 0 0
Range: 0.0 to 10.00 seconds
This parameter can be adjusted to increase system response to fast load or reference changes, and to reduce overshoot upon startup. To eliminate the differential function entirely, set this parameter to 0.00 seconds.
b 5 - 0 6 : PID Output Limit ( 1 ) Factory setting: 1 0 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 100.0 %
Parameter b 5 - 0 6 can be used to set the maximum effect the PID controller will have on the system. It also will limit the PID output when it is either positive or negative.
NOTE: When the PID output limit is reached, the integrator will hold and not change in value until the PID output is less than the PID output limit.
b 5 - 0 7 : PID Offset Adjustment
( 1 )
Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: -100.0 to 100.0 %
This parameter will add a fixed percentage to the PID output. It can be used to tune out small system offsets. NOTE: This parameter is set as a percentage of maximum output frequency (E 1 - 0 4) .
( 1 )
These parameters are factory set for optimum results for most applications, and generally do not need to be changed.
5-80
5 . 3 6 P I D C O N T R O L
Continued
b 5 - 0 8 : Output Lag Filter Time ( 1 ) Factory setting: 0 . 0 0
Range: 0.00 to 10.00 seconds
This parameter adds a filter to the PID output to keep it from changing too quickly.
The higher the setting, the slower the PID output will change.
b 5 - 0 9 : PID Output Selection Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
Setting
0
(Not Inverted)
1
(Inverted)
Description
The output of the PID controller will decrease when there is an increase in feedback level.
The output of the PID controller will increase when there is an increase in the feedback level.
b 5 - 1 0 : PID Output Selection ( 1 ) Factory setting: 1 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 25.0
This parameter is a multiplier in the output of the PID controller. Increasing this parameter will make the PID controller more responsive. Be careful not to increase this parameter too much or the drive/system will become unstable.
b 5 - 1 1 : PID Output Reverse Selection Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
Setting
0
1
Description
If the PID controller calls for a “negative” speed (reverse), the drive/motor will stop.
If the PID controller calls for a “negative” speed (reverse), the drive/motor will run in reverse.
All of these parameters are interactive, and will need to be adjusted until the control loop is properly tuned, i.e. stable with minimal steady-state error. A general procedure for tuning these parameters is as follows:
1 .
Adjust Proportional Gain until continuous oscillations in the Controlled
Variable are at a minimum.
2 .
The addition of Integral Time will cause the steady-state error to approach zero. The time should be adjusted so that this minimal error is attained as fast as possible, without making the system oscillate.
3 .
If necessary, adjust derivative time to reduce overshoot during startup.
The drive’s accel and decel rate times can also be used for this purpose.
( 1 ) These parameters are factory set for optimum results for most applications, and generally don’t need to be changed.
5-81
5 . 3 6 P I D C O N T R O L
Continued
E .
F e e d b a c k L o s s D e t e c t i o n
Setting
0
1
2
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 2
b 5 - 1 2 : Feedback Loss Detection Selection
Description
Feedback loss detection is disabled
Feedback loss detection is enabled - alarm only
(drive continues running).
Feedback loss detection is enabled - fault (drive coasts to stop)
b 5 - 1 3 : Feedback Loss Detection Level (PID)
b 5 - 1 4 : Feedback Loss Detection
Delay Time (PID)
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 100 %
Factory setting: 1 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 25.5
When feedback loss detection is enabled (b 5 - 1 2 = data “1” or “2”), the drive will detect if the feedback signal falls below the b 5 - 1 3 level for more than the b 5 - 1 4 delay time and respond according to the setting of b 5 - 1 2.
F .
Multi-Function Input Terminals
H 1 - 0 1 t h r u H 1 - 0 6 : Multi-function Inputs
(Term. 3 thru 8)
Data 3 0 : PID Integral Reset
By programming data “30” into one of the multi-function parameters (H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 -
0 6), the corresponding multi-function input terminal (3 thru 8) will reset the integrator’s value to zero.
H 1 - 0 1 t h r u H 1 - 0 6 : Multi-function Inputs
(Term. 3 thru 8)
Data 3 1 : PID Integral Hold
By programming data “31” into one of the multi-function parameters (H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 -
0 6), the corresponding multi-function input terminal (3 thru 8) will hold the integrator’s output value. When the contact is closed (on the Multi-Function Input Terminal), whatever value the integrator is outputting will remain the same until the contact is opened.
5-82
5 . 3 7 R E S E T CODES: 2-WIRE, 3-WIRE INITIALIZATION
A 1 - 0 3 : Parameter Selection /
Initialization
Factory setting: 0
Data: 0 = No Initialization
1 1 1 0 = User Default Parameter
Initialization
2 2 2 0 = 2-Wire Control Initialization
3 3 3 0 = 3-Wire Control Initialization
By entering either " 2220 " or " 3330 " into this parameter, a reset to factory configuration (parameter initialization) is accomplished. The parameters which are NOT affected are:
A 1 - 0 0 : Language Selection
A 1 - 0 2 : Control Method
Selection
E 1 - 0 3 : V/f Pattern Selection
o 2 - 0 4 : GPD 515 Capacity
P a r a m e t e r Terminal
H 1 - 0 1
H 1 - 0 2
H 1 - 0 3
H 1 - 0 4
H 1 - 0 5
H 1 - 0 6
3
4
5
6
7
8
F a c t o r y C o n f i g u r a t i o n f o r
2 - W i r e C o n t r o l 3 - W i r e C o n t r o l
" 24 " = External Fault
" 14 " = Fault Reset
" 24 " = External Fault
" 14 " = Fault Reset
" 3 " = Multi-step Ref. Select 1 " 0 " = FWD/REV Command
" 4 " = Multi-step Ref. Select 2 " 3 " = Multi-step Ref. Select 1
" 6 " = Jog Freq. Ref.
" 8 " = External Base Block
" 4 " = Multi-step Ref. Select 2
" 6 " = Jog Freq. Ref.
(N.O. contact)
CAUTION
Know your application before using either Initialization function of A1-03 . This parameter must be set to " 0 " for Drive mode operation.
" 1110 " = User Default Parameter Initialization
" 2220 " = Factory 2-Wire Control Initialization (Maintained RUN Contact)
" 3330 " = Factory 3-Wire Control Initialization (Momentary START/STOP
Contact)
Entering either Initialization code resets all parameters to factory settings (except for A1-00, A1-02, o2-04, & E1-03), and automatically returns A1-03 setting to " 0 "
(No Initialization). If the GPD 515 is connected for 3-Wire control and this parameter is set to " 2220 " (2-Wire Control Initialization), the motor may run in reverse direction WITHOUT A RUN COMMAND APPLIED. Equipment damage or personal injury may result.
When o 2 - 0 3 = 1, the existing parameter settings become default user settings and the
" 1110 " initialization option appears in A 1 - 0 3 . When o 2 - 0 3 is not set to " 1 ", this option is not available. Anytime the A 1 - 0 3 parameter is set to " 1110 ", all parameter settings that have been changed return to the default user settings (only 50 parameters may be stored as default settings). This is NOT a Factory Initialization.
5-83
5 . 3 8 S L I P COMPENSATION
C 3 - 0 1 : Slip Compensation Gain
C 3 - 0 2 : Slip Compensation Primary Delay
Time
C 3 - 0 3 : Slip Compensation Limit
C 3 - 0 4 : Slip Compensation Selection
During Regeneration
C 3 - 0 5 : Flux Select
Factory setting: 0 . 0 *
Range: 0.0 to 2.5
* Note: Factory setting changes to
" 1 . 0 " for Flux Vector and Open
Loop Vector control methods.
Factory setting: 2 0 0 0 *
Range: 0 to 10000 ms
* Note: Factory setting changes to
" 2 0 0 " for Flux Vector and Open
Loop Vector control methods.
Factory setting: 2 0 0
Range: 0 to 250 %
Factory setting: 0
Data: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
Setting
0
1
Description
Slip Included - Flux is calculated after slip compensation is applied.
Slip Excluded - Flux is calculated after slip compensation is applied.
This parameter is only available in the open loop vector control method (A 1 - 0 2 = 2 ) .
When C 3 - 0 5 is set to 0, the motor will enter the constant horsepower range when motor speed exceeds motor rated synchronous speed. When C 3 - 0 5 = 1, the motor will enter the constant horsepower range when output frequency is equal to the motor rated frequency.
C 3 - 0 6 : Output Voltage Limit Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
Setting
0
1
Description
Disabled - Output voltage limit and slip compensation are disabled above base speed.
Enabled - Output voltage limit and slip compensation are enabled above base speed.
When the control method is set to open loop vector (A 1 - 0 2 = 2), this parameter enables and disables slip compensation when operating in the constant horsepower region (output frequency is equal to or greater than motor rated frequency). In order to achieve proper slip compensation, output voltage is reduced slightly starting at 90% of motor rated frequency.
When the control method is set to flux vector (A 1 - 0 2 = 3), a C 3 - 0 6 setting of “1” will improve torque linearity at and above base speed.
5-84
5 . 3 8 S L I P COMPENSATION
Continued
C 3 - 0 1 Slip Compensation is used to increase motor speed to account for slip; this is accomplished by boosting output frequency, with a corresponding boost in output voltage.
Sets the slip compensation gain, in increments of 0.1%. When the gain is " 1.0 ", the output frequency is increased by 1% of the E 1 - 0 6 setting at rated current. A setting of
" 0.0 " results in no slip compensation. C 3 - 0 2 & C 3 - 0 3 affect this gain as shown in the block diagram. C 3 - 0 4 determines whether the slip compensation gain will be enabled or disabled during regeneration.
Fref
d2-01 d2-02
CURRENT
DETECTOR
+
+
–
20%
C3-01
K
+
400 Hz
SOFT STARTER
SFS
INTERNAL
FREQUENCY
REFERENCE
Delay
C3-02
Limit
E1-04
x C3-03
E1-06
C3-03
E1-06 E1-04
Output Frequency
NOTE: When Fref is less than E1-09 setting, this function is disabled.
Slip Compensation Block Diagram
EXAMPLE
Desired frequency is 45 Hz
Motor slip = 2% at full load
C 3 - 0 1 = 2 . 0
Actual output frequency at full load = 45x1.02 = 45.90 Hz
45.90 Hz actual output
45 Hz command
V
2% frequency boost corresponding voltage boost f
5-85
5 . 3 9 S T A L L PREVENTION
A .
L 3 - 0 4 : Stall Prevention Selection During Decel
F u n c t i o n L 3 - 0 4
S e t t i n g
0
1
2
3
Factory setting: 1
Stall prevention during deceleration disabled. An excessively short deceleration time will generate an overvoltage fault (OV) and the drive will stop.
Stall prevention during deceleration enabled (General Purpose). The DC bus voltage level is monitored, and the deceleration rate is automatically extended to prevent an overvoltage condition. This deceleration rate may be longer than the set value (C1-02).
Stall prevention during deceleration enabled, auto adjust (Intelligent). By monitoring DC bus voltage, the deceleration rate is automatically adjusted so that deceleration can be completed in the shortest amount of time, regardless of the set deceleration time.
Stall prevention during deceleration enabled, with DB resistor. This setting lengthens decel ramp time whenever the drive goes into current limit during a deceleration.
Intended to be used when dynamic braking is installed.
Note: Not available in the flux vector control method (A1-02 = 3).
Stall prevention during deceleration automatically adjusts the deceleration rate while monitoring the DC bus voltage to prevent overvoltage during deceleration.
When the motor load is large or decel time is short, actual decel time may be longer than the set value because of stall prevention.
FREQUENCY
SET
DECEL
TIME
Controls the deceleration time needed to prevent overvoltage fault.
TIME
B .
L 3 - 0 1 : Stall Prevention Selection During Accel
S e t t i n g
0
1
2
Factory setting: 1
F u n c t i o n
Stall prevention during acceleration disabled
Stall prevention during acceleration enabled
Stall prevention during acceleration enabled, auto adjust
5-86
5 . 3 9 S T A L L PREVENTION
Continued
L 3 - 0 2 : Stall Prevention Level During Accel
Factory setting: 1 5 0
Range: 0 to 200 %
This parameter determines the actual drive output current level during an acceleration condition. Set in percent of drive rated output current (see Appendix 2). A setting of
" 200 " will disable stall prevention during acceleration.
During acceleration, if the output current exceeds the value in L 3 - 0 2 , acceleration stops and frequency is maintained. When the output current goes below the value set in L 3 - 0 2 , acceleration resumes.
In the constant horsepower region
[actual output frequency
≥ max. voltage frequency ( E 1 - 0 6 )], the stall prevention level during acceleration is changed by the following formula:
MOTOR
CURRENT
L3-02
setting
OUTPUT
FREQ.
t t
Stall prevention level during accel (constant horsepower)
= Stall prevention level during accel (CHP) x
(L3-03)
L 3 - 0 3 : Stall Prevention Limit During Accel (CHP)
Max. voltage frequency
Actual output frequency
Factory setting: 5 0
Range: 0 to 100 %
C.
L 3 - 0 5 : Stall Prevention Selection During Running Factory setting: 1
S e t t i n g
0
1
2
F u n c t i o n
Stall prevention during running disabled
Stall prevention during running enabled; uses Decel time 1 ( C1-02 )
Stall prevention during running enabled; uses Decel time 2 ( C1-04 )
L 3 - 0 6 : Stall Prevention Level During Running Factory setting: 1 6 0
Range: 30 to 200 %
This parameter determines the actual drive output current level while operating at set speed (frequency). Set in percent of drive rated output current (see
Appendix 2). A setting of " 200 " will disable stall prevention during running.
During running at set speed, if the output current exceeds the value set in
L 3 - 0 6 , the drive will begin to decelerate. When the output current goes below the value set in L 3 - 0 6 , acceleration begins, up to the set frequency.
MOTOR
CURRENT
L3-06
setting
OUTPUT
FREQ.
t t
5-87
5 . 4 0 S T O P P I N G METHOD
b 1 - 0 3 : Stopping Method Selection Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 3
Selects the stopping method suitable for the application.
S e t t i n g
2
3
0
1
A .
Data 0 : Deceleration to Stop
Upon removal of the FWD (REV) Run command, the motor decelerates at the deceleration rate determined by the time set in Decel Time 1
( C 1 - 0 2 ), and DC injection braking is applied immediately before stop.
If the decel time is too short or the load inertia is too large, an overvoltage ( O V ) fault may occur on a stop command — the decel time must be increased.
D e s c r i p t i o n
Deceleration (ramp) to stop
Coast to stop
Full range DC injection to stop
Coast to stop with timer
Output Frequency
Min. Output Frequency
(Frequency at DC Injection
Braking Start) ( b2-01 )
(Factory setting: 0.5 Hz)
Decel Time 1
( C1-02 )
DC Injection Braking
Time at Stop ( b2-04 )
(Factory setting: 0.5 s)
Run Command
ON
B .
Data 1 : Coast to Stop
Upon removal of the FWD (REV) Run command, the motor coasts to rest.
OFF
Output Frequency
Drive output is shut OFF when stop command is input
Run Command
ON OFF
5-88
5 . 4 0 S T O P P I N G METHOD
Continued
C .
Data 2 : Full-range DC Injection Stop
When a STOP command is issued, there is a 0.5 second time delay, before a DC injection current is applied to two phases of the motor’s stator winding. The duration of DC braking is a time period proportional to b 2 - 0 4 (at 10% output frequency) and the level of output frequency at the time the STOP command is issued.
Braking torque is 50-70% of full load motor torque.
EXAMPLE
b 2 - 0 4 = 0.5 sec (at 10% output)
Braking time at Fmax (100% output frequency) =
1 0 %
STOP
RUN CMD
OUTPUT
FREQUENCY
0.5 sec
COASTING
DC BRAKING TIME
b2-04 x 10
DC IN-
JECTION
BRAKING
TIME
b2-04
0 10% 100%
OUTPUT FREQUENCY
AT TIME OF STOP COMMAND
Full Range DC Injection Braking Stop Sequence
D .
Data 3 : Coast to Stop With Timer
When programmed for coast to stop with timer, a Run command is ignored if issued during the time the motor would normally be decelerating ( C 1 - 0 2 ), or for the minimum base block time ( L 2 - 0 3 ), whichever is longer.
Output Frequency
Decel Time 1
( C1-02 )
Coasting
Accel Time 1
( C1-01 )
Run Command
ON OFF ON OFF ON
Run Command ignored
5-89
5 . 4 1 T H E R M A L OVERLOAD PROTECTION
E 2 - 0 1 : Motor Rated Current Factory setting: See Table A3-1
Range: 0.01 to 1500.0 A
This parameter should be set according to the rated current value shown on the motor nameplate; this value must be within 10-120% percent of the drive rated current (refer to
Specifications in Appendices 2 & 3 of this manual).
L 1 - 0 1 : Motor Overload Protection Selection Factory setting: 1
Setting
0
1
Electronic Thermal Characteristics
Electronic thermal overload protection disabled
Electronic thermal overload protection enabled
L 1 - 0 2 : Motor Overload Protection Time
Constant
Factory setting: 8 . 0
Range: 0.1 to 20.0 min.
This parameter sets the electronic thermal overload relay protection time. Actual overload time can be calculated using the time from the overload characteristics curves then multiplying that time by L 1 - 0 2 / 8 .
The drive protects against motor overload with a UL-recognized, built-in electronic thermal overload relay.
The electronic thermal overload function monitors motor temperature, based on drive output current and time, to protect the motor from overheating. When the electronic thermal overload relay is enabled, an " O L 1 M o t o r O v e r l o a d e d " fault occurs, shutting
OFF the drive output and preventing excessive overheating of the motor.
When operating with one drive connected to only one motor, an external thermal relay is not needed. When operating several motors with one drive, install a thermal overload relay on each motor.
5-90
5 . 4 1 T H E R M A L OVERLOAD PROTECTION
Continued
E 1 - 0 2 : Motor Selection
Setting
0
1
2
Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 2
Electronic Thermal Characteristics
General-purpose motor (TEFC)
Blower cooled or totally enclosed non-ventilated (TEBC or TENV)
Vector Motor
This parameter sets whether a general-purpose or a blower-cooled motor is used. The motor overload detection function operates differently, as shown, for each of these two motor types.
S t a n d a r d F a n C o o l e d M o t o r O v e r l o a d C u r v e
L 1 - 0 1 = 0 & L 2 - 0 1 = 8 . 0 M i n u t e s
40 Hz
60 Hz
0 Hz
10 Hz
20 Hz
5-91
5 . 4 1 T H E R M A L OVERLOAD PROTECTION
Continued
Standard Blower Cooled Motor Overload Curve
L 1 - 0 1 = 1 & L 1 - 0 2 = 8 . 0 M i n u t e s
0 Hz
≥
5.6 Hz
V e c t o r M o t o r O v e r l o a d C u r v e
L 1 - 0 1 = 2 & L 1 - 0 2 = 8 . 0 M i n u t e s
All
Frequencies
NOTE: If a TEFC motor is going to be run at or near 100% of rated current at frequencies below 30 Hz for an extended period of time, select the blower cooled curve ( E 1 - 0 2 = 1 ) .
5-92
5 . 4 2 T O R Q U E COMPENSATION
C 4 - 0 2 : Torque Compensation Time
Constant
Factory setting: See Table A3-2
Range: 0 to 10000 ms
This parameter adjusts a time delay for the torque compensation gain. Increase to add torque stability, decrease to improve torque response.
C 4 - 0 1 : Torque Compensation Gain [ K
T
] Factory setting: 1 . 0 0
Range: 0.00 to 2.50
Sets the torque compensation, in increments of 0.1. When the motor has the same capacity as that of the drive, the gain is 1.0.
When a smaller motor is used, the gain should be set to 1.5 (typical).
460
This parameter, in conjunction with E 2 - 0 5
(Motor Line-to-Line Resistance) and E 2 - 0 7
& E 2 - 0 8 (Motor Iron Core Saturation
Coefficient 1 & 2), is used by the drive’s automatic torque boost function to match the drive’s output voltage boost to the motor load. Except for the most demanding of high starting torque applications, the factory settings of these parameters will be adequate. The factory settings are programmed to match the performance characteristics of typical AC motors.
14 V
345
230
115
AUTO TORQUE BOOST
V/F PATTERN
0
0
1.5 HZ
PROGRAMMED V/F PATTERN
(NO LOAD)
30
OUTPUT FREQUENCY
( HZ )
Example of Torque Compensation
Operation
The calculation of compensated torque uses the following formula:
Compensated Value
≈
(
√ 3
•
Vac
•
Iac
•
Cos
Φ ) – WI – Rcable
Frequency x K
T
60
Where
* WI = E 2 - 0 7, E 2 - 0 8
Rcable = E 2 - 0 5
K
T
= C 4 - 0 1
Φ = Power Factor (calculated by the drive)
* Adjusted by Auto-tune feature.
5-93
5 . 4 2 T O R Q U E COMPENSATION
Continued
C 4 - 0 3 : Forward Torque Compensation At Start
(Open Loop Vector Only)
Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: 0.0 to 200.0 %
C 4 - 0 4 : Reverse Torque Compensation At Start
(Open Loop Vector Only)
Factory setting: 0 . 0
Range: -200.0 to 0.0 %
C 4 - 0 5 : Torque Compensation At Start Time
Constant (Open Loop Vector Only)
Factory setting: 1 0
Range: 0 to 200 ms
Parameters C 4 - 0 3 thru C 4 - 0 5 help to improve the starting / breakaway torque response when using the open loop vector control method (A 1 - 0 2 = 2). The amount of torque applied at start when a forward run is commanded is set by parameter C 4 - 0 3. The amount of torque applied at start when a reverse run is commanded is set by parameter C 4 - 0 4.
The amount of time that the torque is applied is controlled by parameter C 4 - 0 5.
5-94
5 . 4 3 T O R Q U E CONTROL (COMMAND)
NOTE: This function can only be used in Flux Vector control method ( A 1 - 0 2 = 3 ).
One of two methods may be used to run the drive in torque control.
A 1 . Torque control can be set by programming parameter d 5 - 0 1 .
d 5 - 0 1 : Torque Control Selection Factory setting: 0
Setting
0
1
Control Method
Speed Control
Torque Control
OR
A 2 . Torque control can be set by programming a multi-function input terminal for Speed /
Torque Control Selection (Data 7 1 ). The drive will be in torque control when the corresponding input terminal is closed. This selection can be delayed by programming
d 5 - 0 6 for a delay time.
H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 6 : Multi-function Input
(Term. 3 thru 8)
Data 7 1 : Speed / Torque
Control Selection
d 5 - 0 6 : Speed/Torque Control Selection Timer Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 100 ms
B .
Regardless of which way torque control is selected, the torque reference will be input to the drive at terminals 16 & 17 (Multi-function analog input).
H 3 - 0 5 : Multi-function Analog Input
(Term. 16)
Data 1 3 : Torque
Reference
The scaling (with factory defaults for gain & bias) is 10V on terminal 16 = 100% of the motor rated torque.
5-95
5 . 4 3 T O R Q U E CONTROL (COMMAND)
Continued
C .
d 5 - 0 3 : Speed Limit Selection Factory setting: 1
Range: 1 or 2
d 5 - 0 4 : Speed Limit Factory setting: 0
Range: –120 to +120 %
When setting the drive for torque control, a speed limit is required. This speed limit can come from either a programmed value ( d 5 - 0 4 ), or an analog input (Term. 13 or 14).
d5-03
Setting
1
Speed Limit Source
Analog Input
(Term. 13 or 14)
2
Programmed
Value
( d5-04 )
Programming Required
Reference source needs to be set for terminals ( b1-01 = 1 )
AND the drive needs to be set for “Remote” reference
(REF light on the Digital Operator needs to be on).
and
d5-03 (Speed Limit Selection) must be set to “Analog Input”.
d5-04 is set as a percentage of the maximum frequency.
(NOTE: this value can be set to a negative value by pressing the “up arrow” or “down arrow” keys while the left-most zero is flashing on the Digital Operator display.
and
d5-03 (Speed Limit Selection) must be set to “Program Setting”.
D .
Torque compensation can be utilized by programming terminal 14 for Torque
Compensation ( H 3 - 0 9 = 14). The analog voltage present on terminal 14 will determine torque compensation value.
E .
d 5 - 0 2 : Torque Reference Delay Time Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 1000 ms
This function is used to avoid excessive changes in torque, which may be caused by abnormal resonance when the torque reference changes rapidly.
TORQUE REF.
(from Term. 16)
1
1 + sT
d5-02
TORQUE
REF.
F .
d 5 - 0 5 : Speed Limit Bias Factory setting: 1 0
Range: 0 to 120 %
Sets bias value for speed limit (torque control mode only) as a percentage of maximum frequency.
5-96
5 . 4 3 T O R Q U E CONTROL (COMMAND)
G .
Simplified block diagram:
Continued
TORQUE
COMPENSATION
(TCMP)
H3-01 or H3-09 = 14
Term. 14
Φ
TORQUE
REFERENCE
(TREF)
H3-05 or H3-09 = 14
Term. 16
1
1 + ST
SPEED
LIMIT
(SLIM)
Programmed
Value ( d5-04 )
or
Term. 13
SFS
T = d5-02
MOTOR SPEED
d5-05
SPEED
LIMITING
CIRCUIT
+
+
+
TORQUE LIMIT
I q
The figure below shows the relationship between speed, speed limit, torque, and torque limit.
(+) Torque
L7-04
Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit
Speed
Limit
Torque Reference d5-05
Speed Limit
Bias d5-05
Speed Limit
Bias
(-) Speed
(+) Speed
Slope is proportional to C5-01
(-) Torque
L7-03
Forward Regenerative Torque Limit
5-97
5 . 4 4 T O R Q U E DETECTION
Torque detection is used to compare drive rated output current with the overtorque detection level. When the output current is equal to or greater than the defined level, an overtorque condition exists. This will be indicated as an " OL3 " fault on the Digital
Operator. This feature can be selected to operate over a wide range of conditions.
A .
L 6 - 0 1 : Torque Detection Selection 1
L 6 - 0 4 : Torque Detection Selection 2
Factory setting (each): 0
These parameters determine whether the torque detection function of the drive is enabled, under what conditions it will detect for overtorque, and what operation it will perform after detecting an overtorque.
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
Torque
Detection
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation After
Overtorque Detection
——
Continues
Continues
Coast to stop
Coast to stop
Detection
Condition
——
Only at set frequency
At all times except during stopping or DC injection braking
Only at set frequency
At all times except during stopping or DC injection braking
— For overtorque detection during accel or decel, set to " 2 " or " 4 ".
— For continuous operation after overtorque detection, set to " 1 " or
" 2 ". During detection, the Digital Operator displays and “ O L 3 ” a l a r m ( b l i n k i n g ) .
— To stop the drive at an overtorque detection fault, set to " 3 " or
" 4 ". At detection, the Digital Operator displays an " O L 3 " fault.
B .
L 6 - 0 2 : Overtorque Detection Level 1
L 6 - 0 5 : Overtorque Detection Level 2
Factory setting (each): 1 5 0
Range (each): 0 to 300 %
These are the reference points for determining that an overtorque condition exists. Set as a percent of drive rated current (see Appendix 2).
C .
L 6 - 0 3 : Overtorque Detection Time 1
L 6 - 0 6 : Overtorque Detection Time 2
Factory setting (each): 0 . 1
Range (each): 0.0 to 10.0 seconds
Determines how long an overtorque condition must exist before another event will occur, e.g. coast to stop, multi-function output change of state, or "
O L 3 "
warning or fault display.
5-98
5 . 4 4 T O R Q U E DETECTION
Continued
D .
H 3 - 0 5 : Multi-function Analog Input
(Term. 16)
Data 7 : External Overtorque
Detection Level Adjustment
The multi-function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of the overtorque detection level. When this function is programmed into H 3 - 0 5 , the internal overtorque detection level ( L 6 - 0 2 ) is disabled.
1R
OVERTORQUE
DETECTION
LEVEL
drive/G5
15 +15V
16 0-10V (20 K
Ω)
17
C
OVERTORQUE
DETECTION
LEVEL
200%
0%
0V 10V
VOLTAGE REFERENCE
E .
H 2 - 0 1 : Multi-function Output (Term. 9 & 10)
H 2 - 0 2 : Multi-function Output (Term. 25-27)
H 2 - 0 3 : Multi-function Output (Term. 26-27)
Data B : Overtorque
Detection
A contact, or two open collector outputs, can be programmed to change states during an overtorque detection condition.
5-99
5 . 4 4 T O R Q U E DETECTION
Continued
EXAMPLE OF OVERTORQUE DETECTION
L6-01 setting: 2 — Detect during run, energize multi-function output, display alarm
L6-02 setting: 110 % — Level at which torque detection is sensed
L6-03 setting: 1.0 s — Time delay before overtorque event occurs
H2-01 setting: B — "Torque Detection 1" multi-function output (normally open)
TORQUE
REFERENCE
110%
100%
0
60 Hz
MOTOR
SPEED
0
RUN
SIGNAL
CONTACT
OUTPUT
(TORQUE
DETECTION 1)
TERM. 9 & 10
0.5 sec
T o r q u e D e t e c t i o n T i m i n g D i a g r a m
1 sec
5-100
5 . 4 5 T O R Q U E LIMIT
A .
L 7 - 0 1 : Forward Torque Limit
L 7 - 0 2 : Reverse Torque Limit
L 7 - 0 3 : Forward Regenerative Torque Limit
L 7 - 0 4 : Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit
Factory setting (each): 2 0 0
Range (each): 0 to 300 %
These parameters provide the ability to limit the amount of torque produced by the motor in all four quadrants of operation: FWD motoring, REV motoring, FWD regen, and REV regen.
The torque limit functions as a torque current reference limit. Torque limit is active in both speed mode and torque mode.
EXAMPLE:
L 7 - 0 1 Forward Torque Limit = 1 5 0 %
L 7 - 0 2 Reverse Torque Limit = 1 5 0 %
L 7 - 0 3 Forward Regenerative Torque Limit = 2 0 %
L 7 - 0 4 Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit = 2 0 %
FWD Regen Torque Lim. = 20% REV Regen Torque Lim. = 20%
FWD. RUN
REV. RUN
H1-06 : 7
(Accel/Decel
Time Selection 1)
SPEED FEEDBACK: Sfb.
SPEED REFERENCE: Sref.
C1-01
(15 sec)
C1-03
(5 sec)
C1-02
(10 sec)
C1-04
(7.5 sec)
C1-03
Sref.
C1-01
Sfb.
C1-02
Sref.
C1-04
Sfb.
During regeneration, the regeneration torque limits have been exceeded, thus the actual speed (Sfb) doesn’t follow the speed reference (Sref). This example also demonstrates the accel/decel selection 1 ( H 1 - 0 6 data 7 ) .
5-101
5 . 4 5 T O R Q U E LIMIT
Continued
B .
H 3 - 0 5 : Multi-function Analog Input 1 Selection
(Term. 16)
Data 1 0 : FWD Torque Limit
The multi-function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of the torque limit for both FWD & REV modes. However, the analog reference controls both
FWD torque limit & REV regen torque limit.
1R
*
GPD 515/G5
15 +15V
16 0-10V (20K
Ω)
TORQUE
LIMIT
17
C
*
1R is a calibration pot only.
FWD
TORQUE
LIMIT
H3-05 = 10
100%
0%
–10V 0V 10V
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
NOTE: A minimum priority circuit is associated with the torque limit function, which means that the lowest value torque limit setting will have priority.
EXAMPLE:
Forward Torque Limit L 7 - 0 1 = 8 0 %
FWD Torque Limit (Term. 16) = 100% (10V)
The L 7 - 0 1 value will have priority over the analog reference value.
Data 1 1 : REV Torque Limit
The multi-function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of the torque limit for both FWD & REV modes. However, the analog reference controls both
REV torque limit & FWD regen torque limit.
1R
*
GPD 515/G5
15 +15V
TORQUE
LIMIT
16 0-10V (20K
Ω)
17
C
*
1R is a calibration pot only.
REV
TORQUE
LIMIT
H3-05 = 11
100%
0%
–10V 0V 10V
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
NOTE: A minimum priority circuit is associated with the torque limit function, which means that the lowest value torque limit setting will have priority.
5-102
5 . 4 5 T O R Q U E LIMIT
Continued
Data 1 2 : Regenerative Torque
Limit
The multi-function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of the torque limit for both FWD & REV modes. However, the analog reference controls both
FWD torque limit & REV regenerative torque limits.
1R
*
GPD 515/G5
15 +15V
16 0-10V (20K
Ω)
TORQUE
LIMIT
17
C
*
1R is a calibration pot only.
REGEN
TORQUE
LIMIT
H3-05 = 12
100%
0%
–10V 0V 10V
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
NOTE: A minimum priority circuit is associated with the torque limit function, which means that the lowest value torque limit setting will have priority.
Data 1 3 * : FWD & REV Torque
Limit
* NOTE: When H 3 - 0 5 is set for " 1 3 ", Terminal 16 is a torque limit ONLY if speed mode is selected ( d 5 - 0 1 = 0 ). If d 5 - 0 1 = 1 (torque mode), Terminal 16 will be a torque reference.
Data 1 5 : FWD & REV Torque
Limit
The multi-function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of the torque limit for both FWD & REV modes. However, the analog reference controls both
FWD & REV torque limits, and the FWD & REV regenerative torque limits.
1R
*
GPD 515/G5
15 +15V
16 0-10V (20K
Ω)
TORQUE
LIMIT
17
C
*
1R is a calibration pot only.
H3-05 = 15
100%
TORQUE
LIMIT
0%
0V 10V
–100%
MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT
NOTE: A minimum priority circuit is associated with the torque limit function, which means that the lowest value torque limit setting will have priority.
5-103
5 . 4 5 . 1 T W O M O T O R O P E R A T I O N
E 3 - 0 1: Control Method Selection (Motor 2) Factory setting : 2
Range : 0 to 4
Setting
0
1
2
3
V/f control
V/f with PG feedback
Open loop vector
Flux vector
Description
Parameter Description
E4-01
Maximum Output Frequency (Motor 2)
E4-02
Maximum Voltage (Motor 2)
E4-03
Base Frequency (Motor 2)
E4-04
Mid. Output Frequency (Motor 2)
E4-05
Mid. Output Voltage (Motor 2)
E4-06
Min. Output Frequency (Motor 2)
E4-07
Min. Output Voltage (Motor 2)
Factory Settings
230V Ratings 460V Ratings 600V Ratings
60.0 Hz
230.0 V
60.0 Hz
460.0 V
60.0 Hz
575.0 V
60.0 Hz
3.0 Hz
12.6 V
0.5 Hz
2.3 V
60.0 Hz
3.0 Hz
25.3 V
0.5 Hz
4.6 V
60.0 Hz
3.0 Hz
36.6 V
0.5 Hz
6.5 V
These seven parameters define the V/f pattern for motor 2. The illustration below shows how these parameters relate to each other in establishing the V/f pattern.
Vmax
(E4-02)
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
Va
(E4-05)
Vmin
(E4-07)
Fmin
(E4-06)
Fa
(E4-04)
Fbase
(E4-03)
OUTPUT FREQUENCY
Fmax
(E4-01)
Parameter E 3 - 0 1 determines which control method the drive will use when motor 2 is selected. If E 3 - 0 1 is set to a 2 or a 3, the second motor needs to be auto-tuned. First select motor 2 (via a multi-function input) then run the auto-tuning routine as described in
Section 2.2A or 2.2B. Parameters E 4 - 0 1 thru E 4 - 0 7 and E 5 - 0 1 thru E 5 - 0 6 are set when an auto-tune is executed on motor 2. If auto-tuning is not possible, use section 2.4
and the table below to manually calculate and enter the motor parameters.
Parameter Description
E5-01
Motor Rated Current (Motor 2)
E5-02
E5-03
Motor Rated Slip (Motor 2)
Motor No-load Current (Motor 2)
E5-04
E5-05
E5-06
Number of Motor Poles (Motor 2)
Motor Line-to-line Resistance (Motor 2)
Motor Leakage Inductance (Motor 2)
Set by Auto-Tune?
Equivalent Motor 1 Parameter
Yes
E2-01
Yes
Yes
E2-02
E2-03
Yes
Yes
Yes
E2-04
E2-05
E2-06
5-104
5 . 4 5 . 1 T W O M O T O R O P E R A T I O N
Continued
H 1 - 0 1 t h r u H 1 - 0 6 : Multi-function Inputs
(Term. 3 thru 8)
Data 1 6 : Motor 2 Select
This function allows the drive to control two different motors at different times. When a multi-function input is set to a data of “16”, two different sets of motor parameters can be selected with a contact closure.
Multi-Function Input
Term.
Open (Motor 1)
Closed (Motor 2)
Control Method Setting
Parameter
A1-02
E3-01
V/f Pattern
Parameters
E1-04 thru E1-13
E4-01 thru E4-07
Motor
Parameters
E2-01 thru E2-09
E5-01 thru E5-06
The table above illustrates which parameters are used when motor 1 or motor 2 is selected.
The drive needs to be in the stop condition before the multi-function input is opened or closed, otherwise a “Motor Running” warning will be displayed.
H 2 - 0 1 t h r u H 2 - 0 3 : Multi-function Outputs
(Term. 9 & 10, 25,
26, & 27)
Data 1 C : Motor 2 Selected
When a multi-function output terminal is programmed to a data of “1C”, that output will close whenever motor 2 is selected. As shown in the example below, a multi-function input selects between motor 1 and motor 2. The multi-function output will only change states when the drive is in the stopped condition in order to prevent internal drive damage.
5-105
5 . 4 6 U S E R PARAMETERS
A 2 - 0 1 t h r u A 2 - 3 2 : User Select Parameters Data: Programmable
(see below)
This function allows the user to select an exclusive list of parameters, providing a customized access level.
When the Access Level ( A 1 - 0 1 ) is set to "Advanced", the "Function A2 User
Constants" option will appear in the top level of the menu. The parameters desired for custom access are entered into A 2 - X X parameters.
After any parameters have been programmed, the "User Program" option appears in the choice of Access Levels. Choosing this option will allow only those parameters programmed in A 2 - X X to be accessed in "Programming". Up to 32 parameters may be programmed. To add parameters to or delete parameters from A 2 - X X , change the
Access Level back to Advanced.
o 2 - 0 3 : User Parameter Default Value Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 2
Setting
0
1
2
Description
Disabled
Set Default
Clears all
This parameter is used to store settings as initialization values. Set all parameters to the user-defined default values, then set o 2 - 0 3 to "1"; each changed parameter value is then accepted and stored as its initialization value. Up to 50 parameters may have data stored as their new (user-defined) initialization value.
"User Initialize" becomes available in the Initialize Parameter option ( A 1 - 0 3 ). Setting this parameter to "1110" resets all settings to the user-defined defaults, rather than to factory defaults.
5 . 4 7 V / f P A T T E R N - S T A N D A R D
E 1 - 0 3 : V/f Pattern Selection
This parameter is factory preset to " F ". Table 5-4 describes 14 other preset patterns, one of which may be better suited for your specific application and load characteristics.
However, if none of these patterns are suitable, this parameter can be set to " F " ( V / f pattern - custom). The exact pattern is then defined by the settings of E 1 - 0 4 thru
E 1 - 1 0 , described in paragraph 5.48, V/f Pattern – Custom.
5-106
T a b l e 5 - 4 . S t a n d a r d ( P r e s e t ) V / f P a t t e r n s
APPLI-
CATION SPECIFICATION
E 1 - 0 3
DATA
CATION SPECIFICATION DATA
G P
E U
N R
E P
R O
A S
L E
50Hz
0
60Hz
60Hz S a t u r a -
1
tion
50Hz
S a t u r a -
2
tion
(V)
230
(V)
230
V/f PATTERN
(NOTE 3)
APPLI-
CATION SPECIFICATION
(NOTE 3 CATION SPECIFICATION DATA
17.2
11.5
0 1.3 2.5 50 (Hz)
2
H T
I O
G R
H Q
I
N
R
T
G
T
A
U
S E
S t a r t i n g
50Hz Torque
Low
S t a r t i n g
Torque
High
S t a r t i n g
60Hz Torque
Low
E 1 - 0 3
DATA
V/f PATTERN
V/f PATTERN
(NOTE 3)
(NOTE 3)
(V)
230
8
9
A
26.4
20.7
16.1
13.8
8
0 1.3 2.5 50 (Hz)
(V)
230
9 b
1,
F
17.2
11.5
0 1.5 3 50 60 (Hz)
S t a r t i n g
Torque
High
B
A
26.4
20.7
14.9
0 1.5 3 60 (Hz)
72Hz
3
V T
A O
R R
I Q
A U
B E
L
E
❋
Variable
50Hz Torque
1
4
Variable
Torque
2
5
Variable
60Hz Torque
1
6
(V)
230
17.2
11.5
0 1.8 3.6 60 72(Hz)
(V)
230
5
57.5
40.2
4
11.5
9.2
0 1.3 25 50 (Hz)
P
O
W
E
R
S
E
O
R
C O
O P
N E
S R
T A
A T
N I
T O
N
H
90Hz
120Hz
C
(V)
230
17.2
11.5
0 2.3 4.5 60 90 (Hz)
D
(V)
230
40.2
20.7
0 3 6 60 120 (Hz)
Variable
Torque
2
7
(V)
230
7
57.5
40.2
6
11.5
9.2
0 1.5 25 60 (Hz)
180Hz
E
(V)
230
34.5
28.9
0 4.5 6 60 (Hz) 180
NOTES:
✵ Consult Yaskawa for assistance when these settings are desired (typically used for blowers, centrifugal pumps, and fans).
1. The following conditions must be considered when selecting a V/f pattern:
– Pattern matches the voltage-frequency characteristics of the motor.
– Maximum motor speed.
2. V/f pattern for high starting torque should be selected for:
– Wiring distance.
– Large voltage drop at start.
– AC reactor connected to drive input or output.
– Use of motor rated below drive max. output.
3. Patterns shown are for 230V input; for other input, multiply all (V) values by (V
IN
/230). i.e., for 460V input, multiply by 460/230 = 2. For 575V input, multiply by 575=2.5
2 3 0
5-107
5 . 4 8 V / f P A T T E R N - C U S T O M
A .
E 1 - 0 1 : Input Voltage Setting
Factory Setting: 2 3 0, 4 6 0 or 5 7 5 V
Range: 155 to 255 V (230V ratings)
310 to 510 V (460V ratings)
445 to 733 V (600V ratings)
This parameter should be set to match the rated (nominal) input voltage.
In itia l Voltage Values
230V RATINGS 460V RATINGS 600V RATINGS
B .
E 1 - 0 4 : Maximum Output Frequency
E 1 - 0 5 : Maximum Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230.0 V
E 1 - 0 6 : Base Frequency
460.0 V 575.0 V
E 1 - 0 7 : Mid. Output Frequency A
E 1 - 0 8 : Mid. Output Voltage A . . . . . . . . . .
E 1 - 0 9 : Min. Output Frequency
E 1 - 1 0 : Min. Output Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . .
E 1 - 1 1 : Mid. Output Frequency B
E 1 - 1 2 : Mid. Output Voltage B . . . . . . . . . .
E 1 - 1 3 : Base Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6 V
2.3 V
0.0 V
0.0 V
25.3 V
4.6 V
0.0 V
0.0 V
36.6 V
6.5 V
0.0 V
0.0 V
These ten parameters define the custom V/f pattern, o n l y i f E 1 - 0 3 i s s e t t o " F "
(see paragraph 5.47). The illustration below shows how these constants relate to each other in establishing the custom V/f pattern.
Vmax
( E1-05 )
V
B
( E1-12 )
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
Vbase
( E1-13 )
V
A
( E1-08 )
Vmin
( E1-10 )
Fmin
( E1-09 )
F
A
Fbase
( E1-07 ) ( E1-06 )
OUTPUT FREQUENCY
F
B
( E1-11 )
V / f C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s S e t b y E 1 - 0 4 t h r u E 1 - 1 0
Fmax
( E1-04 )
5-108
5 . 4 8 V / f P A T T E R N - C U S T O M
Continued
NOTE: To establish a V/f pattern with a straight line from Fmin to Fbase, set
F
A
= Fmin, F
B
= 0.0 Hz, and Vbase = 0.0 V. The settings of V
A
, V
B and Vbase are then disregarded and do not affect the V/f pattern.
IMPORTANT
The parameter settings are checked whenever power is applied to the drive, or each time the ENTER key is pressed while in the
Program mode. A parameter set value failure ( OPE5 ) will occur if any part of the following relationship among E 1 - 0 4 thru E 1 - 1 3 is not TRUE:
Fmax
≥ F
B
≥ Fbase ≥ F
A
≥ Fmin (unless F
A or F
B
= 0 . 0 )
5-109
5 . 4 9 Z E R O - S E R V O CONTROL
NOTE: This function can only be used in Flux Vector control method ( A 1 - 0 2 = 3 ).
A .
H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 6 : Multi-function Input
(Term. 3 thru 8)
Data 7 2 : Zero Servo Command
(for Speed control mode only)
By programming data " 72 " into one of the multi-function input parameters ( H 1 - 0 1 thru H 1 - 0 6 ), one of the multifunction input terminals (3 thru 8) becomes a zero-servo control selection input. When the input terminal (i.e.
external contact) is open, the zero-servo function is disabled, and when the contact is closed, the zero-servo function is enabled.
ZERO
SERVO o o 8
GPD 515/G5
11
The purpose of the zero-servo function is to provide 0V position control capability at zero speed. When zero-servo is enabled, and the actual speed is less than the DC Injection Start Frequency ( b 2 - 0 1 ) , the shaft position is maintained by monitoring the PG feedback pulses, and correcting the position error. However, this function doesn’t have the same capabilities of a position controller, because there is no marker pulse feedback. Therefore, it will not stop in the same position every time the servo function is enabled.
CAUTION
Applications that require decelerating large inertia loads in very short decel times may cause overshoots, and a possible runaway condition, causing equipment damage. Adjustment of zero-servo gain ( b9-01) may be required. Setting b9-01 to " 0 " may correct a runaway condition.
b 2 - 0 1 : DC Injection Braking Start Frequency Factory setting: 0 . 5
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 Hz
The speed level at which the zero-servo function is enabled is determined by b 2 - 0 1 (DC
Injection Braking Start Frequency), and the closure of the multi-function input. This function also determines operation at zero speed.
5-110
5 . 4 9 Z E R O - S E R V O CONTROL
Continued
B .
b 9 - 0 1 : Zero-Servo Gain Factory setting: 5
Range: 0 to 100
This function provides an adjustment for the position loop gain.
CAUTION
The higher the gain, the better the response. However, too high a gain can cause hunting or overshoot, and possible runaway condition.
Speed
DC Injection Braking Start Freq. ( b2-01 )
Load on
Zero Servo
Position Error position loop
(zero-servo)
Z e r o - S e r v o T i m i n g
speed loop
C .
b 9 - 0 2 : Zero-Servo Completion Width
H 2 - 0 1 thru H 2 - 0 3 : Multi-function Output
(Term. 9 & 10; 25; 26)
Factory setting: 1 0
Range: 0 to 16383 pulses
Data 3 3 : Zero-Servo
Completed
(See paragraph 5.33)
The function of b 9 - 0 2 is to set the number of pulses used for the multi-function output terminals. During zero-servo, the multi-function output will be closed (ON) until the number set into b 9 - 0 2 has been completed. After the number of pulses have been completed, the multi-function output changes to the open (OFF) state.
5-111
5 . 5 0 Z E R O SPEED CONTROL
NOTE: This function can only be used in Flux Vector control method ( A 1 - 0 2 = 3 ).
A .
b 1 - 0 5 : Zero Speed Operation Factory setting: 0
Range: 0 to 3
The setting of this parameter determines which Zero Speed mode is enabled (see figures on following pages).
S e t t i n g
2
3
0
1
D e s c r i p t i o n
Run at Frequency Reference
STOP
Run at Minimum Frequency
Run at Zero RPM
E 1 - 0 9 : Minimum Output Frequency Factory setting: 0 . 0 *
Range: 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
* Note: If control method is anything other than Flux
Vector ( A 1 - 0 2 = 3 ), the Factory Setting is 0 . 5
This parameter sets the speed reference level at which Zero Speed mode operation will activate, in accordance with the selection programmed in b 1 - 0 5 (see figures on following pages).
SPEED
REF.
A/D
A
b1-05 = 0
b1-05 = 1 or 3
0V
b1-05 = 2
E1-09
E1-09
+
–
B
SOFT START
(S-CURVE)
+
–
SPEED
FEEDBACK
ASR
SPEED
REF.
A
OUTPUT OF A/D CONVERTER
B
INPUT TO S-CURVE
E1-09
TIME
ASR OUTPUT WITH ANALOG INPUT
When the Speed Reference input is an analog signal, Zero Speed mode operation over long periods of time will cause the output to drift.
5-112
5 . 5 0 Z E R O SPEED CONTROL
Continued
b 1 - 0 5 : 0 Run at Frequency Reference
E 1 - 0 9 : (Minimum Output Frequency) ineffective
RUN / STOP RUN STOP
SPEED
REFERENCE
INTERNAL
SPEED REF
ZERO SPEED
CONTROL
ACTUAL
SPEED
ZERO SPEED
CONTROL
INTERNAL
RUN RUN STOP
b2-04
DC Injection Braking Time at Stop
b 1 - 0 5 : 1 STOP
E 1 - 0 9 : (Minimum Output Frequency) effective
5-113
5-114
5 . 5 0 Z E R O SPEED CONTROL
Continued
b 1 - 0 5 : 2 Run at Minimum Frequency
E 1 - 0 9 : (Minimum Output Frequency) effective
RUN / STOP RUN
SPEED
REFERENCE
INTERNAL
SPEED REF
E1-09
E1-09
ZERO SPEED
CONTROL
ACTUAL
SPEED
STOP
ZERO SPEED
CONTROL
INTERNAL
RUN RUN
b2-04
DC Injection Braking Time at Stop
STOP
5-115
5 . 5 0 Z E R O SPEED CONTROL
Continued
b 1 - 0 5 : 3 Run at Zero RPM
E 1 - 0 9 : (Minimum Output Frequency) effective
RUN / STOP RUN
SPEED
REFERENCE
E1-09
STOP
INTERNAL
SPEED REF
INTERNAL
RUN
ZERO SPEED
CONTROL
ACTUAL
SPEED
RUN
b2-04
DC Injection Braking
Time at Stop
STOP
ZERO SPEED
CONTROL
5-116
Section 6. FAULT INDICATION
& TROUBLESHOOTING
6 . 1 G E N E R A L
A failure in the GPD 515/G5 can fall into one of two categories, Alarm or Fault.
A blinking "Alarm" indication is a warning that a drive trouble condition will soon occur, or that a programming error has been made. The drive will continue to operate during an
"Alarm" indication.
A blinking "Minor Fault" indication is displayed during less serious faults, or when a problem exists in the external circuitry. The drive will continue to operate, and a "Minor
Fault" contact will be closed if a multi-function output is programmed for the condition.
A steady "Major Fault" indication is displayed when the drive’s Fault relay has tripped.
The motor coasts to a stop, and a fault signal output is present at control circuit terminals 18 - 20.
T a b l e 6 - 1 . F a u l t I n d i c a t i o n a n d D e t a i l s
INDICATION
(DISPLAY) FAILURE INDICATION ITEM
BUS
Option Com Err
Communication
Option Card error
SI-B communication
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
DETAILS
Communication error while drive is set for
Run Command and/or Frequency Reference from Serial Communication card.
Control data was not received when power supply
A
(
Note 2)
A
CALL
Serial Com Call
CE
Memobus Com Err
Communication error Control data was not received for 2 seconds after initial communication.
M
CF
Out of Control
CPF00
COM-ERR (OP & INV)
CPF01
COM-ERR (OP & INV)
Motor out of control
Control circuit fault 1
Control circuit fault 2
Drive cannot determine speed of motor –
Open Loop Vector Control Method ( A1-02 = 2) only.
(Note 3)
Communication between Digital Operator and drive was not established within 5 seconds after power was applied, or an internal hardware or software fault was detected on power-up.
(Note 3)
Communication errors between the Digital Operator and drive occurred for over 2 seconds after communication was last established, or an internal hardware or software fault occurred after power-up.
(Note 3)
M
M
M
6-1
T a b l e 6 - 1 . F a u l t I n d i c a t i o n a n d D e t a i l s – C o n t i n u e d
DIGITAL OPERATOR
DISPLAY DESCRIPTION DETAILS
CPF02
BB Circuit Failure
Baseblock circuit fault Drive failure.
(Note 3)
Replace Control card.
EPROM fault
CPF03
EPROM Error
Internal A/D fault
CPF04
Internal A/D Err
External A/D fault
CPF05
External A/D Err
CPF06
Option Error
CPF20
Option A/D Error
CPF21
Option CPU down
Option card connection failure
Check option card connection.
Option card failure.
(Note 3)
A/D converter fault in
Analog Speed
Reference card
Option card (AI-14B) A/D converter malfunction.
(Note 3)
Communication option card self-diagnostic error.
Communication option card failure.
CPF22
Option Type Err
Communication option card
Model code error.
CPF23
Option DPRAM Err
Communication option card
DPRAM error.
Speed deviation
DEV
Speed Deviation
E - 15
SI - F/G Com Err
SI - F/G Communications
Error
TYPE
M
M
M
M
Deviation between speed reference and speed feedback exceeded the deviation level ( F1-10
& F1-11 ). Stop mode selection possible ( F1-04 ).
A communications error occurred and b1-01=3 and/or b1-02=3.
m
(Note2)
M
(Note2)
EF
External Fault
EF0
Opt External Flt
Both FWD and REV commands were applied simultaneously
Drive is in “temporary” Ramp to Stop condition; one input command must be removed to resume operation.
External fault input from
Communication option card.
Check communication option card connection and signal.
m
M
(Note 2)
EF3
External Fault 3
EF4
External Fault 4
External fault signal at terminal 3
External fault signal at terminal 4
A fault condition has occurred in the external circuit(s) monitored by the contact providing input to the indicated terminal.
Stop mode selection possible ( H1-01 thru H1-06 ).
(See Section 5.17)
M
(Note 2)
(Note 3)
6-2
T a b l e 6 - 1 . F a u l t I n d i c a t i o n a n d D e t a i l s – C o n t i n u e d
DIGITAL OPERATOR
DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
EF5
External Fault 5
External fault signal at terminal 5
EF6
External Fault 6
External fault signal at terminal 6
TYPE
DETAILS
A fault condition has occurred in the external circuit(s) monitored by the contact providing input to the indicated terminal.
M
(Note 2)
Stop mode selection possible ( H1-01 thru H1-06).
(See Section 5.17)
(Note 3)
EF7
External Fault 7
External fault signal at terminal 7
EF8
External Fault 8
External fault signal at terminal 8
E-10
SI-F / G CPU Down
SI-F / G Communications
Error
A communications error occurred and
b1-03 = 3 and/or b1-02 = 3.
M
(Note 2)
EPROM write-in fault
m
ERR
EPROM R/W Err
FbL
Feedback Loss
GF
Ground Fault
PID Feedback Reference
Loss
Ground fault drive failure.
Cycle power, then attempt to initialize.
Replace Control card.
PID feedback reference loss detection is enabled
(b5-12 = 1 or 2) and the PID feedback input is less than the PID feedback loss detection level (b5-13) for longer than the PID feedback loss detection time (b5-14).
Drive output ground current exceeded 50% of driverated current.
m
(Note 2)
M
LF
Output Pha Loss
Drive output has open phase
Problem in drive-to-motor wiring. Enable/disable with L8-07.
M
OC
Overcurrent
Overcurrent
Drive output current exceeded 200% of drive rated current.
(Note 3)
M
OH
Heatsnk Overtemp
Cooling fin overheat Heatsink fin temperature exceeded the setting of
L8-02 .
(Note 3)
m
(Note 2)
OH1
Heatsnk MAX Temp
Drive overheat Heatsink fin temperature exceeded 105˚C (221˚F)
(Note 3), or internal cooling fan has failed.
M
Drive overheat Pre-alarm
A
OH2
Over Heat 2
OL1
Motor Overloaded
Motor overload
A multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-06) is programmed for OH2 Alarm Signal (data “B”) and the corresponding input terminal is closed.
Protects the motor. Motor thermal overload protection has tripped. L1-02 has been exceeded
(initial value: 150% for 60 sec.).
(Note 3)
M
6-3
T a b l e 6 - 1 . F a u l t I n d i c a t i o n a n d D e t a i l s – C o n t i n u e d
DIGITAL OPERATOR
DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
Drive overload
OL2
Inv Overloaded
DETAILS
Protects the drive. Drive overload protection has tripped.
OL3
Overtorque Det 1
Overtorque detect 1 Output current exceeds Overtorque Detection
Level 1 ( L6-02 ).
OL4
Overtorque Det 2
Overtorque detect 2 Output current exceeds Overtorque Detection
Level 2 ( L6-05 ).
OPE01 kVA Selection
Drive capacity selection fault
o2-04 has been changed from the correct factory setting value. Refer to Table A3-1.
OPE02
Limit
Parameter set out of range
One or more parameter values are not within the allowable setting range.
OPE03
Terminal
OPE05
Sequence Select
OPE06
PG Opt Missing
Multi-function input setting fault
Option card selection error
PG-X2 card not installed
H1-01 thru H1-06 (multi-function input)-2 or more parameters are set to the same data (other than " F " and " FF ").
See paragraph 5.32.
Frequency reference and/or run source is set for option card (b1-01=3 and/or b1-02=3), but no option card is connected.
Control method set to Flux Vector or V/F with PG, and no PG-X2 card is installed.
OPE07
Analog Selection
Multi-function analog input selection error
Both multi-function analog inputs (H3-05 and H3-09) have been programmed for the same data (except 1F) OR an
AI-14B option card is connected, the drive is programmed for 3-channel individual (F2-01=0), and a multi-function input is programmed for Option/Inverter Selection (H1-01 to H1-06=2).
TYPE
M
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
A
A
A
A
A
A
OPE08
Terminal
Selection Parameter error
A parameter has been changed that is not available in the present Control Method. Example: H1-08=72
(Zero Servo Command) is set while the drive is in
Flux Vector Control (A1-02=3), then the Control
Method is changed to Open Loop Vector (A1-02=2).
A
OPE10
V/F Ptrn Setting
OPE11
CarrFrq/ON-Delay
OPR
Oper Disconnect
V/f data setting fault
Carrier frequency parameter(s) set out of range
Operator disconnected
Occurs when the custom V/f pattern does not meet the following criteria:
( E1-04 )
≥ ( E1-06 )> ( E1-07 ) ≥ ( E1-09 )
Occurs when the carrier frequency parameters are set as follows: ( C6-01 ) > 5 kHz and ( C6-02 )
≤ 5 kHz;( C6-03 ) > 6 and ( C6-01 ) < ( C6-02 )
Digital Operator has been disconnected from drive while in Run mode.
A
A
M
(Note 2)
6-4
T a b l e 6 - 1 . F a u l t I n d i c a t i o n a n d D e t a i l s – C o n t i n u e d
DIGITAL OPERATOR
DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
OS
Overspeed
OV
DC Bus Overvolt
PF
Input Pha Loss
PGO
PG Open
DETAILS
Motor overspeed Motor speed exceeds overspeed level ( F1-08 &
F1-09 ). Stop mode selection possible ( F1-03 ).
(Note 3)
Overvoltage Detection level: Approx. 400VDC for 230V rated unit; Approx. 800V for 460VDC rated unit; approx
1050 VDC for 600V rated unit.
(Note 3) drive input phase missing Incoming power supply has an open phase, or a large imbalance exists between L1, L2 &
L3.Enable/disable with L8-05 .
PG cable wires are disconnected
Pulse generator is disconnected from the PG-X2 card (Terminal TA1).
PUF
DC Bus Fuse Open
Fuse blown
DC fuse has cleared. Check for short circuit in output circuitry. (Note 3)
RH
DynBrk Resistor
Braking resistor overheat
Braking transistor failure
Braking resistor unit temperature exceeds the allowable value. (Heatsink-mount resistor only, and only if L8-01=1).
Braking transistor failure.
RR
DynBrk Transistor
SC
Short Circuit
Short circuit on drive output terminals
Very low impedance on output of drive.
Check for correct motor wiring / capacity.
SVE
Zero Servo Fault
Zero Servo fault
Shaft position changed by more than 500,000 revolutions during zero servo operation.
UV
DC Bus Undervolt
UV1
DC Bus Undervolt
Momentary power loss
Main circuit undervoltage
Low voltage has been detected, but momentary power loss ride-thru is enabled ( L2-01 ), and momentary power loss ride-thru time ( L2-02 ) has not yet been exceeded. (Note 3)
Occurs 2 seconds after detection of low voltage.
Detection level: approx 190VDC for 230V rated unit; approx 380VDC for 460V rated unit; approx 546
VDC for 600V rated unit. (Note 3)
TYPE
M
(Note 2)
M
M
M
(Note 2)
M
M
M
M
M m
A
Control circuit undervoltage
Control circuit voltage is low during operation.
UV2
CTL PS Undervolt
UV3
MC Answerback
Main contactor fault
Main circuit magnetic contactor (soft charge contactor) does not operate correctly.
NOTES:
1.
A = Alarm; m = Minor Fault; M = Major Fault.
2.
The stop mode, and therefore the fault type (alarm, minor or major), is selectable.
3.
See section 6.4 for flowcharts to use in troubleshooting these fault conditions.
6-5
A
A
6 . 2 A U T O - T U N I N G F A U L T S & CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
DIGITAL OPERATOR
Tune Aborted
Data Invalid
Motor data is not correct
CORRECTIVE ACTION
• Check the input data.
• Check the drive and motor capacities.
Tune Aborted
Resistance
Line-to-line resistance not within tolerance
No-load current (magnetizing current) not within tolerance
• Check the input data.
• Check the motor wiring.
Tune Aborted
No-Load Current
Tune Aborted
Sat Coef 1
Tune Aborted
Sat Coef 2
Iron core saturation coefficient 1 not within tolerance
Iron core saturation coefficient 2 not within tolerance
Rated slip not within tolerance
Tune Aborted
Rated Slip
Tune Aborted
Accelerate
Tune Aborted
PG Direction
Tune Aborted
Motor Speed
Motor did not accelerate in • Increase acceleration time ( C1-01 ).
the specified time • Increase torque limit values ( L7-01 , -02 ) if they are reduced from factory settings.
• Uncouple the motor from the load.
Encoder phasing opposite that of motor phasing
• Swap two motor leads.
OR
• Swap channels on the input to the PG-X2 card
(on terminal block TA1, swap wires at terminals
4 & 6 and swap wires at terminals 5 & 7).
Torque reference exceeded • Uncouple motor from load.
100% during auto-tuning • Increase acceleration time ( C1-01 ).
• Check input data, especially the encoder PPR
( F1-01 ).
Torque reference exceeded
20% during auto-tuning
Tune Aborted
Over Load
(Displayed after completion of tuning)
Tune Aborted
Minor Fault : XXX
Tune Aborted
PG Circuit
A minor drive fault occurred • Check Table 6-1 for specific minor fault indicated by “XXX.”
PG cable wires are disconnected
• Pulse generator is disconnected from the PG-X2 card (Terminal TA1).
Check PG wiring.
6-6
6 . 3 D I S P L A Y I N G FAULTS
A . Displaying F a u l t Conditions
Whenever the fault relay trips (drive shutdown), the fault that caused the trip (except for
Illegal Constant or Control Function Hardware) is entered into non-volatile RAM. The drive also retains the operating conditions when the fault occurred.
These conditions can only be displayed when the drive is in the Drive mode (DRIVE light is on).
DESCRIPTION
If a major fault has just occurred, but the drive
has not been reset, proceed directly to Step A.
T a b l e 6 - 2 . D i s p l a y i n g F a u l t C o n d i t i o n s
KEY SEQUENCE
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
(See Note 1)
The DRIVE and STOP lights are illuminated, and the FWD, REV,
SEQ, & REF lights are flashing.
EF3
External Fault 3
If the drive has been reset, the conditions at the last fault can still be displayed:
Press
MENU
then
, then
DATA
ENTER
4 times
,
Function U2
Fault Trace
Current Fault
None
Press
DATA
ENTER
Proceed to Step A.
Step A
Display the frequency reference Press that was present when the fault occurred.
Press
Display the output frequency that was present when the fault occurred.
Press
Last Fault
External Fault 3
Frequency Ref
U2-03= 10.00 Hz
Output Freq
U2-04= 10.00 Hz
6-7
DESCRIPTION
T a b l e 6 - 2 . D i s p l a y i n g F a u l t C o n d i t i o n s – C o n t i n u e d
KEY SEQUENCE
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
(See Note 1)
Continue pressing to cycle through all of the condition displays. These include: output current, output voltage, DC bus voltage, kWatts, input terminal status, output terminal status, operation status, and elapsed time.
NOTE: To decode the input terminal status, output terminal status, and operation status displays, refer to Appendix 1,
Table A1-10, U1-10 to U1-12.
NOTES:
1.
Actual displays will differ depending on the recorded fault and the operating conditions.
If the FWD, REV, SEQ, & REF lights are flashing, enter a RESET command (from the Digital
Operator or external signal) to prepare the drive for restart of operation.
IMPORTANT: In 2-wire control, any RUN/STOP command must be removed before the RESET will be accepted.
B . Displaying Fault History
Whenever the fault relay trips (drive shutdown), the fault that caused the trip (except for
Illegal Constant or Control Function Hardware) is entered into non-volatile RAM. The drive retains the last four faults and the operating conditions when the last fault occurred.
(NOTE: Time is in operating hours.)
These faults can only be displayed when the drive is in the Drive mode (DRIVE light is on).
The drive can be stopped or running.
DESCRIPTION
Display the fault history function menu.
T a b l e 6 - 3 . D i s p l a y i n g F a u l t H i s t o r y
KEY SEQUENCE
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
(See Note 1)
Press
MENU
, then
DATA
ENTER
, then twice
Function U3
Fault History
Display the last fault that occurred (most recent in time)
Press
DATA
ENTER
Display the second from the last fault that occurred.
Press
Last Fault
External Fault 3
Fault Message 2
Motor Overloaded
6-8
DESCRIPTION
T a b l e 6 - 3 . D i s p l a y i n g F a u l t H i s t o r y – C o n t i n u e d
KEY SEQUENCE
DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
(See Note 1)
Display the third from the last fault that occurred.
Press
Fault Message 3
DC Bus Undervolt
Display the fourth from the last fault that occurred.
Display the operating hours when the last fault occurred.
Press
Press
Fault Message 4
None
NOTE: If less than four faults have occurred since the drive was initialized, "None" will appear on the Digital Operator.
Elapsed Time 1
U3-05= 57 H
Display the operating hours when the second from the last fault occurred.
Press
Press Display the operating hours when the third from the last fault occurred.
Display the operating hours when the fourth from the last fault occurred.
Press
Elapsed Time 2
U3-06= 41 H
Elapsed Time 3
U3-07= 5 H
Elapsed Time 4
U3-08= 0 H
NOTES:
1.
Actual displays will differ depending on the recorded fault and the operating conditions.
6-9
6.4 TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHARTS
If the drive malfunctions, locate the cause and take corrective action by following the flowcharts given in this section.
A. TROUBLESHOOTING MOTOR SYMPTOMS
Motor Does Not Rotate ................................................................................ Chart 6.1
Motor Stalls During Acceleration.................................................................. Chart 6.2
Motor Does Not Rotate at Set Speed .......................................................... Chart 6.3
Motor Hunting .............................................................................................. Chart 6.4
B. TROUBLESHOOTING FOR FAULT CONDITIONS
oV – Overvoltage ........................................................................................ Chart 6.5
PUF – DC Bus Fuse Open ............................................................................. Chart 6.6
oC – Overcurrent ......................................................................................... Chart 6.7
oL1 – Motor Overload ................................................................................. Chart 6.8
UV – Undervoltage ...................................................................................... Chart 6.9
oH – Heatsink Overtemp ............................................................................. Chart 6.10
CPFXX – Control Function Error ................................................................... Chart 6.11
EFX – External Fault .................................................................................... Chart 6.12
oS – Overspeed ........................................................................................... Chart 6.13
CF – Out of Control ..................................................................................... Chart 6.14
WARNING
Oscilloscope chassis may be at voltages potentially hazardous to life if not properly grounded. If oscilloscope is used to measure high voltage waveforms, use only a dual channel oscilloscope in the differential mode with X100 probes. Always connect oscilloscope chassis to earth ground.
WARNING
Voltages dangerous to life exist when equipment is open and energized. Do not work alone.
CAUTION
To prevent equipment damage always remove incoming threephase power before test equipment is connected or removed.
Never disconnect or connect the wiring while the power is applied.
6-10
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.1
MOTOR DOES NOT ROTATE
"CHARGE" LAMP
ON MAIN PC BOARD
LIT?
YES
NO
RATED VOLTAGE
ACROSS TERMINALS
L1(R), L2(S), AND L3(T)?
YES
NO
CHECK CIRCUIT
BREAKER, MAGNETIC
CONTACTOR AND
INPUT POWER.
YES
NO
(CONTROL
BY DIGITAL
OPERATOR)
RUN
LAMP
ON?
NO
(CONTROL BY
EXT. INPUTS)
DIGITAL
OPERATOR
ASSEMBLY
IS FAULTY.
REPLACE.
NO
FAULT
SHOWN ON
ALPHA-NUMERIC
DISPLAY?
YES
DISPLAY U1-10,
INPUT STATUS
3-WIRE CONTROL
STOP COMMAND
STILL ON?
(OPEN CIRCUIT
BETWEEN
TERMINALS 11 AND 2)
YES
NO
CLOSE
STOP
COMMAND
INPUT.
RUN
COMMAND ON?
(CLOSED CIRCUIT
[MOMENTARY INPUT]
BETWEEN
TERMINALS 11 AND 1)
NO
YES
INPUT RUN
COMMAND.
GO TO APPROPRIATE
CHART, 6.5 THRU 6.13.
NO
2-WIRE CONTROL
FWD RUN/STOP
& REV RUN/STOP
BOTH OFF?
(OPEN CIRCUITS FROM
YES
TERMINAL 11 TO
TERMINALS 1 AND 2)
INPUT A
RUN/STOP
COMMAND.
FWD RUN/STOP
& REV RUN/STOP
BOTH ON?
(CLOSED CIRCUITS FROM
TERMINAL 11 TO
TERMINALS 1 AND 2)
YES
NO
RELEASE
ONE
RUN/STOP
COMMAND
INPUT.
APPROX. 15VDC FROM
TERMINAL 15(+) TO 17?
YES
NO
DRIVE'S
CONTROL POWER
CIRCUIT IS FAULTY.
PROPER FREQUENCY
REFERENCE INPUT?
(TERMINAL 17(–) TO 13 ( U1-15 ),
14 ( U1-16 ), OR 16 ( U1-17 ) )
NO
YES
A
TO NEXT
PAGE
6-11
CHECK EXTERNAL
CIRCUITS FOR
PROBLEM AND
REPAIR.
CHECK CON-
NECTIONS FOR
PROBLEM AND
REPAIR.
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.1 (Continued)
A
FROM
PRECEDING
PAGE
NO
VOLTAGE PRESENT ACROSS
OUTPUT TERMINALS
T1(U), T2(V) AND T3(W)?
YES
NO
PROPER CONNECTIONS
FROM DRIVE TO
MOTOR?
YES
CONTROL METHOD?
V/F w/ PG Flux Vector V/F Open Loop Vector
DRIVE
IS FAULTY.
PROPER
CONNECTIONS
FROM DRIVE
TO PG
(ENCODER)?
NO
YES
PROPER
CONNECTIONS
FROM DRIVE
TO PG
(ENCODER)?
NO
YES
TORQUE LIMIT
SETTING
CORRECT?
YES
NO
SET TORQUE LIMIT
(ANALOG INPUT, OR
L7-01 & L7-02 ) TO
PROPER VALUE.
VOLTAGE PRESENT AT
MOTOR TERMINALS
T1(U), T2(V) AND T3(W)?
YES
NO
CHECK FOR
PROBLEM IN MOTOR,
MECHANICAL
SYSTEM OR BRAKE.
LOAD TORQUE
TOO LARGE?
NO
YES
- REDUCE LOAD
TORQUE (DISCON-
NECT LOAD).
- REPLACE DRIVE
WITH ONE OF
LARGER CAPACITY.
VOLTAGE BALANCED
(WITHIN 2%)
BETWEEN PHASES, AT
T1(U), T2(V) AND T3(W)?
YES
NO
MOTOR
IS FAULTY.
6-12
DRIVE
IS FAULTY.
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.2
MOTOR STALLS DURING ACCELERATION
CHECK IF SPECIAL
MOTOR IS USED.
ACCELERATION TIME
TOO SHORT?
NO
YES
NO
LOAD TORQUE
TOO HIGH?
YES
NO
LOAD
INERTIA
LARGE?
YES
CONTROL METHOD?
V/F Flux Vector or or
V/F w/ PG Open Loop Vector
V/f SELECTION
APPROPRIATE?
NO
YES
WITH DRIVE
IN STOPPED
CONDITION, SET
OPTIMUM V/f
PATTERN BY
REPROGRAMMING
E1-03 .
LARGE MOTOR
TERMINAL
VOLTAGE DROP?
YES
NO
WITH DRIVE IN
STOPPED CONDITION,
EXTEND ACCELER-
ATION TIME BY
REPROGRAMMING
C1-01, C1-03, C1-05,
OR C1-07 .
- USE LARGER WIRE
BETWEEN DRIVE
AND MOTOR.
- SHORTEN WIRING
DISTANCE BETWEEN
DRIVE AND MOTOR.
- DECREASE LOAD
INERTIA.
- EXTEND ACCEL-
ERATION TIME BY
REPROGRAMMING
C1-01, C1-03, C1-05,
OR C1-07 .
- DECREASE LOAD
TORQUE.
- REPLACE DRIVE
WITH ONE OF
LARGER
CAPACITY.
6-13
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.3
MOTOR DOES NOT ROTATE AT SET SPEED
YES
CORRECT MOTOR FOR
USE WITH DRIVE?
NO
CONTROL METHOD?
V/F Flux Vector or or
Open Loop Vector V/F w/ PG
CONSULT YASKAWA
ABOUT MOTOR SELECTION.
PROPER
CONNECTIONS
FROM DRIVE
TO MOTOR?
NO
YES
CHECK CON-
NECTIONS FOR
PROBLEM AND
REPAIR.
NO
IS PG
POWER SUPPLY
NORMAL?
YES
CONSULT
YASKAWA.
PROPER CONNECTIONS
FROM DRIVE TO
MOTOR AND PG?
NO
YES
CHECK CONNECTIONS
FOR PROBLEM AND
REPAIR.
PROPER FREQUENCY
REFERENCE INPUT?
(TERMINAL 17(–) TO 13 ( U1-15 ),
14 ( U1-16 ), OR 16 ( U1-17 ) )
NO
YES
ALL GROUP b PARAMETER
SETTINGS PROPER
FOR APPLICATION?
NO
YES
CHECK EXTERNAL
CIRCUITS FOR
PROBLEM AND
REPAIR.
CHECK SETTINGS;
REPROGRAM
AS REQUIRED.
CONTROL METHOD?
Flux Vector V/F or or
V/F w/ PG Open Loop Vector
NO
IS PG OUTPUT
SIGNAL NORMAL?
(See Section 6.6)
YES
EXCESSIVE
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
CHATTER?
NO
YES
APPROX. 15VDC FROM
TERMINAL 15(+) TO 17?
YES
NO
CHECK FOR
PROBLEM IN MOTOR,
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
OR BRAKE.
DRIVE'S
CONTROL POWER
CIRCUIT IS FAULTY.
DRIVE
IS FAULTY.
6-14
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.4
MOTOR HUNTING
CHECK STALL
PREVENTION
SETTINGS
( L3-01 OR L3-06 ).
CONTROL METHOD?
V/F Flux Vector or or
Open Loop Vector V/F w/ PG
PROPER PHASE SEQUENCE
OF CONNECTIONS FROM
DRIVE TO MOTOR?
YES
NO
PROPER CONNECTIONS
FROM DRIVE TO
PG (ENCODER)?
YES
NO
ALL PARAMETER SETTINGS
RELATED TO ASR PROPER
FOR APPLICATION?
NO
YES
WITH DRIVE IN STOPPED
CONDITION, REDUCE APPLICABLE
ASR PROPORTIONAL GAIN
( C5-01 OR C5-03 ) SETTING.
DOES MOTOR STILL
HUNT?
YES
NO
CHECK CONNECTIONS
FOR PROBLEM AND
REPAIR.
CHECK CONNECTIONS
FOR PROBLEM AND
REPAIR.
CHECK SETTINGS;
REPROGRAM
AS REQUIRED.
REFER TO PARA. 2.2
AND VERIFY NOISE
PROBLEM, THEN
CORRECT.
EXCESSIVE
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
CHATTER?
NO
YES
YES
ERRONEOUS
OPERATION DUE
TO NOISE?
NO
DETERMINE THE
OPTIMUM SETTING FOR
WHICH THE MOTOR
WILL NOT HUNT.
CHECK FOR
PROBLEM IN MOTOR,
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
OR BRAKE.
REDUCE ASR OUTPUT
LAG TIME ( C5-06 ) BY
SMALL AMOUNTS UNTIL
AMOUNT OF CHATTER
IS ACCEPTABLE.
DRIVE
IS FAULTY.
6-15
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.5
" oV – Overvoltage " FAULT INDICATION
IS INPUT AC SUPPLY
VOLTAGE CORRECT?
YES
NO
DECREASE TO
PROPER VOLTAGE
RANGE.
WITH DRIVE IN
STOPPED CONDITION,
INCREASE DECELER-
ATION TIME BY
REPROGRAMMING
C1-02, C1-04, C1-06,
OR C1-08 .
DOES OV TRIP
OCCUR ONLY
DURING DECEL-
ERATION?
NO
YES
ERRONEOUS
OPERATION DUE
TO NOISE?
YES
NO
REMOVE NOISE SOURCE:
• CONNECT SURGE
SUPPRESSOR TO RELAY
AND MAGNETIC CON-
TACTOR COILS.
• PROVIDE LINE FILTER
TO REMOVE NOISE ON
INPUT POWER LINE.
CONTROL SIGNALS TO
GATE DRIVE PCB ARE
FAULTY. REPLACE
CONTROL PCB.
DOES OV TRIP
STILL OCCUR
DURING DECEL-
ERATION?
YES
NO
IS BRAKING
OPTION
INSTALLED?
YES
ADD BRAKING OPTION,
OR REPLACE DRIVE
WITH ONE OF LARGER
CAPACITY.
CHECK LOAD
INERTIA
REQUIREMENTS.
6-16
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.6
" PUF – DC Bus Fuse Open " FAULT INDICATION
DISCONNECT LEADS FROM
OUTPUT TERMINALS
T1(U), T2(V) AND T3(W).
ARE MOTOR WINDINGS
SHORTED (T1 TO T2,
T2 TO T3, OR T3 TO T1)?
NO
YES
MOTOR
IS FAULTY.
ARE DRIVE
OUTPUT PHASES
SHORTED TO GROUND?
T1(U), T2(V), T3(W) TO G(E).
YES
NO
CHECK POWER TRANSISTORS
(SEE PARAGRAPH 6.5).
ARE TRANSISTORS
DAMAGED?
NO
YES
LOCATE AND
REMOVE SHORT.
REPLACE
DAMAGED POWER
TRANSISTORS.
DRIVE
IS FAULTY.
CAUTION
DO NOT REPLACE DC BUS FUSE WITHOUT
FIRST CHECKING OUTPUT TRANSISTORS.
6-17
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.7
" oC – Overcurrent " FAULT INDICATION
DOES OUTPUT
CURRENT EXCEED
200% OF RATING?
NO
YES
WITH DRIVE IN STOPPED CON-
DITION, INCREASE ACCELERATION
TIME BY REPROGRAMMING C1-01,
C1-03, C1-05, OR C1-07 , IF OC
TRIP OCCURS ONLY DURING
ACCELERATION.
OTHERWISE, REDUCE LOAD.
DOES OC TRIP
OCCUR, OR MC
ANSWERBACK
TRIP, WHEN POWER
IS TURNED ON?
YES
NO
MACHINE JAMMED
OR MOTOR
FAILURE?
NO
YES
CLEAR JAM, OR
REPLACE MOTOR.
DISCONNECT WIRING
FROM OUTPUT TERMINALS
T1, T2 AND T3 AND
CHECK LOAD IMPEDANCE.
CHECK POWER
TRANSISTORS
(SEE PARAGRAPH 6.5).
ARE TRANSISTORS
DAMAGED?
NO
YES
REPLACE
DAMAGED POWER
TRANSISTORS.
WITH DRIVE IN STOPPED
CONDITION, INCREASE
ACCELERATION TIME BY
REPROGRAMMING C1-01,
C1-03, C1-05, OR C1-07 .
DOES OC TRIP
STILL OCCUR?
NO
YES
MOTOR STARTED BY CONTACTS
WIRED BETWEEN DRIVE
AND MOTOR?
NO
YES
ERRONEOUS OPERATION
DUE TO NOISE?
NO
YES
CONTROL PCB OR GATE
DRIVE PCB IS FAULTY.
REPLACE FAULTY BOARD.
6-18
DECREASE
LOAD INERTIA.
- REWIRE TO ELIMINATE MOTOR
FULL VOLTAGE STARTING.
- REPLACE DRIVE WITH
ONE OF LARGER CAPACITY.
REMOVE NOISE SOURCE:
• CONNECT SURGE SUPPRESSOR
TO RELAY AND MAGNETIC CON-
TACTOR COILS.
• PROVIDE LINE FILTER TO
REMOVE NOISE ON INPUT
POWER LINE.
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.8
" oL1 – Motor Overload " FAULT INDICATION
LOAD TOO LARGE
(MOTOR OVERHEATED)?
NO
YES
DECREASE LOAD
WITHIN RATING.
IS DRIVE CAPACITY
( o2-04 ) FACTORY SET
CORRECTLY?
YES
NO
IS ELECTRONIC THERMAL
OVERLOAD ( L1-01 & L1-02 )
SET CORRECTLY?
NO
YES
DISCONNECT WIRING FROM
OUTPUT TERMINALS T1(U),
T2(V) AND T3(W). IS OL
STILL INDICATED?
YES
NO
ERRONEOUS OPERATION
DUE TO NOISE?
NO
YES
PG-X2 PCB, CONTROL
PCB, OR GATE DRIVE
PCB IS FAULTY.
REPLACE FAULTY BOARD.
SET ACCORDING TO
APPENDIX 3, TABLE A3-1.
WITH DRIVE IN
STOPPED CONDITION,
REPROGRAM L1-01 & L1-02 .
CHECK MOTOR
AND LOAD.
REMOVE NOISE SOURCE:
• CONNECT SURGE
SUPPRESSOR TO RELAY
AND MAGNETIC CON-
TACTOR COILS.
• PROVIDE LINE FILTER
TO REMOVE NOISE ON
INPUT POWER LINE.
6-19
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.9
" UV – Undervoltage " FAULT INDICATION
IS INPUT AC
SUPPLY
CORRECT?
YES
NO
- INCREASE VOLTAGE
WITHIN PROPER RANGE.
- CHECK WIRING BETWEEN
MAIN AC CONTACTOR
AND DRIVE.
IS THERE
AT LEAST 450VDC
(FOR 460V DRIVE) OR
225VDC (FOR 230V DRIVE)
ON THE DC BUS?
(SELECT MONITOR DISPLAY
U1-07 TO CHECK VOLTAGE)
YES
NO
ERRONEOUS OPERATION
DUE TO NOISE?
NO
YES
CONTROL PCB OR GATE
DRIVE PCB IS FAULTY.
REPLACE FAULTY BOARD.
DRIVE
IS FAULTY.
REMOVE NOISE SOURCE:
• CONNECT SURGE
SUPPRESSOR TO RELAY
AND MAGNETIC CON-
TACTOR COILS.
• PROVIDE LINE FILTER
TO REMOVE NOISE ON
INPUT POWER LINE.
6-20
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.10
" oH – Heatsink Overtemp " FAULT INDICATION
IS AMBIENT
TEMPERATURE
45°C (113°F)
OR GREATER?
NO
YES
REDUCE AMBIENT
TEMPERATURE.
IS HEAT SINK
CLEAN?
YES
NO
CLEAN HEAT
SINK.
COOLING FAN
STOPPED?
NO
YES
REPLACE
COOLING FAN.
ERRONEOUS OPERATION
DUE TO NOISE?
NO
YES
CONTROL PCB OR GATE
DRIVE PCB IS FAULTY.
REPLACE FAULTY BOARD.
REMOVE NOISE SOURCE:
• CONNECT SURGE
SUPPRESSOR TO RELAY
AND MAGNETIC CON-
TACTOR COILS.
• PROVIDE LINE FILTER
TO REMOVE NOISE ON
INPUT POWER LINE.
6-21
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.11
" CPFXX – " CONTROL FUNCTION ERROR FAULT INDICATION
TURN OFF POWER. AFTER
"CHARGE" LAMP ON MAIN
PC BOARD GOES OUT,
TURN POWER BACK ON.
IS CPF STILL
INDICATED?
NO
YES
1. CHECK THAT ALL DRIVE
HARNESS CONNECTORS,
AND CONTROL BOARD
MOUNTED PCB's, ARE
FIRMLY SEATED.
2.CHECK THAT NO NOISE
SOURCE IS PRESENT.
3. REPROGRAM A1-03 USING
FACTORY RESET CODES.
OBSERVE CAUTION
ON PAGE vii.
4. CHECK o2-04 FOR PROPER
VALUE.
NO
IS CPF STILL
INDICATED?
YES
DRIVE IS OK.
RETURN TO NORMAL
OPERATION.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
HAS DETECTED FAILURE IN
THE CPU OR PERIPHERAL
COMPONENTS.
REPLACE THE CONTROL PCB,
OR APPROPRIATE CONTROL
MOUNTED PCB.
6-22
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.12
" EFX – " EXTERNAL FAULT INDICATION
IS AN EXTERNAL FAULT SIGNAL
PRESENT (CLOSED CIRCUIT
BETWEEN TERMINAL 3 AND
11; OR OPEN CIRCUIT
BETWEEN TERMINAL 11
AND WHICHEVER TERMINAL
(4-8) HAS BEEN PROGRAMMED
FOR EXT. FAULT INPUT)?
NO
YES
FAULT HAS OCCURRED
IN CIRCUITS OUTSIDE
THE DRIVE.
TROUBLESHOOT AND
CORRECT.
CONTROL PCB IS
FAULTY. REPLACE.
6-23
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.13
" oS – Overspeed " FAULT INDICATION
CORRECT ENCODER PPR
VALUE PROGRAMMED
IN F1-01 ?
NO
YES
EXCESSIVE NOISE
ON ENCODER
SIGNAL INPUTS TO
THE DRIVE?
(See Section 6.6)
NO
YES
FORWARD DIRECTION OK,
BUT TRACKING PROBLEM
IN REVERSE DIRECTION?
NO
YES
CONSULT
YASKAWA.
RE-PROGRAM
F1-01 SETTING.
CONSULT YASKAWA
ABOUT SPECIFICATIONS OF
USER-SUPPLIED ENCODER.
ENCODER
PROBLEM.
6-24
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.14
" CF – Out of Control " FAULT INDICATION
ARE REGENERATIVE
TORQUE LIMITS SET
HIGH ENOUGH?
YES
NO
CAN DECELERATION
TIME BE EXTENDED?
NO
YES
YES
CAN MINIMUM
FREQUENCY BE
INCREASED?
NO
IS MOTOR RATED SLIP
SET PROPERLY?
YES
NO
INCREASE L7-03 AND
L7-04 .
INCREASE C1-02 (OR
C1-04 , C1-06 , OR C1-08 )
INCREASE E1-09
(TYPICALLY TO 1.5 Hz )
REPROGRAM E2-02
TO PROPER SETTING.
CONSULT
YASKAWA.
6-25
TROUBLESHOOTING C H A R T 6 . 1 5
NO DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY
NO
DISPLAY
230/460
ON
L1, L2, L3?
YES
NO
APPLY
POWER
CHARGE
LAMP
ON?
YES
NO
IS VOLTAGE
BETWEEN
TERM. 1 & 11
≈ 24 VDC?
YES
NO
IS VOLTAGE
BETWEEN
TERM. 15 & 17
+15 VDC?
YES
NO
CHECK ALL
CONNECTORS,
EXCHANGE
OPERATOR /
CABLE
DAMAGED PRECHARGE
RESISTOR, INPUT
DIODES, OR OUTPUT
TRANSISTORS
IS VOLTAGE
BETWEEN
OR TERM. 15/17
+15 VDC?
NO
EITHER CONTROL CARD
OR GATE DRIVE IS
FAULTY
REPLACE
GATE DRIVE
BOARD
6-26
6 . 5 D I O D E A N D IGBT (TRANSISTOR) MODULE RESISTANCE TEST
A .
DIODE MODULE
Measure the resistance across the module terminals with a volt-ohm meter. Set the meter at the X1 range. The measured resistance should be within the values listed in Table 6-4.
NOTE: If the DC bus fuse is blown (PUF), the values shown below may not be accurate.
+
+
–
–
WARNING
Power should be removed from L1, L2, & L3 and the CHARGE light should be out prior to conducting these tests.
Table 6-4. Diode Module Resistances
+
+
–
–
–
–
L1
L2
L3
–
+ 1
+ 1
+ 1
L1
L2
L3
2.5 to 50
Ω or
0.25 to 0.7
if using scale
0
Ω or INFINITE
L1
L2
L3
+ 2
+ 2
+ 2
+ 2
–
–
–
L1
L2
L3
–
INFINITE
LESS
THAN
1M
Ω
MAGNITUDE
OF CAP
CHARGE TO
INFINITE
0
Ω or INFINITE
RESISTANCE TEST FOR 3Ø CONVERTER MODULES (BRIDGE RECT)
+ 2 or + 1
L1
L2
L3
● ●
▲ ▲ ▲
●
●
●
▲ ▲ ▲
● ●
–
VOM RESISTANCE SCALE R x 1
+ IS THE POSITIVE POLARITY LEAD *
– IS THE NEGATIVE POLARITY LEAD
* The VOM red lead is not necessarily the positive potential in the resistance mode. For these tests the + lead refers to the positive potential. Make sure you know which polarity you have on your VOM.
6-27
B . TRANSISTOR MODULE
Measure the resistance across the module terminals with a volt-ohm meter. Set the meter to the X1 range. The measured resistance should be within the values listed in Table 6 - 5 .
NOTE: If the DC bus fuse is blown (PUF), the values shown below may not be accurate.
+
ON
B1/ + 3/ +1
B1/ + 3/ +1
B1/ + 3/ +1
T1/U
T2/V
T3/W
T1/U
T2/V
T3/W
–
–
–
Table 6-5. Transistor Module Resistances
–
ON
NORMAL
READING
(OHMS)
INFINITE
–
–
–
T1/U
T2/V
T3/W
B1/ + 3/ +1
B1/ + 3/ +1
B1/ + 3/ +1
T1
T2
T3
2.5 to 50
Ω or
0.3 to 0.7 if using scale
ABNORMAL
READING
(OHMS)
0
Ω
0
Ω or
INFINITE
RESISTANCE TEST FOR 3Ø TRANSISTOR MODULES
▲
●
▲
●
▲
B1, + 1 or + 3
●
● ●
▲
●
▲
●
▲
–
T1 or
U
T2 or
V
T3 or
W
VOM RESISTANCE SCALE R x 1
+ IS THE POSITIVE POLARITY LEAD *
- IS THE NEGATIVE POLARITY LEAD
* The VOM red lead is not necessarily the positive potential in the resistance mode. For these tests the + lead refers to the positive potential. Make sure you know which polarity you have on your VOM.
6-28
6 . 6 C H E C K I N G ENCODER PULSES
In order to check the encoder pulses, an oscilloscope is needed. The pulses can be checked after they have been processed by the PG-X2 card or at the motor.
WARNING
The following tests require power to be applied to the drive while the front cover is off. Proper precautions should be taken to prevent electric shock and damage to the equipment.
A . Checking Encoder Pulses at Test Points on the PG-X2 Card
1 . Remove power from L1, L2, & L3 and wait for the CHARGE light to go out.
2 . Connect the common of the oscilloscope to the test point labeled GND.
3 . Connect one channel of the scope to PA. (If the scope is two channel, connect the second channel to PB).
4 . Set the scope for 2V/div, 50ms/div, normal trigger, and rising edge trigger.
5 . Apply power to the GPD 515, but do N O T apply a run command.
6 . Turn the motor shaft by hand. As Figure 6-1 shows, there should be pulses on both channels at a +5V level, 50% duty cycle, and they should be separated by 90 electrical degrees (half a pulse).
7 . If one or both channels do not have the correct pulses present (i.e. missing pulses, incorrect duty cycle, improper voltage, etc.), go to procedure B.
B . C h e c k i n g t h e P u l s e s a t t h e I n p u t t o t h e P G - X 2 C a r d
1 . Remove power from L1, L2, & L3 and wait for the CHARGE light to go out.
2 . Connect the common of the scope to terminal 2 of TA1.
3 . Connect one channel of the scope to terminal 4 of TA1. (If the scope is two channel, connect the second channel to terminal 5 of TA1.)
4 . Set the scope for 5V/div, 50ms/div, normal trigger, and rising edge trigger.
5 . Apply power to the drive, but do N O T apply a run command.
6 . Turn the motor shaft by hand. As Figure 6-1 shows, there should be pulses on both channels, 50% duty cycle, and they should be the inverse of each other (separated by
180 electrical degrees).
7. Disconnect the two scope channels, and reconnect them to terminals 6 and 7 of TA1.
6-29
NOTE 1: Encoder output voltage should be at or near the encoder power supply voltage.
Figure 6-1. PG-X2 Card Inputs / Test Points
8 . Turn the motor shaft by hand. As Figure 6-1 shows, there should be pulses on both channels, 50% duty cycle, and they should be the inverse of each other (separated by
180 electrical degrees.
9 . If one or both channels do not have the correct pulses present (i.e. missing pulses, incorrect duty cycle, improper voltage, etc.), go to procedure C.
6-30
C . C h e c k i n g t h e P u l s e s a t a V C M M o t o r
1 . Remove power from L1, L2, & L3 and wait for the CHARGE light to go out.
2 . Take apart the military style connector at the motor.
3 . Connect the common of the scope to pin F.
4 . Connect one channel of the scope to pin A. (If the scope is two channel, connect the second channel to pin H.)
5 . Set the scope for 5V/div, 50ms/div, normal trigger, and rising edge trigger.
6 . Apply power to the drive, but do N O T apply a run command.
7 . Turn the motor shaft by hand. As Figure 6-1 shows, there should be pulses on both channels, 50% duty cycle, and they should be the inverse of each other (separated by
180 electrical degrees).
8 . Disconnect the two scope channels, and reconnect them to pins B and I.
9 . Turn the motor shaft by hand. As Figure 6-1 shows, there should be pulses on both channels, 50% duty cycle, and they should be the inverse of each other (separated by
180 electrical degrees).
10. If no pulses can be seen on any of the four pins (A, B, H, & I), check the power supply between pins D and F. If it is not at or near 12VDC, check the power supply back at the PG-X2 card on TA1 terminals 1 & 2. If the power supply is not good at TA1, replace the PG-X2 card.
6-31
6-32
Appendix 1. LISTING OF PARAMETERS
The GPD 515/G5 control circuits use various parameters to select functions and character-istics of the drive. For methods of changing of parameter settings, see Section
4 .
The following tables list all parameters in numerical order. For each parameter, reference paragraph(s) in Section 2 or 5 are listed (if applicable) where the features of the drive affected by that parameter are described.
PARAMETER
NUMBER
A1-00
A1-01
A1-02
A1-03
A1-04
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
Language
Selection
Parameter
T a b l e A 1 - 1 . D r i v e A X - X X P a r a m e t e r s
D E S C R I P T I O N
1 0 - 6
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
0
(See Note 1)
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 2 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
Q Q Q Q 2.3
0 : English
1 : Japanese
2 : German
3 : French
4 : Italian
5 : Spanish
6 : Portuguese
I N C R E -
M E N T
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
0 : Operation only 1 0 - 4 2 Q Q Q Q 5.4
See
Note
2
Level
Control
Method
Selection
2 : Quick-start
3 : Basic
4 : Advanced
0 : V/f control
1 : V/f with PG feedback
2 : Open loop vector
3 : Flux vector
1
Initialize
Parameters
0 : No initialize
1110 : User initialize
2220 : 2-wire initialize
3330 : 3-wire initialize
1
Enter 1
Password
0 - 3
0000 -
9999
9999
2
(See Note 1)
Q Q Q Q 2.2
0000 Q Q Q Q 5.37
A2-01
thru
A2-32
User Program Select parameters to be
Access available in User Program
Parameters Access Level
1 b1-01 o2-09
- - - A A A A 5.4
NOTES:
1 .
Settings of these parameters will not be initialized by programming A 1 - 0 3 t o
“ 1 1 1 0 ” , “ 2 2 2 0 ” , o r “ 3 3 3 0 ” .
2 .
Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level
( A 1 - 0 1 ) and Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 ; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop
Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the
Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;
— = not available.
A1-1
PARAMETER
NUMBER b1-01
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
Reference
b1-02 b1-03 b1-04 b1-05 b1-06 b1-07 b1-08
Operation
Selection
Stopping
Method
Selection
T a b l e A 1 - 2 . D r i v e b X - X X P a r a m e t e r s
D E S C R I P T I O N
0 : Digital Operator
I N C R E -
M E N T
1
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
0 - 4
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
1
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 3 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
Q Q Q Q 5.25 A,
5.28,
5.36
2 : Serial communication
3 : Option PCB
4 : EWS
0 : Digital Operator 1 0 - 4 1 Q Q Q Q 5.25 A,
5.28
2 : Serial communication
3 : Option PCB
4 : EWS
0 : Ramp to stop
1 : Coast to stop
2 : DC injection to stop
3 : Coast with timer
1 0 - 3
(See Note 1)
0 Q Q Q Q 5.10,2
5.40
0 : Enable reverse operation
1 : Disable reverse operation
1 0, 1 0 B B B B Reverse
Operation
Prohibit
Zero-Speed 0 : Run at frequency reference
(level determined by E1-09 )
2 : Run at min. freq. ( E1-09 )
3 : Run at zero speed
Logic Input
Scan Rate
0 : 2ms – 2 scans
1 : 5ms – 2 scans
Local/Remote 0 : Cycle external Run
Run Selection 1 : Accept external Run
Run Command 0 : Run command is disabled
Selection during program mode
During
Program
1 : Run command enabled during program mode
1
1
1
1
0 - 3
0, 1
0, 1
0 - 1
0
1
0
0
— — — A 5.50
A A A A
A A A A 5.32A
A A A A 5.26
b2-01
0.5
B B B B 5.10,
5.32
b2-02 b2-03 b2-04 b2-08
DC Injection
Braking Start
Frequency
DC Injection
Braking
Current
DC Injection
Braking Time at Start
DC Injection
Braking Time at Stop
Field 100% is no load current value
At Start
0.1 Hz 0.0 - 10.0
1 %
0.01
sec
0.01
sec
1%
0 - 100
0.00 - 10.00
0.00 - 10.00
0 - 500
50
0.00
0.00
0
B B B — 5.10
B B B B 5.10
B B B B 5.10
— — A A 5.10B
A1-2
PARAMETER
NUMBER b3-01 b3-02
T a b l e A 1 - 2 . D r i v e b X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
D E S C R I P T I O N
Speed Search 0 : Disabled
Selection 1 : Enabled
I N C R E -
M E N T
1
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
0, 1
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
0
(See Note 2)
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 3 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
A A A A 5.32 D
Speed Search 1 % 0 - 200 100 A — A — 5.32 D
b3-03
Current Level
Speed Search 0.1
Deceleration sec
Time
0.0 - 10.0
2.0
A — A — 5.32 D
b4-01
0.0
A A A A 5.32 E
b4-02 b5-01 b5-02 b5-03 b5-04 b5-05 b5-06 b5-07 b5-08 b5-09
Timer 0.1
Function sec
ON-Delay
Time
Timer 0.1
Function sec
OFF-Delay
Time
PID Control 0 : Disabled 1
0.0 - 300.0
0.0 - 300.0
PID Primary
Delay Time
Constant
0 - 4
Selection 2 : D=Feed forward
3 : Reference + PID
(D=Feedback)
4 : Reference + PID
(D=Feed Forward)
PID
Proportional
Gain
0.01
0.00 - 25.00
PID Integral 0.1
Time sec
PID Integral
Limit
0.0 - 360.0
0.1 % 0.0 - 100.0
PID 0.01
0.00 - 10.00
Differential sec
Time
PID Output
Limit
0.1 % 0.0 - 100.0
PID Offset 0.01 % –100.0 -
Adjustment 100.0
0.01
0.00 - 10.00
sec
PID Output
Selection
0 : Not Inverted
1 : Inverted
1 0, 1
0.0
0
1.00
1.0
100.0
0.00
100.0
0.0
0.00
0
A A A A 5.32 E
A A A A 5.36
A A A A 5.36
A A A A 5.36
A A A A 5.36
A A A A 5.36
A A A A 5.36
A A A A 5.36
A A A A 5.36
A A A A 5.36D
A1-3
PARAMETER
NUMBER b5-10
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
PID Output
Gain
T a b l e A 1 - 2 . D r i v e b X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
D E S C R I P T I O N
I N C R E -
M E N T
0.1
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
0.0 - 25.0
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
1.0
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 3 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
A A A A 5.36D
b5-11
0 A A A A 5.36D
b5-12 b5-13 b5-14 b6-01 b6-02 b6-03 b6-04
PID Output
Reverse
Selection
0 : If PID output tries to go negative, it will be limited to 0 (motor stops)
1 : PID output is allowed to go negative (motor runs in reverse)
Feedback Loss 0 : Detection is disabled
Detection
Selection (PID)
1 : Detection is enabled alarm only
2 : Detection is enabled - fault
Feedback
Loss Detection
Level (PID)
Feedback
Loss Detection
Delay Time
(PID)
Dwell
Frequency at Start
Dwell Time at Start
Dwell
Frequency at Stop
Dwell Time at Stop
1
1
1%
0.1
sec
0.1
sec
0, 1
0 - 2
0 - 100
0.0 - 25.5
0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0
0.1
sec
0.0 - 10.0
0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0
0.0 - 10.0
0
0
1.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
A A A A 5.36E
A A A A 5.36E
A A A A 5.36E
A A A A 5.14
A A A A 5.14
A A A A 5.14
A A A A 5.14
b7-01
0.1 % 0.0 - 100.0
0.0
— — — A 5.13
b7-02 b8-01 b8-02 b8-03 b8-04
Droop Control
Level
Droop Control
Delay Time
Energy-saving
Gain
Energy-saving
Frequency
Automatic 0 : Disabled
Energy-saving 1 : Enabled
Selection
Automatic
Energy-saving
Gain
0.01
0.03 - 2.00
sec
1 % 0 - 100
0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0
1
0.1
0, 1
0.0 - 10.0
0.05
80
0.0
0
Note 2
— — — A 5.13
A A — — 5.16A
A A — — 5.16A
— — A A 5.16B
— — A A 5.16B
A1-4
T a b l e A 1 - 2 . D r i v e b X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
PARAMETER
NUMBER b8-05
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
Automatic
Energy-saving
Time Constant
D E S C R I P T I O N
I N C R E -
M E N T
0.01
sec
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
0.0 - 10.0
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
Note 2
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 3 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
— — A A 5.16B
b9-01
1 0 - 100 5 — — — A 5.49
b9-02
Zero-Servo
Gain
Zero-Servo
Completion
Width
1 0 - 16383 10 — — — A 5.49
NOTES:
1 .
Setting range is only 0 and 1 when control method is set to Flux Vector control
( A 1 - 0 2 = 3 ) .
2 .
Will change with control method. See Appendix 3, Table A3-2.
3 .
Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level
( A 1 - 0 1 ) and Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2; 0 = V/f, 1 - V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop
Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the
Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;
— = not available.
A1-5
PARAMETER
NUMBER
C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
C1-05
C1-06
C1-07
C1-08
C1-09
C1-10
C1-11
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
T a b l e A 1 - 3 . D r i v e C X - X X P a r a m e t e r s
D E S C R I P T I O N
Acceleration
Time 1
Deceleration
Time 1
Acceleration
Time 2
Deceleration
Time 2
Acceleration
Time 3
Deceleration
Time 3
Acceleration
Time 4
Deceleration
Time 4
Fast-Stop
Decel. Time
Accel/Decel 0 : 0.01 seconds
Time Setting 1 : 0.1 seconds
Unit
Accel/Decel
Time Switching
Frequency
I N C R E -
M E N T
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 3 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
0.01
0.00 - 600.00
sec.
or or
0.0 - 6000.0
0.1
sec.
(Dependent upon
10.00
or
10.0
Q Q
Q Q
Q Q
Q Q
5.2
5.2
(Dependent (Dependent B B B B 5.2
upon C1-10 upon C1-10 setting) setting)
B B B B 5.2
C1-10
setting)
A A A A 5.2
1 0, 1
0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0
1
0.00
A A A A 5.2
A A A A 5.2
A A A A 5.2
B B B B 5.2
A A A A 5.2
A A A A 5.2
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
C2-04
S-Curve 0.01
Characteristic sec at Accel. Start
S-Curve 0.01
Characteristic sec at Accel. End
S-Curve 0.01
Characteristic sec at Decel. Start
S-Curve 0.01
Characteristic sec at Decel. End
0.0 - 2.50
0.0 - 2.50
0.0 - 2.50
0.0 - 2.50
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.00
A A A A 5.3
A A A A 5.3
A A A A 5.3
A A A A 5.3
A1-6
PARAMETER
NUMBER
C3-01
T a b l e A 1 - 3 . D r i v e C X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
Slip
Compensation
Gain
D E S C R I P T I O N
I N C R E -
M E N T
0.1
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
0.0 - 2.5
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 3 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
(See Note 1) B — B B 5.38
C3-02
1 ms 0 - 10000 (See Note 1) A — A — 5.38
C3-03
C3-04
Slip
Compensation
Primary Delay
Time
Slip
Compensation
Limit
Slip 0 : Disabled
1 %
1
0 - 250
0, 1
200
0
A — A — 5.38
A A A — 5.38
C3-05
Selection
During
Regeneration
Flux Select 0 : Slip Included - Flux is calculated after slip compensation is applied
1 : Slip Excluded - Flux is calculated before slip compensation is applied
1 0, 1 0 — — A — 5.38
C3-06
C4-01
C4-02
C4-03
C4-04
C4-05
Output Voltage 0 : Disabled - Output voltage
Limit limit and slip compensation are disabled above base speed
1 : Enabled - Output voltage limit and slip compensation are enabled above base speed
Torque
Compensation
Gain
Torque
Compensation
Time Constant
1
0.01
1 ms
0, 1
0.00 - 2.50
0 - 10000
0
1.00
(See Note 1)
— —
B
A
B
A
A A
B —
A —
5.38
5.42
5.42
Forward Torque
Compensation
At Start
Reverse Torque
Compensation
At Start
Torque
Compensation
At Start Time
Constant
0.1% 0.0 - 200.0
0.1%
1 ms
-200.0 - 0.0
0 - 200
0.0
0.0
10
— — A — 5.42
— —
— —
A —
A —
5.42
5.42
A1-7
PARAMETER
NUMBER
C5-01
T a b l e A 1 - 3 . D r i v e C X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
ASR
Proportional
Gain 1
D E S C R I P T I O N
I N C R E -
M E N T
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 3 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
0.01
0.00 - 300.00 (See Note 1) — B — B 5.7
C5-02
C5-03
C5-04
C5-05
ASR Integral
Time 1
ASR
Proportional
Gain 2
ASR Integral
Time 2
ASR Limit
0.001
sec
0.000 -
10.000
(See Note 1) — B — B 5.7
0.01
0.00 - 300.00 (See Note 1) — B — B 5.7
0.001
sec
0.000 -
10.000
0.1 % 0.0 - 20.0
(See Note 1) — B — B 5.7
5.0
— A — —
C5-06
C5-07
0.001
0.000 - 0.500
sec
0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0
0.004
0.0
— — — A
— — — A
5.7
5.7
C5-08
C6-01
C6-02
C6-03
C7-01
C7-02
ASR Primary
Delay Time
ASR
Switching
Frequency
ASR Integral
Limit
Carrier
Frequency
Upper Limit
Carrier
Frequency
Lower Limit
Carrier
Frequency
Proportional
Gain
Hunting
Selection
Hunting
Prevention
Gain
0 : Disabled
1 % 0 - 400
0.1
0.4 - 15.0
10.0
kHz (See Note 2) (See Note 2)
B B B B 5.8
0.1
0.4 - 15.0
10.0
kHz (See Note 2) (See Note 2)
A A — — 5.8
1
1
00 - 99 00
(See Note 2) (See Note 2)
A A — — 5.8
0, 1
0.01
0.00 - 2.50
400
1
1.00
— — — A
A A — — 5.23
A A — — 5.23
A1-8
PARAMETER
NUMBER
C8-08
C8-09
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
AFR Gain
AFR Time
T a b l e A 1 - 3 . D r i v e C X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
D E S C R I P T I O N
I N C R E -
M E N T
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
0.01
0.00 - 10.00
1 ms 0 - 2000
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
1.00
50
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 3 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
— — A — 5.6
— — A — 5.6
C8-30
Carrier
Frequency
During Auto-
Tuning
0 : Fc = 2 kHz
1 : Fc = C6-01
2 : Fc = 5 kHz
1 0, 1 2 — — A —
NOTES:
1 .
Factory setting differs depending on the control method ( A 1 - 0 2 ) .
2 .
Setting range and factory setting differ depending on drive capacity and the control method.
3 .
Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level
( A 1 - 0 1 ) and Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 ; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop
Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the
Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;
— = not available.
A1-9
PARAMETER
NUMBER d1-01 d1-02 d1-03 d1-04 d1-05 d1-06 d1-07 d1-08 d1-09
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
Frequency
Reference 1
Frequency
Reference 2
Frequency
Reference 3
Frequency
Reference 4
Frequency
Reference 5
Frequency
Reference 6
Frequency
Reference 7
Frequency
Reference 8
Jog Frequency
Reference
d2-01 d2-02 d3-01 d3-02 d3-03 d3-04
Frequency
Reference
Upper Limit
Frequency
Reference
Lower Limit
Critical
Frequency
Rejection 1
Critical
Frequency
Rejection 2
Critical
Frequency
Rejection 3
Critical
Frequency
Rejection
Width
d4-01
Frequency
Hold
Function
Selection
T a b l e A 1 - 4 . D r i v e d X - X X P a r a m e t e r s
D E S C R I P T I O N
0 : Disabled
I N C R E -
M E N T
0.1 Hz 0.00 - 400.0
0.1 Hz 0.00 - 400.0
0.1 Hz 0.00 - 400.0
0.1 Hz 0.00 - 400.0
0.1 Hz 0.00 - 400.0
0.1 Hz 0.00 - 400.0
0.1 Hz 0.00 - 400.0
0.1 Hz 0.00 - 400.0
0.1 Hz 0.00 - 400.0
0.1 % 0.0 - 110.0
0.1 % 0.0 - 109.0
0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0
0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0
0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0
0.1 Hz 0.0 - 20.0
1
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
0, 1
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
0.00
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 1 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
Q Q Q Q 5.25 B
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
6.00
100.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.0
0
Q Q Q Q 5.25 B
Q Q Q Q 5.25 B
Q Q Q Q 5.25 B
B B B B 5.25 B
B B B B 5.25 B
B B B B 5.25 B
B B B B 5.25 B
Q Q Q Q 5.24,
5.25 B
B B B B 5.22,
5.32 G
B B B B 5.22
B B B B 5.9
B B B B 5.9
B B B B 5.9
B B B B 5.9
A A A A 5.21,
5.32 G
A1-10
PARAMETER
NUMBER d4-02
T a b l e A 1 - 4 . D r i v e d X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
Trim Control
Level
D E S C R I P T I O N
I N C R E -
M E N T
1 %
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
0 - 100
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
10
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 1 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
A A A A 5.32 H
d5-01
Torque Control 0 : Speed Control 1 0, 1 0 — — — A 5.43
1 ms 0 - 1000 0 — — — A 5.43
d5-02 d5-03
Torque
Reference
Delay Time
Speed Limit
Selection
1 : Analog input
(term. 13 & 14)
2 : d5-04 setting
d5-04
Speed Limit
d5-05 d5-06
Speed Limit
Bias
Speed/Torque
Control
Switching
Timer
1 1, 2
1 % –120 - +120
1 % 0 - 120
1 ms 0 - 1000
1
0
10
0
— — — A 5.43
— — — A 5.43
— — — A 5.43
— — — A 5.43
NOTES:
1 .
Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level
( A 1 - 0 1 ) and Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 ; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop
Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the
Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;
— = not available.
A1-11
PARAMETER
NUMBER
E1-01
E1-02
E1-03
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
E1-11
E1-12
E1-13
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
Input Voltage
Setting
T a b l e A 1 - 5 . D r i v e E X - X X P a r a m e t e r s
D E S C R I P T I O N
I N C R E -
M E N T
1 V
1
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
155 - 255 230
(230V ratings) (230V ratings)
310 - 510 460
(460V ratings) (460V ratings)
445 - 733 575
(600V ratings) (600V ratings)
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 1 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
Q Q Q Q 5.48
0 - 2 0 Q Q Q Q 5.41
Motor 0 : General Purpose motor
Selection (TEFC)
1 : Blower Cooled motor
(TENV or TEBC)
2 : Vector Motor
V/f Pattern
Selection
0 to E : 15 preset V/f patterns
F : Custom pattern using E1-04 thru E1-10
Maximum
Output
Frequency
Maximum
Voltage
1 H 0 - F
0.1 Hz 40.0 - 400.0
F
60.0
Q Q -
Q Q Q Q
5.47
2.4,
5.48
2.4,
5.48
0.1 V
0.1 Hz
0.0 - 255.0
230.0
(230V ratings) (230V ratings)
0.0 - 510.0
460.0
(460V ratings) (460V ratings)
0.0 - 733.1
575.0
(600V ratings) (600V ratings)
Q Q Q Q
0.0 - 400.0
60.0
Q Q Q Q Base
Frequency
Mid. Output
Frequency A
Mid. Output
Voltage A
0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0
(See Note 1) Q Q A -
2.4,
5.48
5.48
5.48 0.1 V
0.1 Hz
0.0 - 255.0
(See Note 1) Q Q A -
12.6
(230V ratings) (460V ratings)
0.0 - 510.0
25.3
(460V ratings) (460V ratings)
0.0 - 733.1
36.3
(600V ratings) (600V ratings)
0.0 - 400.0
(See Note 1) Q Q A A 5.48
Min. Output
Frequency
Min. Output
Voltage A
5.48 0.1 V
0.1 Hz
(See Note 1) Q Q A -
0.0 - 255.0
2.3
(230V ratings) (460V ratings)
0.0 - 510.0
4.6
(460V ratings) (460V ratings)
0.0 - 733.1
6.5
(600V ratings) (600V ratings)
0.0 - 400.0
0.0
A A A A 5.48
Mid. Output
Frequency B
Mid. Output
Voltage B
0.1 V 0.0
A A Q Q 5.48
Base Voltage 0.1 V
0.0 - 255.0
(230V ratings)
0.0 - 510.0
(460V ratings)
0.0 - 733.1
(600V ratings)
0.0 - 255.0
(230V ratings)
0.0 - 510.0
(460V ratings)
0.0 - 733.1
(600V ratings)
0.0
A A Q Q 5.48
A1-12
PARAMETER
NUMBER
E2-01
T a b l e A 1 - 5 . D r i v e E X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
Motor Rated
Current
D E S C R I P T I O N
I N C R E -
M E N T
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 4 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
(See 0.00 - 1500.0 (See Note 3) Q Q Q Q 2.4,
Note 2) 5.41
E2-02
E2-03
E2-04
E2-05
E2-06
E2-07
E2-08
E2-09
E2-10
Motor Rated 0.01
0.00 - 20.00
(See Note 3) A A Q Q 2.4
Slip Hz
Motor No-load
Current
0.01 A 0.00 - 1500.0 (See Note 3) A A Q Q 2.4
2 - 48 4 — Q — Q 2.4
Number of
Motor Poles
Motor
Line-to-line
Resistance
Motor Leakage
Inductance
Motor
Iron-core
Saturation
Coefficient 1
1 pole
0.001
Ω
0.1 %
0.01
0.000 -
65.000
0.0 - 40.0
0.00 - 0.50
(See Note 3)
(See Note 3)
0.50
A A
— —
— —
A
A
A
A
A
A
2.4
2.4
2.4
Motor
Iron-core
Saturation
Coefficient 2
Motor
Mechanical
Loss
Torque
0.01
0.50 - 0.75
0.1 %
1 W
0.0 - 10.0
0 - 65535
0.75
0.0
(See
— — A A
— — — A
A A — —
2.4
2.4
E3-01
E4-01
E4-02
E4-03
Iron Loss
Control
Method
Selection
(Motor 2)
Maximum
Output
Frequency
(Motor 2)
Maximum
Voltage
(Motor 2)
0 : V/f control
1 : V/f with PG feedback
2 : Open loop vector
3 : Flux vector
1 0 - 3
0.1 Hz 40.0 - 400.0
2
(See Note 5)
Q Q Q Q 5.45.1
60.0
Q Q
Q Q 5.45.1
0.1 V
0.0 - 255.0
(230V ratings)
0.0 - 510.0
(460V ratings)
0.0 - 733.1
(600V ratings)
230.0
(230V ratings)
460.0
(460V ratings)
575.0
(600V ratings)
Q
Q Q Q
5.45.1
0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0
60.0
Q Q Q Q 5.45.1
E4-04
Base
Frequency
(Motor 2)
Mid. Output
Frequency
(Motor 2)
0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0
(See Note 1) Q Q Q Q 5.45.1
A1-13
PARAMETER
NUMBER
E4-05
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
Mid. Output
Voltage
(Motor 2)
T a b l e A 1 - 5 . D r i v e E X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
D E S C R I P T I O N
I N C R E -
M E N T
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 4 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
0.1 Hz
0.0 - 255.0
(See Note 1) Q Q Q Q 5.45.1
12.6
(230V ratings) (230V ratings)
0.0 - 510.0
25.3
(460V ratings) (460V ratings)
0.0 - 733.1
36.3
(600V ratings) (600V ratings)
E4-06
E4-07
E5-01
E5-02
E5-03
E5-04
E5-05
E5-06
Min. Output
Frequency
(Motor 2)
Min. Output
Voltage
(Motor 2)
0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0
(See Note 1) Q Q Q A 5.45.1
Rated
Current
(Motor 2)
Rated 0.01
0.00 - 20.00
(See Note 3) A A Q Q 5.45.1
Slip Hz
(Motor 2)
No-load
Current
(Motor 2)
(See 0.00 - 1500.0 (See Note 3) A A Q Q 5.45.1
Note 2)
2 poles
2 - 48 4 — A — A 5.45.1
Number of
Motor Poles
(Motor 2)
Line-to-line
Resistance
(Motor 2)
0.1 V
0.0 - 255.0
(See Note 1) Q Q Q Q 5.45.1
2.3
(230V ratings) (230V ratings)
0.0 - 510.0
4.6
(460V ratings) (460V ratings)
0.0 - 733.1
6.5
(600V ratings) (600V ratings)
(See 0.00 - 1500.0 (See Note 3) Q Q Q Q 5.45.1
Note 2) (See Note 3)
0.001
Ω
0.000 -
65.000
(See Note 3) A A A A 5.45.1
Leakage
Inductance
(Motor 2)
0.1% 0.0 - 40.0
(See Note 3) — — A A 5.45.1
NOTES: 1 . Factory setting differs depending on the selected Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 ) .
2 . Setting increment is 0.01A for models GPD515C-A003 thru -A033 (CIMR-G5M20P41F thru
27P51F), -B001 thru -B021 (40P41F thru 47P51F), and -C003 thru -C012 (51P51F thru
57P51F).
Setting increment is 0.1A for models GPD515C-A049 thru -A300 (CIMR-G5M20111F thru
20750F), -B001 thru -B011 (40111F thru 43000F), and -C017 thru -C200 (50111F thru
5 1 6 0 0 F ) .
3 . Factory setting differs depending on drive capacity.
4 . Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level
( A 1 - 0 1 ) and Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 ; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop
Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the
Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;
— = not available.
5 . Settings of these parameters will not be initialized by programming A 1 - 0 3 t o
“ 1 1 1 0 ” , “ 2 2 2 0 ” , o r “ 3 3 3 0 ” .
A1-14
PARAMETER
NUMBER
F1-01
F1-02
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
Encoder (PG)
Constant
Operation
Selection at
PG Open
T a b l e A 1 - 6 . D r i v e F X - X X P a r a m e t e r s
D E S C R I P T I O N
I N C R E -
M E N T
1 ppr
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
0 - 60000
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
1024
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 2 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
— Q — Q 2.2 B,D,
5.15 A
0 : Ramp to stop
1 : Coast to stop
2 : Fast-stop
1 0 - 3 1 — B — B 5.15 B
1 0 - 3 1 — B — B 5.15 C
F1-03
Operation
Selection at
F1-04
Operation
Selection at
0 : Ramp to stop
1 : Coast to stop
3 : Alarm only
0 : Ramp to stop
1 : Coast to stop
1 0 - 3 3 — B — B 5.15 D
F1-05
F1-06
F1-07
F1-08
F1-09
F1-10
F1-11
F1-12
F1-13
F1-14
PG Rotation 0 : Counter-clockwise
1 : Clockwise
PG Division
Rate (PG
Pulse Monitor
Effective only with control circuit board PG-B2
Integral Value 0 : Disabled
During
Accel/Decel
Selection
1 : Enable
1
1
1
Overspeed
Detection
Level
1 %
Overspeed 0.1
Detection sec
Delay Time
1 % Excessive
Speed
Deviation
Detection
Level
Excessive
Speed
Deviation
Detection
Delay Time
Number of PG
Gear Teeth 1
Number of PG
Gear Teeth 2
0.1
sec
1
1
PGo Detect 0.1
Time sec
0, 1
1 - 132
0, 1
0 - 120
0.0 - 2.0
0 - 50
0.0 - 10.0
0 - 1000
0 - 1000
0.0 - 10.0
0
1
0
115
— B — B Separate
— B
Opt. Instr.
Sheet
— — 5.15 F
(See Note 1) — A — A 5.15 C
10
0.5
0
0
2.0
— B
— A
— A
— A
— A
— A
— A
— B
— A
— A
— A
— — 5.15 G
— — 5.15 G
— A
5.15 E
5.15 C
5.15 D
5.15 D
5.15 B
A1-15
PARAMETER
NUMBER
F2-01
F3-01
T a b l e A 1 - 6 . D r i v e F X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
D E S C R I P T I O N
I N C R E -
M E N T
AI-14 Bi-polar 0 : 3-channel individual or Uni-polar 1 : 3-channel addition
Input
Selection
1
DI-16 Digital 0 : BCD 1% 5 : BCD 0.01 Hz 1
Input Option 1 : BCD 0.1 % 6 : BCD (5DG)
2 : BCD 0.01 % 0.01 Hz
3 : BCD 1 Hz 7 : Binary
4 : BCD 0.1 Hz
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
0, 1
0 - 7
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
0
0
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 2 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
B B B — Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet
B B B B Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet
F4-01
1 1 - 38 2
F4-02
F4-03
F4-04
F4-05
F4-06
F5-01
F5-02
F6-01
F7-01
AO-08 / AO-12
Channel 1
Monitor
Selection
AO-08 / AO-12
Channel 1
Gain
AO-08 / AO-12
Channel 2
Monitor
Selection
AO-08 / AO-12
Channel 2
Gain
AO-08 / AO-12
Channel 1
Bias
AO-08 / AO-12
Channel 2
Bias
DO-02
Channel 1
Output
Selection
DO-02
Channel 2
Output
Selection
DO-08 Output 0 : 8-channel individual
Selection
PO-36F
Frequency
Multiple
Selection
0 : 1 x Output frequency
1 : 6 x Output frequency
2 : 10 x Output frequency
3 : 12 x Output frequency
4 : 36 x Output frequency
0.01
0.00 - 2.50
1 1 - 38
0.01
0.00 - 2.50
0.1% -10.0 - 10.0
0.1% -10.0 - 10.0
1
1
1
1
0 - 37
0 - 37
0, 1
0 - 4
1.00
3
0.50
0.0
0.0
0
1
0
1
B B B B Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet
B B B B Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet
B B B B Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet
B B B B Separate
Option
Instr.
B B B B Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet
B B B B Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet
B B B B Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet
B B B B Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet
B B B B Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet
B B B B Separate
Option
Instr.
Sheet
A1-16
PARAMETER
NUMBER
F8-01
F9-01
F9-02
F9-03
T a b l e A 1 - 6 . D r i v e F X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
D E S C R I P T I O N
I N C R E -
M E N T
1
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
0, 1
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
1
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 2 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
B B B — Communication 0 : Rampt to Stop
Error (E-15) 1 : Coast to Stop
Detection 2 Stop
Selection 3 : Alarm Only
Option 0 : Normally Open
External Fault 1 : Normally Closed
(EFO)
Selection
Option 0 : Always Detected
External Fault 1 : Only During Run
(EFO)
Detection
Option 0 : Ramp to Stop
External Fault 1 : Coast to Stop
1
1
1
0, 1
0, 1
0 - 3
0
0
1
A A A A
A A A A
A A A A
F9-04
F9-05
F9-06
Action
Trace
Sample
Time
Torque
3 : Alarm Only
0 : Disabled
Limit
Selection
DP-RAM 0 : Ramp to Stop
Communication 1 : Coast to Stop
(BUS) Fault 2 : Fast Stop
Selection 3 : Alarm Only
1
1
1
0 - 60,000
0, 1
0 - 3
0
1
1
A A A A
— — — A
A A A A
NOTES:
1 .
Factory setting differs depending on the selected Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 ) - see
Table A3-2.
2 .
Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level
( A 1 - 0 1 ) and Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 ; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop
Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the
Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;
— = not available.
A1-17
PARAMETER
NUMBER
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
H1-01
Multi-function
Input
(Terminal 3)
H1-02
Multi-function
Input
(Terminal 4)
H1-03
Multi-function
(Terminal 5)
H1-04
Multi-function
(Terminal 6)
H1-05
Multi-function
(Terminal 7)
T a b l e A 1 - 7 . D r i v e H X - X X P a r a m e t e r s
D E S C R I P T I O N
I N C R E -
M E N T
1
1
1
1
1
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
0 - 77
0 - 77
0 - 77
0 - 77
0 - 77
H1-06
Multi-function
(Terminal 8)
1 0 - 77
H2-01
H2-02
H2-03
H3-01
H3-02
H3-03
Multi-function
Output
(Term. 9 & 10)
Multi-function
Output
(Term. 25-27)
Multi-function
Output
(Term. 26-27)
1
1
1
0 - 37
0 - 37
0 - 37
Auto Speed 0 : 0 to 10 VDC
Reference 1 VDC
Signal Level
Selection
(Terminal 13)
Auto Speed
Reference
Signal Gain
(Terminal 13)
1
0.1 %
0, 1
0.0 - 1000.0
Auto Speed 0.1 % –100.0 -
Reference +100.0
Signal Bias
(Terminal 13)
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 2 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
24
14
3 (0)
4 (3)
6 (4)
8 (6)
0
1
2
0
100.0
0.0
B B B B 5.16,
5.25,
5.32
B B B B 5.16,
5.25,
5.32
B B B B 5.16,
5.32
B B B B 5.16,
5.32
B B B B 5.16,
5.32
B B B B 5.16,
5.32
B B B B 5.33
B B B B 5.33
B B B B 5.33
B B B B 5.19
B B B B 5.18
B B B B 5.18
A1-18
PARAMETER
NUMBER
H3-04
T a b l e A 1 - 7 . D r i v e H X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
D E S C R I P T I O N
Multi-function 0 : 0 to 10 VDC
Analog Input 1 1 : ±10 VDC
Signal Level
Selection
(Terminal 16)
I N C R E -
M E N T
1
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
0, 1
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
0
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 2 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
B B B B 5.19
H3-05
0 B B B B 5.30
H3-06
H3-07
H3-08
H3-09
H3-10
H3-11
H3-12
Multi-function
Analog
Input 1
Selection
(Terminal 16)
Multi-function
Analog
Input 1 Gain
(Terminal 16)
1
0.1 %
0 - 1F
0.0 - 1000.0
Multi-function 0.1 % –100.0 -
Analog +100.0
Input 1 Bias
(Terminal 16)
1 0 - 2 Multi-function 0 : 0 to 10 VDC
Analog Input 2 1 : ±10 VDC
Signal Level 2 : 4-20 mA
Selection
(Terminal 14)
1 0 - 1F Multi-function
Analog
Input 2
Selection
(Terminal 14)
Multi-function
Analog
Input 2 Gain
(Terminal 14)
0.1 % 0.0 - 1000.0
Multi-function 0.1 % –100.0 -
Analog +100.0
Input 2 Bias
(Terminal 14)
Analog Input
Filter Time
Constant
0.01
0.00 - 2.00
sec
100.0
0.0
2
1F
100.0
0.0
0.00
B B B B 5.18
B B B B 5.18
A A A A 5.19
A A A A 5.30
A A A A 5.18
A A A A 5.18
A A A A
H4-01
H4-02
Multi-function
Analog
Monitor 1
Selection
(Terminal 21)
Multi-function
Analog
Monitor 1 Gain
(Terminal 21)
1 1 - 38
0.01
0.00 - 2.50
2
1.00
B B B B 5.31
B B B B 5.31
A1-19
PARAMETER
NUMBER
H4-03
T a b l e A 1 - 7 . D r i v e H X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
Multi-function
Analog
Monitor 1 Bias
(Terminal 21)
D E S C R I P T I O N
I N C R E -
M E N T
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
0.1 % –10.0 - +10.0
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
0.0
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 2 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
B B B B 5.31
H4-04
1 1 - 38 3 B B B B 5.31
H4-05
H4-06
H4-07
Multi-function
Analog
Monitor 2
Selection
(Terminal 23)
Multi-function
Analog
Monitor 2 Gain
(Terminal 23)
Multi-function
Analog
Monitor 2 Bias
(Terminal 23)
Multi-function 0 : 0 to 10 VDC
Analog Monitor 1 : ±10 VDC
Signal Level
Selection
(Term. 21 & 23)
0.01
0.00 - 2.50
0.1 % –10.0 - +10.0
1 0, 1
0.50
0.0
0
B B B B 5.31
B B B B 5.31
B B B B 5.31
H5-01
H5-02
H5-03
H5-04
Serial Comm.
Station
Address
Serial Comm.
0 : 1200 baud
Baud Rate 1 : 2400 baud
2 : 4800 baud
3 : 9600 baud
4 : 19.2 kbaud
Serial Comm.
0 : No parity
Parity Select 1 : Even parity
2 : Odd parity
Stopping 0 : Ramp to stop
Method After 1 : Coast to stop
Serial Comm.
2 : Fast-stop
1
1
1
1
0 - 1F
0 - 4
0 - 2
0 - 3
1F
3
0
3
A A A A 5.28
A A A A 5.28
A A A A 5.28
A A A A 5.28
H5-05
Serial Comm.
0 : Disabled
Fault Detect 1 : Enabled
1 0, 1 1 A A A A 5.28
NOTES:
1 .
Factory settings in the parentheses are values obtained at a 3-wire initialization.
2 .
Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level
( A 1 - 0 1 ) and Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 ; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop
Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the
Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;
— = not available.
A1-20
PARAMETER
NUMBER
L1-01
L1-02
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
T a b l e A 1 - 8 . D r i v e L X - X X P a r a m e t e r s
D E S C R I P T I O N
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled (Coast to Stop)
I N C R E -
M E N T
1
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
0, 1
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
1
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 4 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
B B B B 5.41
Motor
Overload
Protection
Selection
Motor 0.1
Overload min
Protection
Time Constant
0.1 - 20.0
8.0
B B B B 5.41
L2-01
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
L2-05
L2-06
L3-01
Momentary
Power Loss
Detection
Selection
Momentary
Power Loss
Ride-thru Time
0 : Disabled
1 : Power loss ride-thru
2 : CPU power active
1
0.1
sec
0 - 2
0.0 - 2.0
0
(See Note 1)
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
5.29
5.29
Momentary
Power Loss
Minimum Base
Block Time
0.1
sec
0.1 - 5.0
(See Note 1) B B B B 5.32 D
Momentary
Power Loss
Recovery
Ramp Time
0.1
sec
0.0 - 5.0
(See Note 1) A A A A 5.32 D
150 -210
190
Undervoltage 1 A A A 5.29
Detection sec
300 - 420 380
Level
(460V ratings)
431 - 603
(600V ratings)
(460V ratings)
546
(600V ratings)
KEB
Frequency
0.1 % 0.0 - 100.0
0.0
A A A A
Stall 0 : Disabled 1 0 - 2 1 B B B — 5.39
L3-02
L3-03
L3-04
Selection
During Accel
Stall
Prevention
Level During
Accel
Stall
Prevention
Level During
Accel (CHP)
Stall
2 : Intelligent (See Note 2)
0 : Disabled
Selection 2 : Intelligent (See Note 2)
During Decel 3 : Stall Prevent w/Resistor
1 %
1 %
1
0 - 200
0 - 100
0 - 3
150
50
1
B B B — 5.39
A A A — 5.39
B B B B 5.39
A1-21
PARAMETER
NUMBER
L3-05
L3-06
T a b l e A 1 - 8 . D r i v e L X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
Stall
Prevention
Selection
During
Running
Stall
Prevention
Level During
Running
D E S C R I P T I O N
0 : Disabled
1 : Decel time 1
2 : Decel time 2
I N C R E -
M E N T
1
1 %
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
0 - 2
30 - 200
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
1
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 4 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
B B — — 5.39
160 B B — — 5.39
L4-01
L4-02
L4-03
L4-04
L4-05
L5-01
L5-02
L6-01
Speed
Coincidence
Frequency
0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0
0.0
B B B B 5.33
Speed
Coincidence
Width
0.1 Hz 0.0 - 20.0
2.0
B B B B 5.33
Speed 0.1 A A 5.33
Coincidence +400.0
Frequency (±)
0.1 Hz 0.0 - 20.0
2.0
A A A A 5.33
Speed
Coincidence
Width (±)
Frequency
Reference
0 : Stop
1 : Run at 80% of frequency
Loss reference
Detection
Selection
1 0, 1 0 A A A A 5.20
1 time
0 - 10 0 B B B B 5.5
Number of
Auto Restart
Attempts
Auto Restart
Operation
Selection
Torque
Detection
Selection 1
0 : No fault relay
1 : Fault relay active
1
1
0, 1
0 - 4
0
0
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
5.5
5.44
0 : Disabled
1 : Detected during speed agree, and operation continues after detection
2 : Detected during running, and operation continues after detection
3 : Detected during speed agree, and drive faults
4 : Detected during running, and drive faults
A1-22
PARAMETER
NUMBER
L6-02
T a b l e A 1 - 8 . D r i v e L X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
D E S C R I P T I O N
1 % 0 - 300
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
150
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 4 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
B B B B 5.44
Torque
Detection
Level 1
I N C R E -
M E N T
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
L6-03
0.0 - 10.0
0.1
B B B B 5.44
L6-04
L6-05
L6-06
Torque 0.1
Detection sec
Time 1
1 Torque
Detection
Selection 2
0 : Disabled
1 : Detected during speed agree, and operation continues after detection
2 : Detected during running, and operation continues after detection
3 : Detected during speed agree, and drive faults
4 : Detected during running, and drive faults
Torque
Detection
Level 2
1 %
Torque 0.1
Detection sec
Time 2
0 - 4
0 - 300
0.0 - 10.0
0
150
0.1
A A A A 5.44
A A A A 5.44
A A A A 5.44
L7-01
1 % 0 - 300 200 — — B B 5.45
L7-02
L7-03
L7-04
L8-01
L8-02
Forward
Torque Limit
Reverse
Torque Limit
Forward
Regenerative
Torque Limit
Reverse
Regenerative
Torque Limit
Internal
Braking
Resistor
Protection
OH (Overheat)
Protection
Alarm Level
0 : Not provided
1 %
1 %
1 %
1
1 °C
0 - 300
0 - 300
0 - 300
0, 1
50 - 130
200
200
200
0
— — B B 5.45
— — B B 5.45
— — B B 5.45
B B B B 5.27
(See Note 1) A A A A 5.27
A1-23
PARAMETER
NUMBER
L8-03
T a b l e A 1 - 8 . D r i v e L X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
D E S C R I P T I O N
Operation 0 : Ramp to stop
Selection After 1 : Coast to stop
OH (Overheat) 2 : Fast-stop
I N C R E -
M E N T
1
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
0 - 3
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
3
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 4 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
A A A A 5.27
1 0, 1 0 A A A A 5.34
L8-05
L8-07
L8-10
L8-17
L8-19
Input
Protection
Selection
Output
0 : Disabled
0 : Disabled
Protection
Selection
Output Ground 0 : Disabled
Fault Detection 1 : Enabled
Selection
IGBT
Protection at Low
Frequency
0 : Conventional
1 : Lower carrier frequency when I > 100% and
Fout < 10.0 Hz
2 : Short Term OL2
(2 seconds if Fout
< 6.0 Hz and I > 175%
3 : Limit current to 150%
OL2 Selection 0 : Low frequency OL2 at Low Speed disabled
1 : Low frequency OL2 enabled
1
1
1
1
0, 1
0, 1
0 - 3
0, 1
1
1
1
0
A A A A 5.35
A A A A 5.27
A A A — 5.27
A A A A 5.27
NOTES:
1 .
Factory setting differs depending on drive capacity.
2 .
When Vector control ( A 1 - 0 2 = 2 or 3) is selected, set value 2 (Intelligent) cannot be set.
3 .
Factory setting differs depending on the Control Method selected by ( A 1 - 0 2 ) .
4 .
Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level
( A 1 - 0 1 ) and Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2 ; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop
Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the
Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;
— = not available.
A1-24
PARAMETER
NUMBER o1-01 o1-02
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
Monitor
Selection
Monitor
o1-03 o1-04 o1-05
T a b l e A 1 - 9 . D r i v e o X - X X P a r a m e t e r s
D E S C R I P T I O N
Display Units
Parameter /
1 : Frequency reference
After Power-up 3 : Output current
4 : Selected monitor
Digital
Operator
Display
Selection
Digital 0 : Hz
0 : Parameter number
I N C R E -
M E N T
1
1
1
1
1
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
4 - 38
1 - 4
0 - 39999
0, 1
0, 1
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
6
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 2 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
B B B B 5.12
1
0
0
0
B B B B 5.12
B B B B 5.11
— — — B 5.11
A A A A 5.11
o2-01 o2-02 o2-03 o2-04 o2-05 o2-06 o2-07
Display
Selection
LOCAL/ 0 : Disabled
REMOTE Key 1 : Enabled
Selection
STOP Key 0 : Disabled
1
1
During
Remote Run
User 0 : Disabled
Parameter 1 default
Default Value 2 : Clear all kVA Selection
(Drive Model
No.)
Digital
Operator
0 : Drive accepts frequency command after ENTER
1
1
1
Operated Pot" 1 : Drive accepts frequency command immediately
Operation 0 : Disabled (operation
Selection continues)
When Digital 1 : Enabled (motor coasts to
Operator is
Disconnected stop and fault is displayed
1
Elapsed 1
Operating hour
Hour Timer
Set
0, 1
0, 1
0 - 2
0 - FF
0, 1
0, 1
0 - 65535
1
1
0
(See Note 1) B B B B Table
A3-1
0
1
—
B B B B 5.26
B B B B 5.26
B B B B 5.46
A A A A 5.26
A A A A 5.26
A A A A 5.26
A1-25
T a b l e A 1 - 9 . D r i v e o X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
PARAMETER
NUMBER o2-08 o2-09
F U N C T I O N
N A M E
Elapsed
Operating
Hour Timer
Selection
Initial Mode
D E S C R I P T I O N
0 : Timer active whenever power is applied to drive
1 : Timer active whenever drive is in "run" mode
0 : Japanese Spec.
I N C R E -
M E N T
1
1
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
0, 1
0 - 2
F A C T O R Y
S E T T I N G
0
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 2 )
0 1 2 3
P A R A .
REF .
A A A A 5.26
1 A A A A
2 : European Spec.
NOTES:
1 .
Not initialized. Factory setting differs depending on the drive capacity.
2 .
Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level
( A 1 - 0 1 ) and Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop
Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the
Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;
— = not available.
A1-26
PARAMETER
NUMBER
M O N I T O R I T E M
U1-01
Frequency
Reference
U1-02
Output
Frequency
U1-03
Output Current
T a b l e A 1 - 1 0 . D r i v e U X - X X P a r a m e t e r s
D E S C R I P T I O N
D I S P L A Y
U N I T
A N A L O G M O N I T O R
O U T P U T L E V E L
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 3 )
0 1 2 3
(See 10V / max.
Note 1) output freq.
( E1-04 )
O O O O
(See 10V / max.
Note 1) output freq.
( E1-04 )
(See 10V / drive
Note 2) rated current
— —
O O O O
O O O O
O O O O
U1-04
Control Method 0 : V/f control
(4) 1 : V/f with PG feedback
2 : Open loop vector
3 : Flux vector
U1-05
Motor Speed
(4)
— O O O
U1-06
Output Voltage
U1-07
DC Bus Voltage
(4)
U1-08
Output Power
(4)
U1-09
Torque
(4)
(internal)
U1-10
Input Terminal
(4) Status
0.01 Hz 10V / max.
output freq.
( E1-04 or
E4-01 )
0.1 V
0.1 V
10V / 230V or
10V / 460V or
10V / 575V
10V / 400V or
10V / 800V or
10V / 1150V
0.1 kW 10V / drive capacity (kW)
0.1 % 10V / motor
— —
O O O O
O O O O
O O O O
— — O O
O O O O
11111111
Control circuit terminal 1 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 2 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 3 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 4 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 5 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 6 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 7 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 8 : "Closed"
U1-11
Output Terminal
(4) Status
— — O O O O
10000111
Control circuit terminals 9-10 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 25 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 26 : "Closed"
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Fault contact output active
A1-27
T a b l e A 1 - 1 0 . D r i v e U X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
PARAMETER
NUMBER
M O N I T O R I T E M
U1-12
Operation Status
(4)
D E S C R I P T I O N
11111111
D I S P L A Y
U N I T
—
A N A L O G M O N I T O R
O U T P U T L E V E L
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 3 )
0 1 2 3
— O O O O
U1-13
Elapsed
(4) Operation
Time
U1-14
Software No.
(4) (Flash ID No.)
U1-15
Control Circuit
(4) Terminal 13
Input Voltage
U1-16
Control Circuit
(4) Terminal 14
Input Voltage
U1-17
Control Circuit
(4) Terminal 16
Input Voltage
U1-18
Motor Secondary
(4) Current (Iq)
EXAMPLE: 01114
During run
During zero-speed
During reverse run
During reset signal input
During speed agree
Drive operation ready
Minor fault
Major fault
U1-19
Motor Exciting
(4)
U1-20
Output
(4)
After Soft-start
U1-21
Automatic
(4) Speed
Regulator Input
U1-22
Automatic
(4) Speed
Analog monitor output level becomes
10V / max output frequency with V/F
Regulator control.
Output
1 hour —
— —
0.1 % 10V / 10V
O O O O
O O O O
B B B B
0.1 % 10V / 10V or
10V / 20mA
B B B B
0.1 % 10V / 10V B B B B
0.1 %
0.1 %
10V / motor rated primary current
( E2-01 )
10V / motor
B B B B
— — B B current
( E2-01 )
0.01 Hz 10V / max.
0.01 %
0.01 %
A A A A
( E1-04 )
10V / max.
output freq.
( E1-04 )
— A — A
10V / motor rated primary current
( E2-01 )
— A — A
A1-28
T a b l e A 1 - 1 0 . D r i v e U X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
PARAMETER
NUMBER
M O N I T O R I T E M
U1-23
Speed Deviation
(4) Regulator Input
U1-24
PID Feedback
(4)
D E S C R I P T I O N
D I S P L A Y
U N I T
0.01 %
0.01 %
A N A L O G M O N I T O R
O U T P U T L E V E L
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 3 )
0 1 2 3
10V / max.
output freq.
( E1-04 )
— A — A
10V / max.
A A A A
( E1-04 )
U1-25
DI-16H Input
(4) Status
U1-26
Output Voltage
(4) Reference Vq
Displays an input value according to the setting of F3-01 .
—
0.1 V
— A A A A
U1-27
Output Voltage
(4) Reference Vd
0.1 V
10V / 230V or — — A A
10V / 460V or
10V / 575V
10V / 230V or — — A A
10V / 460V or
10V / 575V
U1-28
CPU ID No.
(4)
EXAMPLE: 00110 — — A A A A
0.1 % — — A A
U1-32
ACR (q-Axis)
(4) Output
U1-33
ACR (d-Axis)
(4) Output
U1-34
OPE Detected
(4)
U1-35
Zero-Servo
(4) Pulse Count
U1-36
U1-37
PID Input
PID Output
Only available with Zero-Servo function in Flux Vector control.
Displays PID Error
(Setpoint minus Feedback)
Displays PID Output
(100% = E1-04)
U1-38
PID Setpoint
U2-01
Current Fault
U2-02
Last Fault
U2-03
Frequency
Reference
U2-04
Output
Frequency
At time of most recent fault
At time of most recent fault
U2-05
Output Current At time of most recent fault
0.1 %
—
1 pulse
0.01%
0.01%
—
—
10V / 100%
10V / 100%
0.01% 10V / 100%
—
—
—
—
0.01 Hz —
0.01 Hz —
(See
Note 2)
—
— — A A
A A A A
— — — A
A A A A
A A A A
A A A A
O O O O
O O O O
O O O O
O O O O
O O O O
A1-29
T a b l e A 1 - 1 0 . D r i v e U X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
PARAMETER
NUMBER
M O N I T O R I T E M
U2-06
Motor Speed
D E S C R I P T I O N
At time of most recent fault
D I S P L A Y
U N I T
A N A L O G M O N I T O R
O U T P U T L E V E L
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 3 )
0 1 2 3
0.01 Hz — O O O O
U2-07
Output Voltage At time of most recent fault
U2-08
DC Bus Voltage At time of most recent fault
U2-09
Output kWatts At time of most recent fault
At time of most recent fault
U2-10
Torque
Reference
U2-11
Input Terminal
Status
At time of most recent fault
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0.1 V
1 V
0.1 kW
0.1 %
—
—
—
—
—
—
O O O O
O O O O
O O O O
— — — O
O O O O
Control circuit terminal 1 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 2 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 3 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 4 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 5 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 6 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 7 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 8 : "Closed"
U2-12
Output Terminal At time of most recent fault
Status
10000111
— — O O O O
Control circuit terminals 9-10 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 25 : "Closed"
Control circuit terminal 26 : "Closed"
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Fault contact output active
U2-13
Inverter Status At time of most recent fault
11111111
— — O O O O
U2-14
Elapsed Time
U3-01
Last Fault
U3-02
Fault
Message 2
During run
During zero-speed
During reverse run
During reset signal input
During speed agree
Drive operation ready
Minor fault
Major fault
At time of most recent fault
Most recent fault
2nd most recent fault
A1-30
1 hour
—
—
—
—
—
O O O O
O O O O
O O O O
T a b l e A 1 - 1 0 . D r i v e U X - X X P a r a m e t e r s – C o n t i n u e d
PARAMETER
NUMBER
M O N I T O R I T E M D E S C R I P T I O N
U3-03
Fault Message 3 3rd most recent fault
D I S P L A Y
U N I T
—
A N A L O G M O N I T O R
O U T P U T L E V E L
A C C E S S L E V E L
( S e e N o t e 3 )
0 1 2 3
— O O O O
U3-04
Fault Message 4 4th most recent (oldest) fault
U3-05
Elapsed Time 1 Of most recent fault
U3-06
Elapsed Time 2 Of 2nd most recent fault
U3-07
Elapsed Time 3 Of 3rd most recent fault
U3-08
Elapsed Time 4 Of oldest fault
—
1 hour
1 hour
1 hour
1 hour
—
—
—
—
—
O O O O
O O O O
O O O O
O O O O
O O O O
NOTES:
1 .
Display unit differs depending on setting of o 1 - 0 3 .
2 .
Display unit = 0.01A for models GPD515C-A003 thru -A033 (CIMR-G5M20P41F thru 27P51F),
-B001 thru -B021 (40P41F thru 47P51F), and -C003 thru -C012 (51P51F thru 57P51F).
Display unit = 0.1A for models GPD515C-A049 thru -A300 (CIMR-G5M20111F thru 20750F),
-B001 thru -B011 (40111F thru 43000F), and -C017 thru -C200 (50111F thru 51600F).
3 .
Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level
( A 1 - 0 1 ) and Control Method ( A 1 - 0 2; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop
Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the
Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;
— = not available.
4 .
Monitor items U 1 - 0 4, U 1 - 0 5,and U 1 - 0 7 through U 1 - 3 5 can only be viewed from within the U 1 Monitor Parameter function (i.e. press “down arrow” key, then
D A T A / E N T E R, then scroll up or down to view the desired monitor item). See paragraph 4.3, Digital Operator Menu Trees for more details.
A1-31
P A R A M E T E R
NUMBER
A1-00
A1-01
F4-02
F4-04
H3-02
H3-03
H3-06
H3-07
H3-10
H3-11
H4-02
H4-03
H4-05
H4-06 b5-02 b5-03 b5-04 b5-05 b5-06 b5-07 b5-08
C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
C1-10
C3-01
C4-01
C5-01
C5-02
C5-03
C5-04 d1-01 d1-02 d1-03 d1-04 d1-05 d1-06 d1-07 d1-08 d1-09 o1-01 o1-02
T a b l e A 1 - 1 1 . R u n O p e r a t i v e P a r a m e t e r s
F U N C T I O N N A M E
Language Selection
Parameter Access Level
Proportional Gain
Integral Time
Integral Value Limit
Derivative Time
PID Limit
Offset
Output Lag Filter Time
Acceleration Time 1
Deceleration Time 1
Acceleration Time 2
Deceleration Time 2
Accel/Decel Time Setting Unit
Slip Compensation Time
Torque Compensation Gain
ASR Proportional Gain 1
ASR Integral Time 1
ASR Proportional Gain 2
ASR Integral Time 2
Frequency Reference 1
Frequency Reference 2
Frequency Reference 3
Frequency Reference 4
Frequency Reference 5
Frequency Reference 6
Frequency Reference 7
Frequency Reference 8
Jog Frequency Reference
AO-08 / AO-12 Channel 1 Gain
AO-08 / AO-12 Channel 2 Gain
Auto Speed Reference Signal Gain (Term. 13)
Auto Speed Reference Signal Bias (Term. 13)
Multi-function Analog Input 1 Gain (Term. 16)
Multi-function Analog Input 1 Bias (Term. 16)
Multi-function Analog Input 2 Gain (Term. 14)
Multi-function Analog Input 2 Bias (Term. 14)
Multi-function Analog Monitor 1 Gain (Term. 21)
Multi-function Analog Monitor 1 Bias (Term. 21)
Multi-function Analog Monitor 2 Gain (Term. 23)
Multi-function Analog Monitor 2 Bias (Term. 23)
Monitor Selection
Monitor Selection After Power-up
P A R A . R E F .
2.3
Table A1-1
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.38
5.42
5.7
5.7
5.7
5.7
5.36
5.36
5.36
5.36
5.36
5.36
5.36
5.23, 5.25 B
5.23, 5.25 B
5.23, 5.25 B
5.23, 5.25 B
5.23, 5.25 B
5.23, 5.25 B
5.23, 5.25 B
5.23, 5.25 B
5.23, 5.25 B
Option Instr. Sheet
Option Instr. Sheet
5.18
5.18
5.18
5.18
5.18
5.18
5.31
5.31
5.31
5.31
5.12
5.12
A1-32
Appendix 2. SPECIFICATIONS
T a b l e A 2 - 1 . S t a n d a r d S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
SECTION A. Input Voltage Related Specifications
Input Power
Output Power
208 / 230V Class drive
Voltage : 3 Phase 200 / 208 / 220 / 230 VAC + 10%, – 15%
Frequency : 50 / 60 Hz ± 5%
Voltage : 0 - 230V (proportional to input voltage)
Frequency: 0 - 400 Hz (V/Hz pattern selectable)
NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE
MODEL NO.
MODEL NO.
RATED NOMINAL
CIMR-G5M GPD515CkVA HP
20P41F
20P71F
21P51F
22P21F
23P71F
25P51F
27P51F
20111F
20151F
20181F
20221F
20300F
20370F
20550F
20750F
A003
A006
A008
A011
A017
A025
A033
A049
A064
A080
A096
A130
A160
A224
A300
1.2
2.3
3.0
4.2
6.7
9.5
13
19
24
30
37
50
61
85
110
0.75
1 & 1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25 & 30
30
40 & 50
60
75
100
100% CONT.
OUTPUT
AMPS
3.2
6
8
11
17.5
25
33
49
64
80
96
130
160
224
300
RATED
INPUT
AMPS
3.9
7.2
9.6
13.2
21
30
40
59
77
88
106
143
176
247
330
RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED
MCCB INPUT
RATING (1) (AMPS) FUSING (AMPS) (2)
7
15
15
30
30
50
50
75
100
150
150
250
250
400
400
5.6
10
12
17.5
30
45
60
90
100
125
175
200
250
400
400
Input Power
Output Power
380 / 415 / 460V Class drive
Voltage : 3 Phase 380 / 400 / 415 / 440 / 460 VAC + 10%, – 15%
Frequency : 50 / 60 Hz ± 5%
Voltage : 0 - 460V (proportional to input voltage)
Frequency: 0 - 400 Hz (V/Hz pattern selectable)
NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE
MODEL NO.
MODEL NO.
RATED NOMINAL
CIMR-G5M GPD515CkVA HP
40P41F
40P71F
41P51F
43P71F
44P01F
45P51F
47P51F
40111F
40151F
40181F
40221F
40301F
40371F
40451F
40551F
40750F
41100F
41600F
41850F
42200F
43000F
B001
B003
B004
B008
B011
B014
B021
B027
B034
B041
B052
B065
B080
B096
B128
B165
B224
B302
B380
B450
B605
1.4
2.6
3.7
6.1
8.6
11
14
21
26
31
40
50
61
73
98
130
170
230
290
340
460
0.75
1 & 2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200 & 250
300
300 & 350
400 & 500
100% CONT.
OUTPUT
AMPS
96
128
165
224
302
34
41
52
65
80
380
450
605
1.8
3.4
4.8
8
11
14
21
27
RATED
INPUT
AMPS
106
141
182
247
330
40
46
58
72
88
456
540
726
2.2
4.1
5.8
9.6
13.2
16.8
26
33
RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED
MCCB INPUT
RATING (1) (AMPS) FUSING (AMPS) (2)
150
250
250
400
400
50
75
75
100
150
600
800
1000
15
30
30
30
50
3
7
7
150
200
250
400
400
50
70
90
100
125
600
400
(3)
450
(3)
3
6
8
12
17.5
20
30
45
( 1 ) Molded-case circuit breaker must be rated for at least 18,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting capacity.
( 2 ) Fuses should be of the current-limiting time-delay type offering protection for semi-conductor devices.
( 3 ) Two fuses of this rating are required for each phase.
(table continued on next page)
A2-1
T a b l e A 2 - 1 . S t a n d a r d S p e c i f i c a t i o n s ( C o n t i n u e d )
SECTION A. Input Voltage Related
Input Power
Output Power
600V Class drive
Voltage : 3 Phase 500/ 575/ 600 VAC +/– 10%
Frequency : 50 / 60 Hz ± 5%
Voltage : 0 - 575V (proportional to input voltage)
Frequency: 0 - 400 Hz (V/Hz pattern selectable)
51P51F
52P21F
53P71F
55P51F
57P51F
50111F
50151F
50181F
50221F
50301F
50371F
50451F
50551F
50751F
50900F
51100F
51600F
NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE
MODEL NO.
MODEL NO.
RATED NOMINAL
CIMR-G5M GPD515CkVA HP
C027
C032
C041
C052
C062
C077
C099
C130
C172
C200
C003
C004
C006
C010
C012
C017
C022
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
100
125
150
200
25
30
40
50
60
75
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
100% CONT.
OUTPUT
AMPS
99
130
172
200
27
32
41
52
62
77
3.5
4.1
6.3
9.8
12.5
17
22
RATED
INPUT
AMPS
122
160
211
246
33
40
51
64
76
95
4.3
5.1
7.7
12.1
15.4
21
28
RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED
MCCB INPUT
RATING (1) (AMPS) FUSING (AMPS) (2)
10
10
20
20
20
30
50
60
60
100
100
100
150
225
225
300
400
60
70
100
125
156
200
250
300
400
500
10
10
15
25
30
40
50
( 1 ) Molded-case circuit breaker must be rated for at least 18,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting capacity.
( 2 ) Fuses should be of the current-limiting time-delay type offering protection for semi-conductor devices.
A2-2
Control
Characteristics
Protective
Functions
T a b l e A 2 - 1 . S t a n d a r d S p e c i f i c a t i o n s ( C o n t i n u e d )
SECTION C. ALL drives
SECTION C. ALL drives
Control Method Sine-coded PWM (Digital flux vector)
Frequency/Speed Range
Control
100:1 (including at stall) (1000:1 possible with PG)
Precision Digital ref.: ± 0.01% (–10 to 40°C, +14 to +140°F)
Analog ref.: ± 0.1% (25 ±10° C, 77 ±50°F)
Frequency Control Range
Speed Control Accuracy
Frequency/Speed Reference
Setting Resolution
0.1 to 400 Hz
± 0.2% (± 0.02% with PG)
Digital Operator reference: 0.01 Hz (12 bits)
(0.1 Hz @ 100 Hz and above)
Analog reference: 0.03 Hz/60 Hz (11 bits)
Starting Torque
Output Frequency Resolution
Auto Speed Reference Signal
Accel / Decel Time
Torque Limit
Braking Torque
V/F Pattern Selection
Selectable Functions
Motor Overload Protection
Instantaneous Overcurrent
Fuse Blown Protection
Overload
150% / 1 Hz (150% / 0 RPM with PG)
0.01 Hz
± 10 VDC (20K Ohms), or 4-20mA (250 Ohms)
0 to 6000 sec (resolution: 0.1 sec)
(Accel / Decel times set independently, 4 steps available)
4 types available
Approximately 20%
15 Standard Patterns:
4 for general purpose;
4 for fans and pumps;
4 for high starting torque;
3 for constant horsepower.
1 Custom Pattern: defined by parameter settings.
Multi-step speed operation (9 steps max.), S-curve accel/decel, zero speed control, servo lock, arbitrary torque detection, etc.
Electronic thermal overload relay
Motor coasts to a stop at approximately 200% rated current.
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Momentary Power Failure
Heatsink Overheat
Motor coasts to a stop by blown fuse.
Motor coasts a stop after 60 sec. at 150% of rated output current.
Motor coasts to a stop if drive DC bus voltage exceeds
400 VDC (230V unit), or 800VDC (460V unit), or 1050VDC
(600V unit).
Motor coasts to a stop if drive DC bus voltage drops to
190 VDC or below (230V unit), 380 VDC or below (460V unit),
546VDC or below (600V unit).
Factory setting provides for motor to coast to a stop after momentary power failure of more than 15 ms. Can be reprogrammed to allow continuous operation (ride-through) during power failure of up to 2 seconds or longer (see Note 2).
Thermistor
(table continued on next page)
A2-3
T a b l e A 2 - 1 . S t a n d a r d S p e c i f i c a t i o n s ( C o n t i n u e d )
Protective
Functions
(continued)
Environmental
Conditions
Stall Prevention
Ground Fault
Power Charge Indication
Location
Ambient Temperature
Storage Temperature (Note 3)
Humidity
Vibration
Elevation
Stall prevention at acceleration /deceleration and constant speed operation.
Provided by electronic circuit.
"CHARGE" lamp remains lit until bus voltage drops below 50 V.
Indoor (protected from corrosive gases and dust)
–10 to 40°C (+14 to 104°F) for NEMA 1;
–10 to 45°C (+14 to 113°F) for protected chassis
–20 to 60°C (–4 to 140°F)
95% RH (no condensation)
1 G at less than 20 Hz, up to 0.2 G at 20 to 50 Hz
3300 ft (1000 m) or less
Rated speed
Pulse Generator
Thermistor
Load Connection
Insulation Type
Ambient Temperature
Location
1750 rpm (4 poles, 60Hz)
1024 ppr
Standard
Direct coupling or belt drive
Class F
–20 to +40°C (–4 to +104°F)
Indoor
NOTES:
1 .
Overload capacity: 150% of rated for 60 sec.
2 .
See paragraph 5.29 for detailed information.
3 .
Temperature during shipping. Storing in this temperature for a long period may deteriorate main circuit capacitor.
4 .
1HP motor VMB001C is an inverter-duty foot mount with C-Face.
A2-4
Appendix 3. CAPACITY & CONTROL METHOD
RELATED PARAMETERS
Parameter o 2 - 0 4 (Drive Capacity Selection) is factory preset per the input voltage and output current ratings of the drive, although the drive displays the voltage and kW rating.
This parameter setting determines the factory settings for the parameters listed in the table below. If the Control PCB has been replaced, the new board MUST have o 2 - 0 4 programmed to the appropriate set value BEFORE again operating the drive in the Drive mode.
T a b l e A 3 - 1 . P a r a m e t e r s R e l a t e d t o G P D 5 1 5 C a p a c i t y
PARAMETER
NEW
DRIVE
MODEL
NO.
OLD
DRIVE
MODEL
NO.
CIMR-G5M GPD515C–
NOMINAL OUTPUT
HP AMPS o2-04 C6-01
(kHz)
C6-02
(kHz)
E2-01
&
E5-01
(Amps)
E2-02
&
E5-02
(Hz)
E2-03
&
E2-05
&
E5-03 E5-05
(Amps) (ohms)
E2-06
&
E5-06
(%)
L2-02
(sec.)
L2-03
(sec.)
L2-04
(sec.)
L8-02
(sec.)
E2-10
(watts)
20P41F A003
20P71F A006
21P51F A008
22P21F A011
23P71F A017
25P51F A025
27P51F A033
20111F A049
20151F
20181F
20221F
20300F
20370F
20550F
20750F
0.75
1 & 1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
A064 20 64
A080 25 & 30 80
A096 30 96
A130 40 & 50 130
A160
A224
A300
60
75
100
160
224
300
17.5
25
33
49
3.2
6
8
11
40P41F B001
40P71F B003
41P51F B004
43P71F B008
44P01F B011
45P51F B014
47P51F B021
40111F
40151F
40181F
40221F
40301F
B027
B034
B041
B052
B065
0.75
1 & 2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
8
11
14
21
1.8
3.4
4.8
27
34
41
52
65
2 3 0 V
0 15.0
15.0
1 15.0
15.0
2 15.0
15.0
3 15.0
15.0
1.90
2.90
1.20
9.842
18.2
0.7
0.5
3.30
2.50
1.80
5.156
13.8
1.0
0.5
6.20
2.60
2.80
1.997
18.5
1.0
0.5
8.50
2.90
3.00
1.601
18.4
1.0
0.5
4 15.0
15.0
14.00
2.73
4.50
0.771
19.6
2.0
0.5
5 15.0
15.0
19.60
1.50
5.10
0.399
18.2
2.0
0.7
6 15.0
15.0
26.60
1.30
8.00
0.288
15.5
2.0
0.7
7 15.0
15.0
39.7
1.70
11.2
0.230
19.5
2.0
0.7
8 15.0
15.0
53.0
1.60
15.2
0.138
17.2
2.0
0.7
9 15.0
15.0
65.8
1.67
15.7
0.101
20.1
2.0
1.0
A 10.0
10.0
77.2
1.70
18.5
0.079
19.5
2.0
1.0
b 10.0
10.0
105.0
1.80
21.9
0.064
20.8
2.0
1.0
C 10.0
10.0
131.0
1.33
38.2
0.039
18.8
2.0
1.0
E 10.0
10.0
190.0
1.43
45.6
0.022
20.5
2.0
1.0
F 10.0
10.0
260.0
1.39
72.0
0.023
20.0
2.0
1.0
4 6 0 V
20 10.0
10.0
1.00
2.90
0.60 38.198
18.2
1.0
0.5
21 10.0
10.0
1.60
2.60
0.80 22.459
14.3
1.0
0.5
22 10.0
10.0
3.10
2.50
1.40 10.100
18.3
1.0
0.5
24 10.0
10.0
7.00
2.70
2.30
3.333
19.3
2.0
0.5
25 10.0
10.0
7.00
2.70
2.30
3.333
19.3
2.0
0.7
26 10.0
10.0
9.80
1.50
2.60
1.595
18.2
2.0
0.7
27 10.0
10.0
13.30
1.30
4.00
1.152
15.5
2.0
0.7
28 10.0
10.0
19.9
1.70
5.6
0.922
19.6
2.0
0.7
29 10.0
10.0
26.5
1.60
7.6
0.550
17.2
2.0
0.7
2A 10.0
10.0
32.9
1.67
7.8
0.403
20.1
2.0
1.0
2b 8.0
8.0
38.6
1.70
9.2
0.316
23.5
2.0
1.0
2C 8.0
8.0
52.3
1.80
10.9
0.269
20.7
2.0
1.0
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.3
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.0
1.0
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
95
95
95
95
95 112
95 172
95 262
95 245
14
26
53
77
95 272
95 505
95 538
95 699
95 823
95 852
95 960
95
95
95
14
26
53
95 130
95 130
95 193
95 263
95 385
95 440
95 508
95 586
95 750
(table continued on next page)
A3-1
T a b l e A 3 - 1 . P a r a m e t e r s R e l a t e d t o G P D 5 1 5 C a p a c i t y
PARAMETER
NEW
DRIVE
MODEL
NO.
OLD
DRIVE
MODEL
NO.
CIMR-G5M GPD515C–
NOMINAL OUTPUT
HP AMPS o2-04 C6-01
(kHz)
C6-02
(kHz)
E2-01
&
E5-01
(Amps)
E2-02
&
E5-02
(Hz)
E2-03
&
E2-05
&
E5-03 E5-05
(Amps) (ohms)
E2-06
&
E5-06
(%)
L2-02
(sec.)
L2-03
(sec.)
L2-04
(sec.)
L8-02
(sec.)
E2-10
(watts)
4 6 0 V – Continued
40371F B080
40451F B096
40551F B128
40750F B165
60
75
100
125
80 2d 6.0
96 2E 6.0
128 2F 6.0
165 30 6.0
6.0
65.6 1.33
19.1 0.155
18.8
2.0
1.0
0.6
95 925
6.0
79.7 1.60
22.0 0.122
19.9
2.0
1.0
0.6
95 1125
6.0
95.0 1.46
24.0 0.088
20.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
100 1260
6.0 130.0 1.39
36.0 0.092
20.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
95 1600
41100F B224 150 224 32 5.0
41600F B302 200 & 250 302 34 5.0
5.0 190.0 1.40
49.0 0.046
20.0
2.0
2.0
1.0
110 2150
5.0 270.0 1.35
70.0 0.029
20.0
2.0
2.0
1.0
100 2850
41850F B380 300 380 35 2.0 * 2.0 310.0 1.30
81.0 0.025
20.0
2.0
2.0
1.0
95 3200
42200F B450 300 & 350 450 36 2.0 * 2.0 370.0 1.30
96.0 0.020
20.0
2.0
2.0
1.0
95 3700
43000F B605 400 & 500 605 37 2.0 * 2.0 500.0 1.25 130.0 0.014
20.0
2.0
2.0
1.0
95 4700
NOTES:
* 2.5 kHz is maximum carrier frequency.
T a b l e A 3 - 1 . P a r a m e t e r s R e l a t e d t o G P D 5 1 5 C a p a c i t y
PARAMETER
NEW
DRIVE
MODEL
NO.
OLD
DRIVE
MODEL
NO.
CIMR-G5M GPD515C–
NOMINAL OUTPUT
HP AMPS o2-04 C6-01
(kHz)
C6-02
(kHz)
E2-01
&
E5-01
(Amps)
E2-02
&
E5-02
(Hz)
E2-03
&
E2-05
&
E5-03 E5-05
(Amps) (ohms)
E2-06
&
E5-06
(%)
L2-02
(sec.)
L2-03
(sec.)
L2-04
(sec.)
51P51F C003
52P21F C004
53P71F C006
55P51F C010
57P51F C012
50111F C017
50151F C022
50181F C027
50221F C032
50301F C041
50371F C052
50451F C062
50551F C077
50751F C099
50900F C130
51100F C172
51600F C200
75
100
125
150
200
30
40
50
60
10
15
20
25
2
3
5
7.5
L8-02
(sec.)
E2-10
(watts)
6 0 0 V
3.5
4.1
6.3
9.8
42 10.0
10.0
2.70 2.50
0.90 13.720 18.3
1.0
0.5
0.3
95
43 10.0
10.0
3.90 3.00
1.20 8.825 18.7
1.0
0.5
0.3
95
53
77
44 10.0
10.0
6.10 2.70
1.90 4.939 19.3
2.0
0.5
0.3
95 130
45 10.0
10.0
9.00 1.50
2.70 2.601 18.2
2.0
0.5
0.3
95 193
12.5
46 10.0
10.0
11.00 1.30
3.30 1.446 15.5
2.0
0.5
0.3
95 263
17 47 10.0
10.0
17.0
1.70
5.1
1.171 19.6
2.0
0.5
0.3
95 385
22
27
48
49
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
22.0
27.0
1.60
1.67
6.6
8.1
0.896 17.2
0.658 20.1
2.0
2.0
0.5
0.5
0.3
0.6
95
95
440
508
32
41
52
62
4A 10.0
10.0
32.0
1.70
9.6
0.518 23.5
2.0
0.5
0.6
95 586
4B 10.0
10.0
41.0
1.80 12.3
0.438 20.7
2.0
1.0
0.6
95 750
4C 10.0
10.0
52.0
1.33 15.6
0.267 18.8
2.0
1.0
0.6
95 925
4D 10.0
10.0
62.0
1.60 18.6
0.210 19.9
2.0
1.0
0.6
95 1125
77
99
4E 10.0
10.0
77.0
1.46 23.1
0.150 20.0
2.0
1.0
1.5
95 1260
4F 2.0
1.0
99.0
1.39 29.7
0.099 20.0
2.0
1.0
1.5
95 1600
130 50
172 51
200 52
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.0 125.0
1.0 144.0
1.0 192.0
1.39 38.5
1.40 43.2
1.35 57.6
0.079 20.0
0.060 20.0
0.037 20.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
95
95
95
2150
2150
2850
NOTES:
* 2.5 kHz is maximum carrier frequency.
A3-2
PARAMETER
NUMBER b3-01
T a b l e A 3 - 2 . P a r a m e t e r s R e l a t e d t o C o n t r o l M e t h o d ( A 1 - 0 2 )
F U N C T I O N N A M E
Speed Search Selection
I N C R E -
M E N T
1
S E T T I N G
R A N G E
0, 1
F A C T O R Y S E T T I N G
V / F
V / F O p e n L o o p w i t h P G V e c t o r
A 1 - 0 2 = 0 A 1 - 0 2 = 1 A 1 - 0 2 = 2
F l u x V e c t o r
A 1 - 0 2 = 3
0 1 0 1
b3-02
Speed Search Deactivation
Current Level
1 % 0 - 200 150 — 100 —
b8-04
0.1
0.0 - 10.0
— — 0.7
1.0
b8-05
C3-01
C3-02
C4-02
C5-01
C5-02
Automatic
Energy-Saving Gain
Automatic
Energy-Saving Time Constant
Slip Compensation Gain
Slip Compensation Primary
Delay Time
Torque Compensation Time
Constant
ASR Proportional Gain 1
ASR Integral Time 1
0.01
sec
0.1
1 ms
1 ms
0.00 - 10.00
0.0 - 2.5
0 - 10000
0 - 10000
—
0.0
2000
200
—
—
—
—
—
200
0.20
0.200
0.50
1.0
200
20
—
—
0.01
1.0
—
—
20.00
0.500
C5-03
C5-04
E1-07,
Mid. Output Frequency A
E4-04
E1-08,
Mid. Output Voltage A
E4-05
E1-09,
Min. Output Frequency
E4-06
E1-10,
Min. Output Voltage
E4-07
F1-09
ASR Proportional Gain 2
ASR Integral Time 2
Overspeed Detection
Delay Time
0.01
0.00 - 300.00
0.001
sec
0.000 -
10.000
0.01
0.00 - 300.00
0.001
sec
0.000 -
10.000
0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0
—
—
3.0
V 0.0 - 250.0
17.2
0.0 - 510.0 (1) 34.5 (1)
0.0 - 733.1 (2) 49.5 (2)
0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0
1.5
0.1 V 0.0 - 250.0
10.3
0.0 - 510.0 (1) 20.7(1)
0.0 - 733.1 (2) 29.6 (2)
0.1
sec
0.0 - 2.0
—
0.02
0.050
3.0
17.2
34.5(1)
49.5 (2)
1.5
10.3
20.7(1)
29.6 (2)
1.0
—
—
3.0
12.6
25.3(1)
36.3 (2)
0.5
2.3
4.6(1)
6.5 (2)
—
20.00
0.500
—
—
0.0
—
0.0
NOTES:
1 .
Values are for 460V ratings.
2. Values are for 600V ratings.
A3-3
A3-4
Appendix 4. GPD 515/G5 SPARE PARTS
PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING REPLACEMENT CONTROL PCB
1 . Record all parameters that have been changed from their factory settings, by writing down all settings that appear under the “Modified Constants” menu.
2 . Record the Control Method (“Initialize” menu, A 1 - 0 2 ) .
3 . Record the drive’s kVA selection ( o 2 - 0 4 ). This parameter is available only when the Access Level is set to “Advanced” ( A 1 - 0 1 = 4 ) .
4 . Remove power, remove the old control board, and install the new control board.
5 . Reapply power to the drive. An “ o P E 0 1 K V A S e l e c t i o n ” fault may appear – if so, step 7 will correct it.
6 . Set the Access Level to “Advanced” from the “Initialize” menu ( A 1 - 0 1 = 4 ) .
7 . Program the new control board for the correct drive size by setting parameter
o 2 - 0 4 to the value that was recorded in step 3.
8 . Set parameter o 2 - 0 9 to “American Spec” to ensure that all parameters are reset to the “American” values when the initialization is performed in step 10.
9 . Set the new control board to the correct Control Method under the “Initialize” menu
( A 1 - 0 2 ) .
1 0 .
Reset the drive from the “Initialize” menu using the “Init Parameters” function
( A 1 - 0 3 ). Entering “ 2 2 2 0 ” will reset the drive for 2-wire control. Entering
“ 3 3 3 0 ” will reset the drive for 3-wire control. NOTE: After a successful initialization, the “Init Parameters” display will return to “ N o I n i t i a l i z e ” .
1 1 .
Program all parameter settings with the data that was recorded in step 1.
A4-1
New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M
20P41F
20P71F
21P51F
22P21F
23P71F
25P51F
27P51F
20111F
20151F
20181F
20221F
20300F
20370F
20550F
20750F
A049
A064
A080
A096
A130
A160
A224
A300
A003
A006
A008
A011
A017
A025
A033
Old Drive
Model No.
GPD515C–
Power Module Part No. 5P30–
0174
1
0175 0178 0154 0155
1
1
1
1
1
1
Transistor Module Part No. 5P30–
0156 0157 0180 0160 0161 0176 0177
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
12
0477
1
Diode Module Part No. 5P50–
0478 0479 0490 0480 0481 0482
No Diode Module in these
Drive Model No's; diodes are contained in Power Module.
1
1
1
1
6
6
6
6
New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M
20P41F
20P71F
21P51F
22P21F
23P71F
25P51F
27P51F
20111F
20151F
20181F
20221F
20300F
20370F
20550F
20750F
Old Drive
Model No.
GPD515C–
A049
A064
A080
A096
A130
A160
A224
A300
A003
A006
A008
A011
A017
A025
A033
0422
1
0423
Power PCB Part No. 5P90–
0424 0425 0426 0427 0428
0429
0430
Gate Drive PCB Part No. 5P90–
0410 0414 0415 0416 0417
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Control PCB
Part No. 5P90–0535
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M
20P41F
20P71F
21P51F
22P21F
23P71F
25P51F
27P51F
20111F
20151F
20181F
20221F
20300F
20370F
20550F
20750F
A064
A080
A096
A130
A160
A224
A300
A003
A006
A008
A011
A017
A025
A033
A049
Old Drive
Model No.
GPD515C–
0057
Cooling Fan Part No. 5P16–
0058 0059 0061 0050 0062 0051
DC Bus Fuse Part No. 5P17–
0504 0505 0488 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 0485 0487
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
1
1
1
1 3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
Control Fuse Part No. 5P17–
0500 0501
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
IMPORTANT
Numbers represent total quantity used in one Drive. To determine adequate inventory of spare parts, Yaskawa suggests using listed value for quantities 2 and below. If listed value is greater than 2, factory suggests 1/3 of total listed.
A4-2
40P41F
40P71F
41P51F
43P71F
44P01F
45P51F
47P51F
40111F
40151F
40181F
40221F
40301F
40371F
40451F
40551F
40750F
41100F
41600F
41850F
42200F
43000F
New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M
B027
B034
B041
B052
B065
B080
B096
B128
B001
B003
B004
B008
B011
B014
B021
B165
B224
B302
B380
B450
B605
Old Drive
Model No.
GPD515C–
Power Module
Part No. 5P30–
Transistor Module Part No. 5P30–
Xstr/Heatsink
Assy
Part No. 5P30–
0171 0162 0163 0164 0165 0166 0167 0181 0150 0151 0152 0153 0288 0289 0290
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
6
6
12
12
3
3
3
Diode Module Part No. 5P50–
0483 0484 0485 0486 0491 0492 0487 0488 0496
1
1
1
1
No Diode Module in these
Drive Model No's; diodes are contained in Power Module.
1
1
1
1
1
6
6
6
6
6
6
9
New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M
40P41F
40P71F
41P51F
43P71F
44P01F
45P51F
47P51F
40111F
40151F
40181F
40221F
40301F
40371F
40451F
40551F
40750F
41100F
41600F
41850F
42200F
43000F
Old Drive
Model No.
GPD515C–
B027
B034
B041
B052
B065
B080
B096
B128
B001
B003
B004
B008
B011
B014
B021
B165
B224
B302
B380
B450
B605
Power PCB
Consult
Yaskawa
Gate Drive PCB
Consult
Yaskawa
Control PCB
Part No. 5P90– 0535
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
IMPORTANT
Numbers represent total quantity used in one Drive. To determine adequate inventory of spare parts, Yaskawa suggests using listed value for quantities 2 and below. If listed value is greater than 2, factory suggests 1/3 of total listed.
A4-3
New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M
40P41F
40P71F
41P51F
43P71F
44P01F
45P51F
47P51F
40111F
40151F
40181F
40221F
40301F
40371F
40451F
40551F
40750F
41100F
41600F
41850F
42200F
43000F
Old Drive
Model No.
GPD515C–
B034
B041
B052
B065
B080
B096
B128
B165
B001
B003
B004
B008
B011
B014
B021
B027
B224
B302
B380
B450
B605
Cooling Fan Part No. 5P16–
0057 0058 0059 0061 0060 0050 0062 0051
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
1
1
1
1 3
DC Bus Fuse Part No. 5P17–
Control Fuse
Part No. 5P17–
0064
3
3
3
0504
1
1
1
0488
1
1
0480
1
0489
1
0490
1
1
1
0491 0492
1
1
1
1
0477 0478 0479 0500 0503 0502
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
3
No DC Bus Fuse in these Drive Model No's; fuses are contained in Transistor/Heatsink Assembly.
3
1
1
1
1
1
IMPORTANT
Numbers represent total quantity used in one Drive. To determine adequate inventory of spare parts, Yaskawa suggests using listed value for quantities 2 and below. If listed value is greater than 2, factory suggests 1/3 of total listed.
A4-4
New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M
51P51F
52P21F
53P71F
55P51F
57P51F
50111F
50151F
50181F
50221F
50301F
50371F
50451F
50551F
50751F
50900F
51100F
51600F
Old Drive
Model No.
GPD515C-
C027
C032
C041
C052
C062
C077
C099
C130
C172
C200
C003
C004
C006
C010
C012
C017
C022
Power Module
Part No. 5P30-
0179 0162 0163 0164
Transistor Module
Part No. STR___
0165 1217 1219 1220 1221
1200 1201
0483 0484 0485
Diode Module
Part No. 5P50-
Part No.
0491 0492 0487 0488 SID3047
1
1
No Diode in these Drive Model Nos.; diodes are contained in Power Module.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
3
3
3
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
9
9
New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M
51P51F
52P21F
53P71F
55P51F
57P51F
50111F
50151F
50181F
50221F
50301F
50371F
50451F
50551F
50751F
50900F
51100F
51600F
Old Drive
Model No.
GPD515C-
C032
C041
C052
C062
C077
C099
C130
C172
C200
C003
C004
C006
C010
C012
C017
C022
C027
860
Power PCB
Part No. ETP615___
870
880 890 900
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Gate Drive PCB
Part No. ETC615___
900 910 920 930 940 960
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Control PCB
5P90-
0535
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M
51P51F
52P21F
53P71F
55P51F
57P51F
50111F
50151F
50181F
50221F
50301F
50371F
50451F
50551F
50751F
50900F
51100F
51600F
Old Drive
Model No.
GPD515C-
C032
C041
C052
C062
C077
C099
C130
C172
C200
C003
C004
C006
C010
C012
C017
C022
C027
Cooling Fan
Part No. 5P16-
DC Bus Fuse
Part No.
0057 0058 0059 FU2067 50208016 50208017 FU2068 50205052 50205053 50205054 50208018 50208019 50208020
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
IMPORTANT
Numbers represent total quantity used in one Drive. To determine adequate inventory of spare parts, Yaskawa suggests using listed value for quantities 2 and below. If listed value is greater than 2, factory suggests 1/3 of total listed.
A4-5
A4-6
Appendix 5. GPD 515/G5 DIMENSIONS
Table A5-1 lists dimensions for the drive in its standard enclosure. For information on other types of enclosures available, consult your Yaskawa representative.
T a b l e A 5 - 1 . D r i v e S i z e a n d W e i g h t
VOLTS
NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE
MODEL MODEL
NO.
NO.
CIMR-G5M GPD515C–
2
3
0
4
6
0
40P41F
40P71F
41P51F
43P71F
44P01F
45P51F
47P51F
40111F
40151F
40181F
40221F
40301F
40371F
40451F
40551F
40750F
41100F
41600F
41850F
42200F
43000F
20P41F
20P71F
21P51F
22P21F
23P71F
25P51F
27P51F
20111F
20151F
20181F
20221F
20300F
20370F
20550F
20750F
B001
B003
B004
B008
B011
B014
B021
B027
B034
B041
B052
B065
B080
B096
B128
B165
B224
B302
B380
B450
B605
A049
A064
A080
A096
A130
A160
A224
A300
A003
A006
A008
A011
A017
A025
A033
NOMINAL ENCLOSURE
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS MOUNTING
(IN.) DIM. (IN.) WEIGHT
HP TYPE (LB)
H W D H1 W1
HEAT LOSS
(Watts)
Heatsink Internal Total
0.75
1 &1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
11.02
NEMA 1 11.02
11.02
NEMA 1
NEMA 1
11.02
11.02
11.81
11.81
5.51
6.30
10.47
4.96
5.51
6.30
10.47
4.96
5.51
6.30
10.47
4.96
5.51
7.09
10.47
4.96
5.51
7.09
10.47
4.96
7.87
8.07
11.22
7.32
7.87
8.07
11.22
7.32
10
10
12
13
7
7
7
15
25
40
50
65
80
80
135
60
80
210 90
235 110
15
20
25 & 30
30
14.96
NEMA 1 15.75
9.84
8.86
14.37
9.29
9.84
8.86
14.37
9.29
24.02
12.99
11.22
17.13 10.83
NEMA 1 26.57
12.99
11.22
17.13 10.83
24
24
71
71
425 160
525 200
585
725
655 230 885
830 280 1110
40 & 50 Protected 26.57
16.73
13.78
25.59 12.60
134
60 Chassis 26.57
16.73
13.78
25.59 12.60
137
930
1110
440
620
1370
1730
75
100
Protected
Chassis
31.50
36.42
18.70
22.64
13.78
15.75
30.51 14.57
35.24 17.52
176
298
1740
2050
890
1160
2630
3210
65
90
120
140
215
300
725
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
0.75
1 & 2
3
5
7.5
10
100
125
150
200& 250
300
350
400 & 500
11.02
NEMA 1 11.02
11.02
11.02
NEMA 1 11.02
11.81
5.51
6.30
10.47
4.96
5.51
6.30
10.47
4.96
5.51
7.09
10.47
4.96
5.51
7.09
10.47
4.96
5.51
7.09
10.47
4.96
7.87
8.07
11.22
7.32
11.81
NEMA 1 14.96
14.96
NEMA 1
7.87
8.07
11.22
7.32
9.84
8.86
14.37
9.29
9.84
8.86
14.37
9.29
13
24
24
24.02
12.99
11.22
17.13 10.83
NEMA 1 24.02
12.99
11.22
17.13 10.83
68
68
30.91
12.99
11.22
24.02 10.83
106
30.91
12.99
11.22
24.02 10.83
106
33.46
12.99
11.22
24.02 10.83
106
10
10
13
7
7
9
10
20
30
80
120
135
390
50
65
80
65
80
85
240 120
305 150
180
60
85
110
145
200
220
360
455
570
465 195
620 260
660
880
705 315 1020
875 370 1245
970 415 1385
32.28
17.91
13.78
31.30 13.78
174 1110 710 1820
Protected 32.28
17.91
13.78
31.30 13.78
176 1430 890 2320
Chassis 36.42
22.64
14.76
35.24 17.52
298 1870 1160 3030
36.42
22.64
15.75
35.24 17.52
320 2670 1520 4190
Protected
Chassis
57.09
37.40
17.13
55.12
57.09
37.40
17.13
55.12
62.99
37.80
17.91
61.02
*
*
*
794 3400 1510 4910
794 4740 2110 6850
926 6820 2910 9730
A5-1
T a b l e A 5 - 1 . D r i v e S i z e a n d W e i g h t
VOLTS
NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE
MODEL MODEL
NO.
NO.
CIMR-G5M GPD515C–
NOMINAL ENCLOSURE
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS MOUNTING
(IN.) DIM. (IN.) WEIGHT
HP TYPE (LB)
H W D H1 W1
HEAT LOSS
(Watts)
Heatsink Internal Total
6
0
0
51P51F
52P21F
53P71F
55P51F
57P51F
50111F
50151F
50181F
50221F
50301F
50371F
50451F
50551F
50751F
50900F
51100F
51600F
C003
C004
C006
C010
C012
C017
C022
C027
C032
C041
C052
C062
C077
C099
C130
C172
C200
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
NEMA 1 11.02
5.51
7.08
10.47
4.96
NEMA 1 11.02
5.51
7.08
10.47
4.96
NEMA 1 11.81
7.87
8.07
11.22
7.32
NEMA 1 11.81
7.87
8.07
11.22
7.32
NEMA 1 11.81
7.87
8.07
11.22
7.32
NEMA 1 14.96
9.84
8.85
14.37
9.29
NEMA 1 14.96
9.84
8.85
14.37
9.29
NEMA 1 29.53
15.75
11.22
28.74 11.81
NEMA 1 29.53
15.75
11.22
28.74 11.81
9
9
13
14
14
29
29
97
97
35
45
65
100
130
180
55
60
75
105
90
150
250 210
310 230
380 340
90
105
140
NEMA 1 33.47
22.64
11.81
32.48 18.70
159
NEMA 1 33.47
22.64
11.81
32.48 18.70
159
NEMA 1 33.47
22.64
11.81
32.48 18.70
159
430
680
900
390
540
750
820
1220
1650
NEMA 1 41.34
22.64
12.80
40.35 18.70
198 1000 750 1750
NEMA 1 41.97
22.64
12.80
40.35 18.70
198 1100 1150 2250
Protected
Chassis
49.21
22.64
12.99
48.23 18.70
267 1150 1200 2350
62.99
22.64
13.98
61.81 18.70
324 1400 1800 3200
62.99
22.64
13.98
61.81 18.70
335 1870 2830 4700
205
220
330
460
540
720
A5-2
Appendix 6. DYNAMIC BRAKING CONNECTIONS
GENERAL.
Dynamic braking (DB) enables the motor to be brought to a smooth and rapid stop. This is achieved by dissipating the regenerative energy of the AC motor across the resistive components of the Dynamic Braking option. For further details on dynamic braking operation, see the instruction sheet shipped with dynamic braking components.
The GPD515C-A003 thru -A033 (CIMR-G5M20P41F thru 27P51F), -B001 thru -B034
(40P41F thru 40151F), and -C003 thru -C032 (51P51F thru 50221F) have an integral braking transistor and require the addition of a Remote Mount Resistor Unit or a Heat Sink
Mount Resistor. All higher rated drives require the use of a Braking Transistor Unit and a
Remote Mount Resistor Unit.
Remote Mount Resistor Units typically mount outside of an electrical enclosure. Braking
Transistor Units mount inside of an electrical enclosure. Heat Sink Mount Resistors mount to the back of the drive, attaching directly to the heat sink.
Available dynamic braking components are listed in Table A6-1 through A6-4.
Rated
Input
230 V
460 V
Drive
New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M
20P41F
20P71F
21P51F
22P21F
23P71F
40P41F
40P71F
41P51F
Table A6-1. Dynamic Braking - 3% Duty Cycle - 230V
Heat Sink Mount Resistor
Old Drive
Model No.
GPD515C-
A003
A006
A008
A011
A017
B001
B003
B004
Part No.
50185430
Qty
Reqd
1
50185430 1
50185431 1
50185432
50185433
50185530
1
1
1
50185531 1
50185531 1
Resistance
(Ohms)
(Each)
200
200
100
70
62
750
400
200
Power
(Watts)
(Each)
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
Approx.
Braking.
Torque
(%)
220
220
125
120
100
165
120
150
Dimensions (Inches)
Height Width Depth
7.16
7.16
1.73
0.51
7.16
1.73
0.51
7.16
7.16
7.16
7.16
7.16
1.73
1.73
1.73
1.73
0.51
0.51
0.51
0.51
1.73
0.51
1.73
0.51
230V
Drive
Rated
Input
New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M
Old Drive
Model No.
GPD515C-
Part No.
46S03331-
20P41F
20P71F
21P51F
22P21F
23P71F
25P51F
27P51F
20111F
20151F
20181F
20221F
20300F
20370F
20550F
20750F
A003
A006
A008
A011
A017
A025
A033
A049
A064
A080
A096
A130
A160
A224
A300
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
0010
0020
0020
0020
0020
0020
0020
0020
2
2
1
2
- -
1
1
3
3
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
Qty
Reqd
Table A6-2. Dynamic Braking - 10% Duty Cycle - 230V
Braking Transistor Unit
Minimum
Connectable
Resistance
Each (Ohms)
Dimensions
(Inches)
Height Width Depth
Part No.
5P41-
Qty
Reqd
Remote Mount Resistor Unit
Resistance
(Ohms)
(Each)
Power
(Watts)
(Each)
Approx
Braking
Torque (%)
9.6
9.6
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
48
48
16
16
16
9.6
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
11.00
5.53
11.00
5.53
11.00
5.53
11.00
5.53
11.00
5.53
11.00
5.53
11.00
5.53
11.00
5.53
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
5.91
5.91
5.91
5.91
5.91
5.91
5.91
5.91
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
0825
0826
0826
0827
0828
0829
0830
0831
0832
0833
0834
0834
0834
0834
0834
2
2
1
2
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
20
13.6
10
8
6.8
6.8
6.8
6.8
6.8
200
100
100
70
40
3 0
1260
1500
1920
2592
2760
2760
2760
2760
2760
250
250
250
250
846
824
115
115
115
100
150
135
115
135
105
150
150
115
110
115
105
Dimensions
(Inches)
Height Width Depth
5.00
14.00
4.00
5.00
14.00
4.00
5.00
14.00
4.00
5.00
14.00
4.00
5.00
14.00
7.00
5.00
14.00
7.00
5.00
14.00
10.00
5.00
14.00
13.00
5.00
14.00
13.00
5.00
21.00
10.00
5.00
21.00
10.00
5.00
21.00
10.00
5.00
21.00
10.00
5.00
21.00
10.00
5.00
21.00
10.00
A6-1
460 V
460 V
Drive
Rated
Input
New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M
40P41F
40P71F
41P51F
43P71F
44P01F
45P51F
47P51F
40111F
40151F
40181F
40221F
40301F
40371F
40451F
40551F
40750F
41100F
41600F
41850F
42200F
43000F
41850F
- -
- -
Old Drive
Model No.
GPD515C-
Part No.
46S03331-
B001
B003
B004
B008
B011
B014
B021
B027
B034
B041
B052
B065
B080
B096
B128
B165
B224
B302
B380
B450
B605
B380
B506
B675
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
0050
0060
0060
0060
0060
0060
0060
0090
0090
0090
0090
0090
0090
0090
0090
2
2
1
2
- -
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
Table A6-3. Dynamic Braking - 10% Duty Cycle - 460V
Braking Transistor Module Remote Mount Resistor Unit
Qty
Reqd
Minimum
Connectable
Resistance
Each (Ohms)
Dimensions
(Inches)
Height Length Depth
Part No.
5P41-
Qty
Reqd
Resistance
(Ohms)
(Each)
Power
(Watts)
(Each)
Approx
Braking
Torque (%)
1
1
2
20
20
12.7
12.7
12.7
12.7
12.7
12.7
3
3
3
3
3
32
32
32
20
96
96
64
32
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
11.00
11.00
11.00
11.00
11.00
11.00
11.00
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
5.53
5.53
5.53
5.53
5.53
5.53
5.53
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
5.91
5.91
5.91
5.91
5.91
5.91
5.91
14.50
10.63
7.25
14.50
10.63
7.25
14.50
10.63
7.25
14.50
10.63
7.25
14.50
10.63
7.25
0835
0836
0837
0838
0839
0840
0841
0842
0843
0844
0845
0846
0847
0845
0847
0847
0848
0849
0849
0849
0849
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
750
400
250
150
100
75
50
40
32
27
20
16
13.6
20
13.6
13.6
5.2
4
4
4
4
600
500
500
500
975
1050
1600
2050
2340
3000
3850
5440
5715
3850
5715
5715
17,280
19,600
19,600
19,600
19,600
GPD506V-B041 thru GPD506V-B302 cannot be connected for Dynamic Braking.
3
3
3
14.50
14.50
14.50
10.63
10.63
10.63
7.25
7.25
7.25
0849
0849
0849
1
1
2
4
4
4
19,600
19,600
19,600
120
115
120
120
115
125
135
110
120
95
80
70
95
150
115
125
125
125
125
125
120
80
70
95
Height Length Depth
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
10.00
14.00
13.00
21.00
10.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
28.00
28.00
21.00
28.00
28.00
7.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
7.00
10.00
13.00
13.00
13.00
13.00
13.00
13.00
13.00
14.00
29.00
18.00
14.00
29.00
18.00
14.00
29.00
18.00
14.00
29.00
18.00
14.00
29.00
18.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
Dimensions
(Inches)
29.00
29.00
29.00
18.00
18.00
18.00
Drive
Rated
Input
New Drive
Model No.
CIMR-G5M
Old Drive
Model No.
GPD515C-
Part No.
46S03331-
600V
51P51F
52P21F
53P71F
55P51F
57P51F
50111F
50151F
50181F
50221F
50301F
50371F
50451F
50551F
50751F
50900F
51100F
51600F
C003
C004
C006
C010
C012
C017
C022
C027
C032
C041
C052
C062
C077
C099
C130
C172
C200
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
0080
0080
0080
0080
0080
0080
0080
0080
2
3
2
2
- -
1
1
3
4
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
Table A6-4. Dynamic Braking - 10% Duty Cycle - 600V
Braking Transistor Module Remote Mount Resistor Unit
Qty
Reqd
Minimum
Connectable
Resistance
Each (Ohms)
Dimensions
(Inches)
Height Length Depth
Part No.
5P41-
Qty
Reqd
Resistance
(Ohms)
(Each)
Power
(Watts)
(Each)
Approx
Braking
Torque (%)
26
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
150
150
130
90
65
44
32
26
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
11.00
5.53
11.00
5.53
11.00
5.53
11.00
5.53
11.00
5.53
11.00
5.53
11.00
5.53
11.00
5.53
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
5.91
5.91
5.91
5.91
5.91
5.91
5.91
5.91
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
0856
0857
0858
0858
0858
0858
0858
0858
0858
0851
0851
0851
0851
0852
0853
0854
0855
2
3
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
38
33
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
150
150
150
150
100
75
50
40
3248
3800
4464
4464
4464
4464
4464
4464
4464
840
840
840
840
1400
1680
2520
3000
130
110
110
150
145
110
130
110
110
150
150
150
130
145
130
145
145
Height Length Depth
5.00
5.00
Dimensions
(Inches)
14.00
28.00
7.00
5.00
14.00
7.00
5.00
14.00
7.00
5.00
14.00
7.00
5.00
14.00
10.00
5.00
14.00
13.00
5.00
21.00
10.00
5.00
21.00
10.00
5.00
21.00
13.00
5.00
21.00
13.00
5.00
28.00
13.00
5.00
28.00
13.00
5.00
28.00
13.00
5.00
28.00
13.00
5.00
28.00
13.00
5.00
28.00
13.00
13.00
A6-2
INSTALLATION
This option should only be installed by a TECHNICALLY QUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL who is familiar with this type of equipment and the hazards involved.
WARNING
Hazardous voltage can cause severe injury or death. Lock all power sources feeding the drive in the "OFF" position.
CAUTION
Failure to follow these installation steps may cause equipment damage or personnel injury.
Preliminary Procedures
1 . Disconnect all electrical power to the drive.
2 . Remove drive front cover.
3 . Use a voltmeter to verify that voltage is disconnected from incoming power terminals.
H e a t S i n k M o u n t R e s i s t o r I n s t a l l a t i o n
1 . Remove the drive from its mounting for access to the rear of the heat sink.
2 . Attach the Heat Sink Mount Resistor on the back of the drive’s heat sink, as shown in Figure A6-1.
HEAT SINK
MOUNT
RESISTOR
3 . Reinstall the drive in its mounting position.
4 . Connect the leads from the Heat Sink
Mount Resistor to drive terminals according to Figure A6-2.
5 . Proceed to "ADJUSTMENTS" on page
A6-7.
Figure A6-1. Attaching Heat Sink Mount Resistor on Heat Sink
GPD 515/G5
B1 B2
P
B
HEAT SINK MOUNT
RESISTOR
Figure A6-2. Lead Connections For Heat Sink
Mount Resistor
A6-3
R e m o t e M o u n t R e s i s t o r U n i t I n s t a l l a t i o n ( f o r G P D 5 1 5 C - A 0 0 3 t h r u - A 0 3 3
[ C I M R - G 5 M 2 0 P 4 1 F t h r u 2 7 P 5 1 F ] , - B 0 0 1 t h r u - B 0 3 4 [ 4 0 P 4 1 F t h r u 4 0 1 5 1 F ] ,
C 0 0 3 t h r u C 0 3 2 [ 5 1 P 5 1 F t h r u 5 0 2 2 1 F ] )
IMPORTANT
Since the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generates heat during dynamic braking operation, install it in a location away from other equipment.
1 . Attach the Remote Mount Resistor Unit, maintaining a minimum 1.97 inch (50 mm) clearance on each side and a minimum 7.87 inch (200 mm) clearance on top.
2 . Remove the Remote Mount
Resistor Unit cover to access its terminal block. Connect the Remote Mount Resistor
Unit to the drive and to external control circuitry according to the chart at right and Figure A6-3.
Terminals
Lead Size (AWG)
Lead Type
B, P
12-10
1, 2 *
18-14 *
600V ethylene propylene rubber insulated, or equivalent
M4 Terminal Screw
* Power leads for the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generate high levels of electrical noise; these signal leads must be grouped separately.
3 . Reinstall and secure
Remote
Mount Resistor
Unit cover and drive front cover.
L1
L2
L3
CB
1M
1M
1M
L1 (R)
L2 (S)
GPD 515/G5
L3 (T)
3
CONTROL
PCB
11
T1 (U)
T2 (V)
T3 (W)
T2
T1
T3
4 . Proceed to
"ADJUSTMENTS" on page A6-8.
B1 B2
P
2
PART OF USER SUPPLIED
EXTERNAL CIRCUIT
THRX
1
B
THG
REMOTE
MOUNT
RESISTOR
UNIT
THRX
THRX
POWER
OFF
POWER
ON
1M
1M
FAULT
CONTACT
Figure A6-3. Wiring Remote Mount Resistor Unit to Drive
(GPD515C-A003 thru -A033 [CIMR-G5M20P41F thru 27P51F],
-B001 thru -B034 [40P41F thru 40151F], and -C003 thru -C032 [51P51F thru 50221F])
A6-4
B r a k i n g T r a n s i s t o r U n i t ( s ) a n d R e m o t e M o u n t R e s i s t o r U n i t ( s ) I n s t a l l a t i o n
( f o r G P D 5 1 5 C - A 0 4 9 [ C I M R - G 5 M 2 0 1 1 1 F ] a n d a b o v e , - B 0 4 1 [ 4 0 1 8 1 F ] a n d a b o v e , C 0 4 1 [ 5 0 3 0 1 F ] a n d a b o v e )
IMPORTANT
Since the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generates heat during dynamic braking operation, install it in a location away from other equipment.
Select mounting locations for the Braking Transistor Unit(s) and Remote Mount Resistor
Unit(s) so that wiring between the drive and the (Master) Braking Transistor Unit, and between each Braking Transistor Unit and its associated Remote Mount Resistor Unit, is less than 33 feet (10 m).
1 . Mount the Braking Transistor Unit(s) on a vertical surface. A Braking Transistor Unit requires a minimum 1.18 inches (30 mm) clearance on each side and a minimum 3.94
inches (100 mm) clearance top and bottom. Attach the Remote Mount Resistor Unit maintaining a minimum 1.97 inches (50 mm) clearance on each side and a minimum
7.87 inches (200 mm) clearance on top.
2 . In each Braking Transistor Unit, set the nominal line voltage jumper plug to the correct setting for the installation; this is factory set at the 230V/460V/575V position. To access jumper plugs, remove plexiglass cover.
3 . If multiple Braking Transistor Units are being installed, the unit closest to the drive should have the SLAVE/MASTER jumper plug on its PCB set to the "MASTER" position
(factory setting); all others must have this jumper plug moved to the "SLAVE" position.
4 . If a single Braking Transistor Unit and Remote Mount Resistor Unit are being installed, connect them to the drive and external control circuitry according to the chart below and Figure A6-4.
If two or more Braking Transistor Units and Remote Mount Resistor Units are being installed, connect them to the drive and to external circuitry according to the chart below and Figure A6-5.
UNIT
Remote Resistor Unit
TERMINALS
B, P
1, 2 *
Braking Transistor Unit P, Po, N, B
1, 2 *
LEAD SIZE
(AWG)
12-10
18-14 *
12-10
18-14 *
LEAD
TYPE
600V ethylene propylene rubber insulated or equivalent
600V ethylene propylene rubber insulated, or equivalent
TERMINAL
SCREWS
* Power leads for the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generate high levels of electrical noise; these signal leads must be grouped separately.
M5
M4
M4
A6-5
L1
L2
L3
CB
1M
1M
1M
L1 (R)
L2 (S)
L3 (T)
GPD 515/G5
CONTROL
PCB
3 11
T1 (U)
T2 (V)
T3 (W)
—
See Note(1)
+ 3
IFU(2)
T2
T1
T3
P
N
3
1OL
4
GND
(E)
BRAKING
TRANSISTOR
UNIT
B P o
PART OF USER SUPPLIED
EXTERNAL CIRCUIT
120VAC
THRX
POWER
OFF
POWER
ON
1M
THRX
RC
1M
RC
1
B
1THG
P
REMOTE
MOUNT
RESISTOR
UNIT
FAULT
CONTACT
Figure A6-4. Wiring Single Braking Transistor Unit and Remote Mount Resistor Unit to Drive
(GPD515C-A049 thru -A080 [CIMR-G5M20111F thru 20181F], -B041 thru -B080 [40181F thru 40371F], and -C041 (1) and -C052 (1) [50301F (1) and 50371F (1) ])
5 . The Braking Transistor Unit and Remote Mount Resistor Unit MUST BE GROUNDED.
Observe the following precautions:
• Use grounding leads conforming to National Electrical Code.
• If the installation requires the Remote Mount Resistor Unit to be used without its enclosure (with grounding terminal), ground it by attaching a ground lead at one of the mounting screws.
• Grounding resistance of the Braking Transistor Unit should be 100 ohms or less.
(1)
(2)
For 600V Units, use terminal
⊕
1 .
Fuse required only if UL/CUL certification is needed. See separate instruction sheet
02Y00025-0393 for details.
A6-6
L1
L2
L3
CB
1M
1M
1M
NOT RECOMMENDED
WIRING CONFIGURATION
BRAKING
TRANSISTOR
UNIT
Po
B
L1 (R)
L2 (S)
T1 (U)
GPD 515/G5
T2 (V)
L3 (T)
T3 (W)
3
CONTROL
PCB
11
–
See Note (1)
+ 3
T2
T1
T3
P
BRAKING
TRANSISTOR UNIT #1
N
MASTER
IFU
(2)
3
4
1OL
GND
(E)
B
5
P o
6
1
2
BRAKING
TRANSISTOR
UNIT
Po
B
REMOTE MOUNT
P
RESISTOR UNIT
B
P
BRAKING
1 2
TRANSISTOR UNIT #2
N
SLAVE
IFU
(2)
3
4
1OL
GND
(E)
5
B
P o
6
PART OF USER SUPPLIED
EXTERNAL
CIRCUIT
1
2
120VAC
THRX
IFU
(2)
P
BRAKING
1
TRANSISTOR UNIT #3
2
N
SLAVE
3
4
1OL
GND
(E)
B
5
P o
6
THRX
POWER
OFF
POWER
ON
RC
1M
1M
FAULT
CONTACT
RC
IFU
(2)
P
BRAKING
1
TRANSISTOR UNIT #4
2
N
SLAVE
3
4
1OL
GND
(E)
B
P o
NOTE: Connect only the number of braking transistor units and remote mount resistor units required for the application.
REMOTE
MOUNT
1
RESISTOR
UNIT
1THG
2
B P
1
REMOTE
MOUNT
RESISTOR
UNIT
1THG
2
B P
1
REMOTE
MOUNT
RESISTOR
UNIT
2
1THG
B P
1
REMOTE
MOUNT
RESISTOR
UNIT
2
1THG
B P
Figure A6-5. Wiring Multiple Braking Transistor Units and Remote Mount Resistor Units to Drive
(GPD515C-A130 thru -A300 [CIMR-G5M20300F thru 20750F], -B096 thru -B605 [40451F thru 43000F], and -C062 (1) thru -C200 (1) [50451F (1) thru 51600F (1) ])
(1)
For 600V Units, use terminal + 1.
(2)
Fuse required only if UL/CUL certification is needed. See separate instruction sheet
02Y00025-0393 for details.
A6-7
6 . IMPORTANT: After wiring, test insulation resistance of each Braking Transistor
Unit/Remote Mount Resistor Unit with a 900V megger as follows: a.
Disconnect leads between the Braking Transistor Unit and the drive. If equipment with semiconductors is connected across terminals 1 & 2 of the
Braking Transistor Unit, remove the wiring.
P b.
Connect common leads
(jumpers) across Braking
Transistor Unit terminals
N, P, Po, and B, and across
3 & 4, as shown in
Figure A6-6.
REMOTE MOUNT
RESISTOR
UNIT
P
B
P
0
B
BRAKING
TRANSISTOR
UNIT
GND (E)
N
3
4 a c.
Measure the insulation resistance at points a, b, and c in Figure A6-6 with the megger.
Figure A6-6. Megger Testing Set-up
b c
ADJUSTMENTS
7 . ALL drives: Program L 3 - 0 4 to " 0 ", to disable stall prevention during deceleration.
8 . Only with Heat Sink Mount Resistor: Program L 8 - 0 1 to " 1 ", to enable overheat protection for the braking resistor.
OPERATION CHECK
9 .
During dynamic braking operation, verify that the "BRAKE" lamp inside the Braking
Unit is lit.
1 0 . During dynamic braking operations, ensure that the required deceleration characteristic is obtained. If not, contact MagneTek for assistance.
1 1 . Reinstall and secure covers on the Braking Transistor Units, Remote Mount Resistor
Units, and the drive.
CAUTION
During normal operation, the Braking Transistor Unit and the Remote Mount
Resistor Unit enclosures must be kept closed, since high voltage is applied to the dynamic braking circuit.
A6-8
INDEX
- A -
Accel/Decel Time ............................................ 5-3
Setting Unit .................................................. 5-5
Acceleration
Stall Prevention Level During ..................... 5-86
Stall Prevention. Limit During ..................... 5-86
Stall Prevention. Selection During ............. 5-86
Time 1 .......................................................... 5-3
Time 2 .......................................................... 5-3
Time 3 .......................................................... 5-3
Time 4 .......................................................... 5-3
Access Level ................................................... 5-7
Analog Inputs, Multi-function
(Term. 14 & 16) ......................................5-53
Analog Monitor Output, Multi-function
(Term. 21-23) ........................................ 5-57
Bias ............................................................ 5-57
Gain ........................................................... 5-57
Signal Level Selection ................................ 5-57
Output Selection ........................................ 5-57
At Set Frequency (Output Signal) ................. 5-73
Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) ................. 5-9
ASR Integral Reset .................................... 5-59
Integral Time 1 ............................................. 5-9
Integral Time 2 ........................................... 5-11
Proportional Gain 1 ...................................... 5-9
Proportional Gain 2 .................................... 5-11
Output Lag Time ........................................ 5-11
Auto Restart .................................................... 5-7
Fault Contact Status During ......................... 5-8
No. of Attempts ............................................ 5-7
Auto-Tuning, Running in Open Loop Vector Control ....................... 2-4 in Flux Vector Control ................................... 2-9
Auto-Tuning Faults & Corrective Actions ......... 6-6
Auxiliary Input and Output
Power Option Devices ...........................1-11
- B -
Base Block, External ..................................... 5-63
Base Block Time, Min. ................................... 5-63
Basic Programming ......................................... 4-8
Baud Rate, Ser. Comm.
(MODBUS Control) ........................... 5-49
Bias, Frequency Reference ........................... 5-29
Braking, DC Injection .................................... 5-14
Current ........................................................ 5-15
Start Frequency .............................. 5-15, 5-103
Time at Start ..................................... 5-14, 5-15
Time at Stop ............................................... 5-15
Braking, Dynamic .......................................... A6-1
- C -
Calculating Motor Parameters
[for Initial Start-up] ................................ 2-20
Capacity Related Parameters ....................... A3-1
Carrier Frequency ......................................... 5-12
Lower Limit ................................................. 5-12
Proportional Gain ....................................... 5-12
Upper limit .................................................. 5-12
Changing the Language on the Digital Operator .............................. 2-19
Checking Encoder Pulses
[Troubleshooting] .................................. 6-29
Communication Error, Stop Method at
(MODBUS Control) ............................ A1-17
Conformance to European EMC
Directive ................................................. 1-13
Connections, Vector Control Motor ............... 1-24
Blower Motor .............................................. 1-26
Encoder Feedback (PG) ............................ 1-27
Motor Windings .......................................... 1-24
Control Circuit
Terminals .................................................... 1-17
Terminal (13, 14) Input Voltage
[Monitor Items] ................................... A1-28
Wiring ......................................................... 1-15
Control Method [Monitor Item] .................... A1-27
Control Method Related Parameters ............ A3-3
Control Method Selection ................................ 2-2
CPU ID No. [Monitor Item] .......................... A1-29
Critical Frequency Rejection ......................... 5-13
Current, DC Injection Braking ....................... 5-15
Current Meter (Analog Monitor) .................... 5-57
Current, Motor Rated (FLA) ................. 2-20, 5-90
- D -
DATA/ENTER Key .................................... 4-1, 4-3
DC Bus Voltage [Monitor Item] ................... A1-27
Deactivation Time, Power Loss Ride-thru ..... 5-50
Deceleration
Stall Prevention Selection During .............. 5-86
Time 1 .......................................................... 5-3
Time 2 .......................................................... 5-3
Time 3 .......................................................... 5-3
Time 4 .......................................................... 5-3
Deadband, Prohibited Frequency ................. 5-13
Delay Time, Excessive Speed Deviation
Detection (PG) .................................. 5-23
Derivative Time (PID) .................................... 5-80
Detection, Frequency (Output Signal) ........... 5-73
Detection, Speed (Output Signal) ................. 5-73
Diagnostics — see Troubleshooting
Digital "Motor Operated Pot" ......................... 5-45
Digital Operator ............................................... 4-1
Changing the Language on ....................... 2-19
Display Selection ....................................... 5-17
Menu Trees .................................................. 4-4
Mode Selection ............................................ 4-9
Monitor Selection (At Power-up) ................ 5-19
Test Run Using ........................................... 2-24
Dimensions ................................................... A5-1
Diode and IGBT (Transistor) Module
Resistance Test .................................... 6-27
Displaying Faults ............................................. 6-7
“Down Arrow” Key .................................... 4-1, 4-3
DRIVE Indicator Lamp ............................. 4-1, 4-2
Droop ............................................................. 5-19
Dwell .............................................................. 5-20
Dynamic Braking ........................................... A6-1
Dynamic Braking Resistor
Protection, Internal ............................... 5-46
- E -
Elapsed Operation Time [Monitor Item] ...... A1-28
Elapsed Timer
Selection .................................................... 5-46
Setting ........................................................ 5-45
Encoder (PG) Constant ................ 2-7, 2-15, 5-21
Encoder (PG) Parameters ............................. 5-21
Energy Saving Operation .............................. 5-27
Gain ........................................................... 5-27
Enclosure ...................................................... A5-1
Environment .......................................... 1-1, A2-3
ESC Key ................................................... 4-1, 4-4
European EMC Directive,
Conformance to ......................................1-13
Excessive Speed Deviation
Detection Delay Time ................................. 5-23
Detection Level .......................................... 5-23
External Fault Inputs ..................................... 5-28
- F -
Fast-Stop Decel Time .............................. 5-3, 5-4
Fault Contact Status
During Auto Restart .................................... 5-8
Fault Indication & Troubleshooting .................. 6-1
Faults & Corrective Action, Auto-Tuning .......... 6-6
FLA, Motor ........................................... 2-20, 5-90
Flash ID No. [Monitor Item] ......................... A1-28
Frequency
Base ......................................................... 5-108
Carrier ........................................................ 5-12
Detection Output Signal.............................. 5-73
Max. Output .............................................. 5-108
Meter (Analog Monitor) .............................. 5-57
Mid. Output ............................................... 5-108
Min. Output ............................................... 5-108
Prohibited ................................................... 5-13
I-1
Frequency Detection Multifunction Output ..................................... 5-73
Frequency Reference 1 ................................. 5-39
Frequency Reference 2 ................................. 5-39
Frequency Reference 3 ................................. 5-39
Frequency Reference 4 ................................. 5-39
Frequency Reference
Bias ............................................................ 5-29
Gain ........................................................... 5-29
Input Signals (Auto/Manual) ....................... 5-32
Jog .................................................... 5-36, 5-38
Limit, Lower ................................................ 5-34
Limit, Upper ................................................ 5-34
Loss Detection ........................................... 5-33
Retention .................................................... 5-33
FWD Indicator Lamp ................................ 4-1, 4-2
FWD/REV Key ......................................... 4-1, 4-2
- G -
Gain
Analog Monitor ........................................... 5-57
Energy Saving ............................................ 5-26
Frequency Reference ................................. 5-29
Proportional (PID) ...................................... 5-80
Torque Compensation ................................ 5-93
Zero-Servo ............................................... 5-110
Grounding ...................................................... 1-11
- H -
Hunting Prevention ........................................ 5-35
- I -
Indicator Lamps ....................................... 4-1, 4-2
Initial Start-up ("Local" Control) ....................... 2-1
Initialize Parameters (Reset Codes) ............. 5-83
Input and Output Power Option
Devices, Auxiliary ................................. 1-11
Input Phase Loss Detection .......................... 5-77
Input Selection
Analog, Multi-function ................................ 5-53
Multi-function Terminals ............................. 5-58
Input Terminal Status [Monitor Item] ........... A1-27
Input Voltage ................................................. A2-1
Inputs
Analog ........................................................ 5-53
Frequency Reference ................................. 5-31
Inspection (Receiving) ..................................... 1-1
Installation
Physical ........................................................ 1-1
Electrical ...................................................... 1-2
Integral Time (PID) ........................................ 5-80
Integral Value Limit (PID) .............................. 5-80
Integral Reset, ASR (PID) ............................. 5-82
INDEX – Co n t i n u e d
Integral Value During Accel/
Decel Selection (PG) ............................ 5-24
Interconnection
2-wire Control ............................................. 1-20
3-wire Control ............................................. 1-22
Internal Dynamic Braking
Resistor Protection ............................... 5-46
- J -
Jog Frequency Reference .................... 5-35, 5-36
JOG Key .................................................. 4-1, 4-2
- K -
Keypad — see Digital Operator
- L -
Lag Filter Time, Output (PID) ........................ 5-81
Lamps, Indicator .............................. 4-1, 4-2
LCD Display ............................................ 4-1
Limit, Integral Value (PID) ..................... 5-80
Line-to-Line Resistance, Motor ................... A1-13
Listing of Parameters .................................... A1-1
LOCAL/REMOTE Key ..................................... 4-1
Selection .................................................... 5-44
Local/Remote Reference
Selection .................................................... 5-39
Lower Limit, Frequency Reference ............... 5-34
- M -
Main Circuit
Block Diagrams ............................1-8, 1-9, 1-10
Terminals .............................................. 1-3, 1-5
Input/Output Wiring ...................................... 1-2
Max. Output Frequency ...................... 2-20, 5-108
Max. Voltage ....................................... 2-21, 5-108
Mechanical resonance — see
Critical Frequency Rejection
MENU Key ............................................... 4-1, 4-3
Menu Trees, Digital Operator .......................... 4-5
Mid. Output Frequency ................................ 5-108
Mid. Output Voltage ..................................... 5-108
Min. Base Block Time .................................... 5-65
Min. Output Frequency ................................ 5-108
Min. Output Voltage ..................................... 5-108
Miscellaneous Parameters ............................ 5-44
Miscellaneous Protective Features ............... 5-46
MODBUS Control .......................................... 5-48
Operation Mode Selection ......................... 5-48
Reference Selection ................................... 5-48
Ser. Comm. Baud Rate ..................... 5-48, 5-49
Ser. Comm. Parity Selection ............. 5-48, 5-49
Ser. Comm. Station Address ............ 5-48, 5-49
Stopping Method at Ser.
Comm. Error ................................... A1-17
Mode Selection ............................................... 4-8
Model Numbers, Drive .................. xvii, A2-1,
A3-1, A5-1
Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru ................. 5-50
Deactivation Time ...................................... 5-50
Protection ................................................... 5-50
Monitor Selection (At Power-Up) ................... 5-19
Motor
Exciting Current [Monitor Item] ................ A1-28
Line-to-Line Resistance ........................... A1-13
Mechanical Loss ...................................... A1-13
Overload Protection Selection ................... 5-90
No-Load Current (NLA) .................. 2-20, A1-13
Parameters, Calculating
[Initial Start-up] ..................................... 2-20
Rated Current (FLA) ............. 5-90, 2-20, A1-13
Rated Voltage ................................ 2-20, A1-13
Secondary Current (Iq)
[Monitor Item] ..................................... A1-28
Selection (for OL Protection) ..................... 5-90
Speed [Monitor Item] ............................... A1-27
Stopping Method Selection ............... 5-14, 5-88
Switching — see Speed Search
Wiring .................................................. 1-2, 1-25
Mounting
Clearances ................................................... 1-1
Dimensions ................................................ A5-1
Location .............................................. 1-1, A2-4
Multi-function Analog Inputs
(Term. 14 & 16) ..................................... 5-53
Multi-function Input Terminals
(Term. 3-8) ............................................ 5-58
Multi-function Output Terminals
(Term. 9 & 10; 25-27) ........................... 5-71
Multi-step Speed Operation .......................... 5-40
- N -
Number of PG Gear Teeth 1 ......................... 5-25
Number of PG Gear Teeth 2 ......................... 5-25
- O -
Off-delay Timer .............................................. 5-66
Offset (PID) ................................................... 5-80
OH (Overheat) Protection Alarm Level ......... 5-46
OH Stopping Method Selection .................... 5-46
On-delay Timer .............................................. 5-66
Operation Method for Frequency
Reference Loss Detection .................... 5-33
Operation Mode Selection ............................. 5-39
Operation Selection at Overspeed (PG) ..................................... 5-22 at PG Open Circuit ..................................... 5-22 at Speed Deviation (PG) ............................ 5-23
Operation Status [Monitor Item] .................. A1-28
Operator Detection Selection ........................ 5-45
I-2
Operator Display (LCD) ................................... 4-1
Options — see Peripheral Devices
Output, Analog Monitor ................................. 5-57
Output Current [Monitor Item] ..................... A1-27
Output Frequency
Max. .............................................. 5-108, A1-12
Mid. ............................................... 5-108, A1-12
Min. ............................................... 5-108, A1-12
[Monitor Item] ........................................... A1-27
Output Lag Filter Time (PID) ......................... 5-81
Output Phase Loss Detection ....................... 5-77
Output Power [Monitor Item] ....................... A1-27
Output Selection, Analog Monitor ................. 5-57
Output Terminal Status [Monitor Item] ........ A1-27
Output Voltage [Monitor Item] ..................... A1-27
Output Voltage Ref. (Vd) [Monitor Item] ...... A1-29
Output Voltage Ref. (Vq) [Monitor Item] ...... A1-29
Outputs
Analog Monitor ........................................... 5-57
Contact/Open Collector .............................. 5-70
Overload Prot. Selection, Motor .................... 5-90
Overspeed Detection Level (PG) .................. 5-22
Overtorque Detection
Function Selection ..................................... 5-98
Level ........................................................... 5-98
Time ........................................................... 5-98
- P -
Parameter Selection/Initialization
(Reset Codes) ....................................... 5-83
Parameters
Factory Reset (Initialize) ............................ 5-83
Listing of .................................................... A1-1
Quick Reference For ..................................... xiv
Programming ............................................. 4-10
Related to Capacity ................................... A3-1
Related to Control Method ........................ A3-3
Parity Selection, Ser. Comm.
(MODBUS Control) ........................... 5-49
Peripheral devices
AC reactor .................................................. 1-12
Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) ........ A2-1
Noise filter .................................................. 1-12
PG Open Circuit Detection Delay Time ........ 5-21
PG Open Circuit, Operation Selection at ...... 5-21
PG Rotation ................................................... 5-24
PG Setup ....................................................... 5-21
Phase Loss Detection
Input ........................................................... 5-77
Output ........................................................ 5-77
Physical Installation ......................................... 1-1
PID Control .................................................... 5-78
Disable ....................................................... 5-60
Feedback Amount [Monitor Item] ............ A1-29
INDEX – Co n t i n u e d
Feedback Signal Selection ........................ 5-79
Integral Value Limit .................................... 5-80
Offset ......................................................... 5-80
Output Filter Lag Time ............................... 5-81
PID Limit .................................................... 5-80
PID Selection ............................................. 5-78
PID Settings
Derivative Time ....................................... 5-80
Integral Time ........................................... 5-80
Proportional Gain ................................... 5-80
Potentiometer (External Speed) ........................ vii
Power Loss Ride-thru Time ........................... 5-51
Power On and Preliminary Checks
(Initial Start-up) ....................................... 2-2
Power Supply ......................................... 1-5, A2-1
Power Voltage Selection in
460V GPD 515 ....................................... 2-1
Pre-Operation Considerations ....................... 2-27
Preset Speeds — see Multi-step Speeds
Programmable Features .................................. 5-1
Prohibited Frequency 1 ................................. 5-13
Prohibited Frequency 2 ................................. 5-13
Prohibited Frequency 3 ................................. 5-13
Prohibited Frequency 4 ................................. 5-13
Prohibited Frequency Deadband .................. 5-13
Proportional Gain (PID) ................................. 5-80
Protection
Overcurrent, Instantaneous ....................... A2-3
Overheat, Heatsink .................................... A2-3
Overtorque ................................................. 5-98
Overvoltage ............................................... A2-3
Thermal Overload ...................................... 5-90
Undervoltage ............................................. A2-3
PWM Frequency — see Carrier Frequency
- R -
Rated Current, Motor ........................... 2-20, 5-90
Ratings .................................................. xvii, A2-1
Receiving ......................................................... 1-1
Reference Selection (Local/Remote) ............ 5-39
REMOTE Indicator Lamps ....................... 4-1, 4-2
Reset Codes ................................................. 5-83
RESET Key .............................................. 4-1, 4-3
Resistance, Motor Line-to-Line ................... A1-13
REV Indicator Lamp ................................. 4-1, 4-2
Reverse Run Prohibit .................................... A1-2
Ride-thru, Momentary Power Loss ................ 5-51
Deactivation Time ...................................... 5-51
"Right Arrow" Key ..................................... 4-1, 4-3
Rotation, PG .................................................. 5-24
RUN Indicator Lamp ................................ 4-1, 4-2
RUN Key .................................................. 4-1, 4-2
Running
Forward ...................................................... 2-24
Reverse ...................................................... 2-24
Stall Prevention Level During ..................... 5-87
Stall Prevention Selection During .............. 5-87
- S -
Sample/Hold Function ....................................5-67
Scaling Display (Digital Operator) ................. 5-17
S-Curve Characteristics .................................. 5-6
Shock Resistance –– see S-Curve
Skip Frequency –– see Prohibited Frequency
Slip Compensation ........................................ 5-84
Gain ........................................................... 5-84
Limit ........................................................... 5-84
Primary Delay Time ................................... 5-84
Selection During Regeneration .................. 5-84
Soft Start — see S-Curve
Spare Parts ................................................... A4-1
Specifications ................................................ A2-1
Speed
Detection Output Signal ............................. 5-74
Range ........................................................ A2-1
Search ........................................................ 5-64
Speed Reference, Multiple (Multi-step
Speed Operation) ................................. 5-39
Speed Search Level ...................................... 5-64
Stall Prevention
Level During Accel ..................................... 5-86
Level During Running ................................ 5-87
Limit During Accel ...................................... 5-86
Selection During Accel ............................... 5-86
Selection During Decel .............................. 5-86
Selection During Running .......................... 5-87
Start-up, Initial ................................................. 2-1
Start-up Procedure, Simplified ............................ i
Station Address, Ser. Comm.
(MODBUS Control) ........................... 5-49
STOP Indicator Lamp .............................. 4-1, 4-2
STOP Key ................................................ 4-1, 4-2
Function During Remote Run .................... 5-45
Stop Method Sel. (OH) ............................... A1-46
Stopping Method .................................. 5-14, 5-88
Stopping Method at Comm. Error
(MODBUS Control) ............................... 5-50
Storage Function ........................................... 2-27
Switching Frequency, Accel/Decel .................. 5-5
- T -
Temperature
Ambient .............................................. 1-1, A2-4
Storage ...................................................... A2-4
Terminals
Description .......................................... 1-6, 1-17
Functions ............................................ 1-6, 1-17
Screw Sizes ................................................. 1-3
Test Run Using Digital Operator
("Local" Control) ................................... 2-24
I-3
Thermal Overload Protection ........................ 5-90
Motor OL Protection Selection ................... 5-90
Motor OL Protection Time Constant .......... 5-90
Motor Rated Current .................................. 5-90
Motor Selection .......................................... 5-91
Torque Compensation ................................... 5-93
Gain [K
T
] .................................................... 5-93
Time Constant ............................................ 5-93
Torque Control (Command) ........................... 5-95
Selection .................................................... 5-95
Simplified Block Diagram ........................... 5-97
Speed/Torque Control Selection Timer ...... 5-95
Speed Limit ................................................ 5-96
Speed Limit Selection ................................ 5-96
Torque Reference Delay Time .................... 5-96
Torque Detection ........................................... 5-98
Overtorque Detection Level ....................... 5-98
Overtorque Detection Time ........................ 5-98
Selection .................................................... 5-98
Torque Limit ................................................. 5-101
Forward Torque Limit ............................... 5-101
Forward Regenerative Torque Limit ......... 5-101
Reverse Torque Limit ............................... 5-101
Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit ......... 5-101
INDEX – Co n t i n u e d
Torque Reference (Internal) [Monitor Item] . A1-27
Trim Control ................................................... 5-69
± Speed Limits ........................................... 5-69
Troubleshooting ............................................... 6-1
Flowcharts .................................................. 6-10
- U -
Up/Down Function ......................................... 5-68
Upper Limit, Freq. Ref. .................................. 5-34
"Up Arrow" Key ........................................ 4-1, 4-3
User Parameters ......................................... 5-106
- V -
V/f Pattern
Custom ..................................................... 5-108
Standard .................................................. 5-106
Voltage
Input ............................................... 5-108, A2-1
Max. ......................................................... 5-108
Mid. Frequency ........................................ 5-108
Motor Rated ........................................ 2-5, 2-10
- W -
Weight ........................................................... A5-1
Wiring
2-wire Control ................................. 1-10b, 1-20
3-Wire Control ................................. 1-10b, 1-22
Control Circuit ............................................ 1-15
Diagrams .......................................... 1-15, 1-23
Distances ............................................ 1-2, 1-15
Main Circuit Input/Output ............................. 1-2
Encoder/PG-X2 Connections ..................... 1-24
- Z -
Zero-Servo Control ...................................... 5-110
Zero-Servo Gain ...................................... 5-111
Zero-Servo Completion Width .................. 5-111
Zero Speed Control ..................................... 5-112
Zero Speed Operation ............................. 5-112
Min. Output Frequency ............................. 5-112
I-4
GPD 515/G5 Drive
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
Drives Division 16555 W. Ryerson Rd., New Berlin, WI 53151, U.S.A.
Phone: (800) YASKAWA (800-927-5292) Fax: (262) 782-3418
Internet: http://www.drives.com
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
Chicago-Corporate Headquarters
2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone: (800) YASKAWA (800-927-5292) Fax: (847) 887-7310
Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com
MOTOMAN INC.
805 Liberty Lane, West Carrollton, OH 45449, U.S.A.
Phone: (937) 847-6200 Fax: (937) 847-6277
Internet: http://www.motoman.com
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
New Pier Takeshiba South Tower, 1-16-1, Kaigan, Minatoku, Tokyo, 105-0022, Japan
Phone: 81-3-5402-4511 Fax: 81-3-5402-4580
Internet: http://www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL COMERCIO LTDA.
Avenida Fagundes Filho, 620 Bairro Saude Sao Paolo-SP, Brasil CEP: 04304-000
Phone: 55-11-5071-2552 Fax: 55-11-5581-8795
Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com.br
YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH
Am Kronberger Hang 2, 65824 Schwalbach, Germany
Phone: 49-6196-569-300 Fax: 49-6196-888-301
MOTOMAN ROBOTICS AB
Box 504 S38525, Torsas, Sweden
Phone: 46-486-48800 Fax: 46-486-41410
MOTOMAN ROBOTEC GmbH
Kammerfeldstrabe 1, 85391 Allershausen, Germany
Phone: 49-8166-900 Fax: 49-8166-9039
YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD.
1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld, G68 9LF, Scotland, United Kingdom
Phone: 44-12-3673-5000 Fax: 44-12-3645-8182
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION
Paik Nam Bldg. 901 188-3, 1-Ga Euljiro, Joong-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Phone: 82-2-776-7844 Fax: 82-2-753-2639
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.
Head Office: 151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park Singapore 556741, Singapore
Phone: 65-282-3003 Fax: 65-289-3003
TAIPEI OFFICE (AND YATEC ENGINEERING CORPORATION)
10F 146 Sung Chiang Road, Taipei, Taiwan
Phone: 886-2-2563-0010 Fax: 886-2-2567-4677
YASKAWA JASON (HK) COMPANY LIMITED
Rm. 2909-10, Hong Kong Plaza, 186-191 Connaught Road West, Hong Kong
Phone: 852-2803-2385 Fax: 852-2547-5773
BEIJING OFFICE
Room No. 301 Office Building of Beijing International Club,
21 Jianguomanwai Avenue, Beijing 100020, China
Phone: 86-10-6532-1850 Fax: 86-10-6532-1851
SHANGHAI OFFICE
27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China
Phone: 86-21-6553-6600 Fax: 86-21-6531-4242
SHANGHAI YASKAWA-TONJI M & E CO., LTD.
27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China
Phone: 86-21-6533-2828 Fax: 86-21-6553-6677
BEIJING YASKAWA BEIKE AUTOMATION ENGINEERING CO., LTD.
30 Xue Yuan Road, Haidian, Beijing 100083 China
Phone: 86-10-6232-9943 Fax: 86-10-6234-5002
SHOUGANG MOTOMAN ROBOT CO., LTD.
7, Yongchang-North Street, Beijing Economic & Technological Development Area,
Beijing 100076 China
Phone: 86-10-6788-0551 Fax: 86-10-6788-2878
YEA, TAICHUNG OFFICE IN TAIWAIN
B1, 6F, No.51, Section 2, Kung-Yi Road, Taichung City, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Phone: 886-4-2320-2227 Fax:886-4-2320-2239
Document Number: TM4515 (Supercedes: YEA-TOA-S616-10.11 and 10.12) 04/01/2002 Software Version: 01114
Data subject to change without notice.
Models: GPD515C- and CIMR-G5M Document Number: TM 4515
GPD 515/G5 Drive
Technical Manual
डाउनलोड
सार्वजनिक दुवा अद्यतनित केला
आपल्या चॅटचा सार्वजनिक दुवा अद्यतनित केला गेला आहे. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
दस्तऐवजाचा सार्वजनिक दुवा
जाहिरात
